3g Motorolla

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6
CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date
Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product. Restrictions The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola. Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others. Trademarks
Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. M-Cell, Tasknder and Intelligence Everywhere are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners. CE Compliance
The CE mark conrms Motorola Ltds statement of compliance with EU directives applicable to this product. Copies of the Declaration of Compliance and installation information in accordance with the requirements of EN50385 can be obtained from the local Motorola representative or the CNRC help desk, contact details below: Email: csc.emea@motorola.com Tel: +44 (0) 1793 565 444
Contents

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6 Chapter 1: Introduction

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status . . . . . . . HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule. . . . . Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA . . . . . . . . . . Higher Cell Capacity and Higher Spectral Efciency . WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background . . . . . 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) . . . . . . Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology LTE Detailed Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 3 1- 4 1- 6 1- 8 1-10 1-12 1-12 1-14 1-14
Chapter 2: Network Architecture

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Domain split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . USIM Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infrastructure Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . Core Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . Serving Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . Home Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . Transit Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . The Core Network (CN) Entities . . . . . . . The Access Network (AN) Entities . . . . . . The Mobile Station (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Network - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . Entities of the CN-CS Domain . . . . . . . . Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains . UMTS Network R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Media Gateways (MGWs) . . . . . . . . . . MSC Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Network Release 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS) . . . . . UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) UTRAN Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio network Controller (RNC) . . . . . . . . . Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC). Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) . . Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC) . . . . Horizon 3G-n macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . Baseband subsystem. . . . . . . . . . . . . RF subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna and Feeder Subsystem . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2- 3 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 2- 4 2- 6 2- 6 2- 6 2- 6 2- 6 2- 8 2- 8 2-10 2-10 2-12 2-12 2-14 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-18 2-18 2-20 2-20 2-22 2-22 2-24 2-26 2-28 2-28 2-28 2-30 2-30 2-30
i
Contents
User Equipment (UE) . . . . . . . . Introduction to User Equipment . UE Architecture . . . . . . . . Integrated Circuit (IC) Card . . Terminal Equipment (TE) . . . . Mobile Equipment (ME). . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
. . . . . .
2-32 2-32 2-34 2-34 2-36 2-36
Chapter 3: Network Services

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services in the UMTS Environment . . . . . . . . . Quality of Service (QoS) Architecture . . . . . . . . Quality of Service Classes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversational Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Streaming Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interactive class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Service Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . The Security Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . Condentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile equipment identication . . . . . . . . . Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . . . Distribution of authentication data from HE to SN Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . Ciphering Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens . . . . SQN and RAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication Key Management Field . . . . . Algorithms f1 -f5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTN and AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USIM Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieval of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computation of X-MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . Verication of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computation of CK and IK . . . . . . . . . . . User Authentication Response . . . . . . . . . Access Link Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data integrity protection method . . . . . . . . Input parameters to the integrity algorithm . . . Ciphering of User/Signalling Data . . . . . . . . . . Input parameters to the cipher algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 3 3- 4 3- 6 3- 8 3- 8 3- 8 3- 8 3- 8 3-10 3-10 3-12 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-18 3-18 3-18 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-24 3-24 3-24 3-26 3-26
Chapter 4: W-CDMA Theory

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Access Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) . . . Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) . . . W-CDMA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-Use of Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-Use of Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Efciency (GSM and UMTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4- 3 4- 4 4- 4 4- 4 4- 4 4- 6 4- 8 4-10 4-12
ii
Contents
Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation . Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . De-spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orthogonal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channelisation Code Tree . . . . . . . De-spreading Other Users Signals . . . . . Processing Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise 1 - Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes Scrambling and Summation . . . . . . . . De-Scrambling and Data Recovery . . . . . Multi-path Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . Inter-symbol Interference . . . . . . . . Signal Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matched Filter Operation . . . . . . . . . . The Rake Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-14 4-14 4-14 4-16 4-18 4-20 4-20 4-22 4-24 4-26 4-26 4-28 4-30 4-32 4-34 4-36 4-38 4-40 4-40 4-40 4-42 4-44
Chapter 5: The Physical Layer

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Layer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels on the Air Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trafc Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Access Channel (RACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward Access Channel (FACH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcast Channel (BCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Channel (PCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Channel (DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Physical Channels (CPCHs) . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronisation Channel (SCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Primary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Secondary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulation Symbol "a" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 1: Slot synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identication Step 3: Scrambling-code identication . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 3 5- 4 5- 6 5- 8 5- 8 5- 8 5-10 5-12 5-14 5-14 5-14 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-18 5-18 5-20 5-20 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-24 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-26 5-27 5-30
iii
Contents
Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) . . . . . . . . P-CCPCH Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCH and P-CCPCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICH Channel Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICH . . . . . . . . . Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) . . . . Secondary CCPCH Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the PRACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Access Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRACH Pre-amble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the random-access transmission . . . . . . . . . Structure of PRACH Message Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship Between PRACH and AICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH). . . . . . . . DL-DPCH Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code Transmission . Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH) . . . . . . . . . Downlink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frame Equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rate Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-30 5-30 5-32 5-34 5-36 5-36 5-38 5-40 5-41 5-42 5-42 5-42 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-46 5-48 5-50 5-50 5-52 5-54 5-56 5-58 5-58 5-58 5-58
Chapter 6: MAC, RLC, BMC, PDCP and RRC Protocols and Procedures
Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer 2 Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer 3 Protocols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . Transport Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transparent Mode (TM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unacknowledged Mode (UM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acknowledged Mode (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) . . . . . . . . Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) Protocol . . . . . . . . Radio Resource Control (RRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RRC Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcast of System Information.. . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Selection/Re-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UE State Transition Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . RRC connection establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishment of signalling connections between the UE transfer of signalling messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio bearer establishment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and the Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 3 6- 4 6- 4 6- 4 6- 6 6- 8 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-10 6-12 6-14 6-16 6-18 6-18 6-20 6-22 6-24 6-24 6-26 6-28
. . . . . .
Chapter 7: Radio Resource Management Functions

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Resource Management Overview . . . . . Introduction to Radio Resource Management . Handover Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurement Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitored List Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7777773 4 4 6 8 8
iv
Contents
Intra-frequency Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . Algorithm Description. . . . . . . . . . . . Intra-frequency Hard Handover . . . . . . . Inter-frequency Hard Handover . . . . . . . . . Overview of Inter-Frequency Hard Handover Handover Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . Inter-RAT Hard Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . Algorithm Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . Preconditions for UMTS to GSM Handover . Handover Procedures for UMTS to GSM . . UMTS to GSM Handover Measurement . . Hierarchical Cell Structure . . . . . . . . . . . HCS Handover Overview . . . . . . . . . . Compressed Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . Algorithm Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRNS Relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRNS Relocation Overview . . . . . . . . Static Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocation Due to Hard Handover . . . . . Relocation Due to Cell or URA Update . . . Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Loop Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) . . . . Directed Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Channel Conguration Control (DCCC) Rate Re-allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . UE State Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Load Control. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-10 7-10 7-12 7-14 7-14 7-16 7-18 7-18 7-20 7-24 7-26 7-28 7-30 7-32 7-32 7-34 7-36 7-36 7-36 7-38 7-38 7-40 7-42 7-44 7-46 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-48 7-50 7-52
Chapter 8: HSDPA Overview

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA . . . . . . . . Feature Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility with Release 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demand for Packet Switched Trafc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDPA Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background Services Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory Requirements . . . Higher Spectrum Efciency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Small Changes to existing Techniques and Architectures . . . . . . . . Efcient Resource Sharing in Downlink among Users . . . . . . . . . HSDPA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Higher Throughput Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid ARQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeB . . . . . . . . QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Throughput Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDPA Rel. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Changes for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 3 8- 4 8- 4 8- 4 8- 4 8- 6 8- 6 8- 6 8- 6 8- 6 8- 6 8- 8 8- 8 8- 8 8- 8 8- 8 8- 8 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-14 8-14
Contents
New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPA No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading Factor . . . New UE Capabilities / Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . New MAC-hs in NodeB and UE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol Procedure . . . . . . New Channels with HSDPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Future Enhancements of HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beamforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . .
8-14 8-14 8-14 8-14 8-14 8-16 8-16 8-16 8-18 8-18 8-18 8-18
Chapter 9: HSUPA Overview

Chapter Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSUPA vs R99 DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impact on Radio Access Network Architecture . . . . . HSUPA Protocol Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . HSUPA Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-DCH Transport Channel Processing . . . . . . . . . E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH) . E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH) E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH) . . . . . . . E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH) . . . . . . . Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9- 3 9- 4 9- 4 9- 4 9- 6 9- 6 9- 8 9-10 9-12 9-14 9-16 9-18 9-20
Chapter 10: UMTS Terrestrial Interface Protocols

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial Interfaces Introduction to UMTS Protocols . . . . . . Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . General Protocol Model . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Layers. . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . IU-CS Interface Protocols Overview . . . IU-PS Interface Protocols Overview. . . . Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols Overview. . Iub Interface (IP) Protocols Overview . . . ATM/IP Dual Protocol Stack . . . . . . . Iur Interface Protocols Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10- 3 10- 4 10- 6 10- 6 10- 6 10- 8 10- 8 10- 8 10-10 10-12 10-14 10-16 10-18 10-20
Chapter 11: UMTS Terrestrial Physical and Data Link Layer

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer Overview. . . . ATM Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concepts of ATM Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of an ATM Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching. . . . ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions of the ATM Adaptation Layer . . . . . Types of Services at the ATM Adaptation Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11- 3 11- 4 11- 6 11- 8 11-10 11-10 11-12 11-12 11-14 11-16 11-16 11-16
vi
Contents
ATM Service Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM QoS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1/T1 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 Link Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SDH Drop and Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Simplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandwidth on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Principles of SDH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical UMTS ATM Transport Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Daisy Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Protection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to IP RAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TDM Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Transport Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IP Transport Protocols on the Iub Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . Concepts of Data Link Layer Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . Internet Protocol (IP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and Layer 2/3 Switching
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-18 11-20 11-22 11-22 11-22 11-22 11-24 11-26 11-28 11-30 11-32 11-32 11-32 11-32 11-32 11-34 11-36 11-36 11-36 11-36 11-38 11-38 11-40 11-42 11-44 11-44 11-46 11-48 11-50
Chapter 12: Annexe A

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging for a UE in Idle Mode . . . . . . . . Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode RRC Connection Establishment . . . . . . RRC DCH Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . RA Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRNC Relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12- 3 12- 4 12- 6 12- 8 12-10 12-12 12-14
Chapter 13: Glossary

Glossary of technical terms . A Interface - AUTO . . . B Interface - Byte. . . . C - CW . . . . . . . . . D Interface - DYNET . . E - EXEC. . . . . . . . F Interface - Full Rate . G Interface - GWY . . . H Interface - Hyperframe I - IWU . . . . . . . . . k - KW . . . . . . . . . L1 - LV . . . . . . . . . M - MUX . . . . . . . . NACK - nW. . . . . . . O - Overlap. . . . . . . PA - PXPDN . . . . . . QA- Quiesent mode . . R - RXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13- 3 13- 3 13- 7 13-11 13-19 13-24 13-27 13-30 13-33 13-34 13-39 13-40 13-42 13-48 13-51 13-53 13-60 13-61
vii
Contents
S7- SYSGEN. T -TxBPF. . . U - UUS . . . V - VTX host . W - WWW . . X - X Window. ZC . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
13-66 13-75 13-81 13-83 13-84 13-85 13-86
viii
About This Manual
Version 1 Rev 0

Version 1 Rev 0
This page intentionally left blank.
Introduction
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 1
Introduction
1-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction
1-2
Pub-Date
2005-2006 Motorola, Inc.
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: State the WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status State the HSxPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule Describe the Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA Describe the WCDMA/HSxPA Standardization and Background State how the HSxPA standard migrates towards LTE
1-3
Version 1 Rev 0
WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status

The rst Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) networks were launched during 2002. By the end of 2005 there were 100 open WCDMA networks and a total of over 150 operators having frequency licenses for WCDMA operation. Currently, the WCDMA networks are deployed in Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) band around 2GHz in Europe and Asia including Japan and Korea.WCDMA in America is deployed in the existing 850 and 1900 spectrum allocations with a total of 9 bands being supported at Release 7 of the 3GPP specications. As of 2006 there are signs that 3G take-up is increasing. 70 operators are now offering 3G on a commercial basis and 3G services are now available in all European Union member states. While Japan retains the highest penetration of 3G services, Europe now has the highest number of subscribers. It is estimated that there are around 45 million 3G subscribers in the EU, indicating that Europe has overtaken Japan as leader in terms of subscriptions. In June 2007 the number of WCDMA 3G subscribers went over the 70 million mark worldwide. The number of available WCDMA 3G handsets continues to grow with handsets that support High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) with rates up to 7.2 mbps downlink and 1.8 mbps uplink. Applications include MP3 le players, mobile TV, as well of course voice. As WCDMA mobile penetration increases, it allows WCDMA networks to carry a larger share of voice and data trafc.WCDMA technology provides a few advantages for the operator in that it enables data but also improves basic voice. The offered voice capacity is very high because of interference control mechanisms including frequency reuse of 1, fast power control and soft handover. WCDMA makes it possible to offer substantially more voice minutes to customers. At the same time WCDMA can also enhance the voice service with wideband AMR codec, which provides clearly better voice quality than the xed land line telephone. In short, WCDMA can offer more voice minutes with better quality. In addition to the high spectral efciency, 3G WCDMA provides even more dramatic evolution in terms of base station capacity and hardware efciency. The high integration level in WCDMA is achieved because of the wideband carrier: a large number of users are supported per carrier, and fewer radio frequency carriers are required to provide the same capacity. With fewer RF parts and more digital baseband processing, WCDMA can take benet of the fast evolution in digital signal processing capacity. The high base station integration level allows efcient building of high-capacity sites since the complexity of RF combiners, extra antennas or feeder cables can be avoided. WCDMA operators are able to provide interesting data services including browsing, person-to-person video calls, sports and news video clips and mobile-TV. WCDMA enables simultaneous voice and data which allows, for example, browsing or emailing during voice conferencing, or real time video sharing during voice calls. The operators also offer laptop connectivity to the Internet and corporate intranet with the maximum bit rate of 384 kbps both in downlink and in uplink. The initial terminals and networks were limited to 64128 kbps in uplink while the latest products provide 384-kbps uplink.
1-4
Version 1 Rev 0

9 Frequency bands supported R7 More voice minutes with better quality
Base station capacity and hardware efficiency Data services offered
1-5
Version 1 Rev 0
HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule

High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) was standardized as part of 3GPP Release 5 with the rst specication version in March 2002. High-speed uplink packet access (HSUPA) was part of 3GPP Release 6 with the rst specication version in December 2004. HSDPA and HSUPA together are called high-speed packet access (HSPA). The rst commercial HSDPA networks were available at the end of 2005 and the commercial HSUPA networks are expected to be available by 2007. The HSDPA peak data rate available in the terminals is initially 1.8Mbps and will increase to 3.6 and 7.2 Mbps during 2006 and 2007, and potentially beyond 10Mbps. The HSUPA peak data rate in the initial phase is expected to be 12 Mbps with the second phase pushing the data rate to 34Mbps. HSPA is deployed on top of the WCDMA network either on the same carrier or for a high-capacity and high bit rate solution using another carrier. In both cases, HSPA and WCDMA can share all the network elements in the core network and in the radio network including base stations, Radio Network Controller (RNC), Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) and Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN). WCDMA and HSPA are also sharing the base station sites, antennas and antenna lines. The upgrade from WCDMA to HSPA requires new software package and, potentially, some new pieces of hardware in the base station and in RNC to support the higher data rates and capacity. Because of the shared infrastructure between WCDMA and HSPA, the cost of upgrading from WCDMA to HSPA is very low compared with building a new standalone data network.
1-6
Version 1 Rev 0
1-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

The performance of the radio system denes how smoothly applications can be used over the radio network. The key parameters dening application performance include data rate and network latency. There are applications that are happy with low bit rates of a few tens of kbps but require very low delay, like Voice-Over-IP (VoIP) and real time action games. On the other hand, the download time of a large le is only dened by the maximum data rate, and latency does not play any role. GPRS Release 99 typically provides 3040 kbps with latency of 600 ms. EGPRS Release 4 pushes the bit rates 34 times higher and also reduces latency below 300 ms. The EGPRS data rate and latency allow smooth application performance for several mobile-based applications including Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) browsing and push-to-talk. WCDMA enables peak data rates of 384 kbps with latency 100200 ms, which makes Internet access close to low-end digital subscriber line (DSL) connections and provides good performance for most low-delay Internet Protocol (IP) applications as well. HSPA pushes the data rates up to 12Mbps in practice and even beyond 3Mbps in good conditions. Since HSPA also reduces network latency to below 100 ms, the end user experienced performance is similar to the xed line DSL connections. No or only little effort is required to adapt Internet applications to the mobile environment. Essentially, HSPA is a broadband access with seamless mobility and extensive coverage. HSPA was initially designed to support high bit rate non-real time services. The simulation results show, however, that HSPA can provide attractive capacity also for low bit rate low-latency applications like VoIP. 3GPP Releases 6 and 7 further improve the efciency of HSPA for VoIP and other similar applications.
1-8
Version 1 Rev 0
1-9
Version 1 Rev 0

Higher Cell Capacity and Higher Spectral Efciency
Higher cell capacity and higher spectral efciency are required to provide higher data rates and new services with the current base station sites. The diagram opposite illustrates the estimated cell capacity per sector per 5MHz with WCDMA, with basic HSPA and with enhanced HSPA in the macro-cell environment. Basic HSPA includes a one-antenna Rake receiver in the terminals and two-branch antenna diversity in the base stations. Enhanced HSPA includes two-antenna equalizer mobiles and interference cancellation in the base station. The simulation results show that HSPA can provide substantial capacity benet. Basic HSDPA offers up to three times WCDMA downlink capacity, and enhanced HSDPA up to six times WCDMA. The spectral efciency of enhanced HSDPA is close to 1 bit/s/Hz/cell. The uplink capacity improvement with HSUPA is estimated between 30% and 70%. HSPA capacity is naturally suited for supporting not only symmetric services but also asymmetric services with higher data rates and volumes in downlink.
1-10
Version 1 Rev 0
1-11
Version 1 Rev 0
WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background

This section introduces the standardization framework around WCDMA, HSDPA and HSUPA and presents the standardization schedule and future development for Long Term Evolution (LTE), currently ongoing.
3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP)

The 3GPP is the forum where standardization is handled for GSM, EDGE, HSDPA, HSUPA and LTE. The background of 3GPP is in the days when WCDMA technology was being standardized following technology selections in different regions during 1997. Following that, WCDMA was chosen in several places as the basis for third-generation mobile communication systems and there was regional activity in several places around the same technological principles. It became evident, however, that this would not lead to a single global standard aligned down to bit level details. Thus, at the end of 1998 the US, Europe, Korea and Japan joined forces and created 3GPP. China followed a bit later. Note also that the related standardization organization, although marked as regional, usually had members from other countries/ regions as well. The rst major milestone was reached at the end of 1999 when Release 99 specications were published, containing the rst full series of WCDMA specications. Release 4 specications followed in early 2001. The working method had been moved between Release 99 and Release 4 away from the yearly release principle. The release cycle was made longer than just 1 year, which enabled making bigger releases with less frequent intervals. This also allowed having more consideration of what is the necessary release content rather than when are release publication data needed. Release 5 followed in 2002 and Release 6 in 2004. and Release 7 specications were ready in the second half of 2006. 3GPP originally had four different Technical Specication Groups (TSGs), and later ve following the move of GSM/EDGE activities to 3GPP, returning to four again after two of the groups amalgamated: TSG Radio Access Network (RAN) focuses on the radio interface and internal interfaces between Base Transceiver Stations (BTSs)/ Radio Network Controllers (RNCs) as well as the interface from RNC to the core network. HSDPA and HSUPA standards were under TSG RAN responsibility. TSG Core and Terminals (CT) focuses on the core network issues as well as covering, for example, signalling between the core network and terminals. TSG Services and System Architecture (SA). focuses on the services and overall system architecture. TSG GSM/EDGE RAN (GERAN) covers similar issues like TSG RAN but for the GSM/GPRS/EDGE-based radio interface. Under each TSG there are further working groups where the actual technical work is done.
1-12
Version 1 Rev 0
WCDMA/HSPA Standardization and Background 3GPP
TSG Radio Access Network (RAN) TSG Core and Terminals (CT) TSG Services and System Architecture (SA) TSG GSM/EDGE RAN (GERAN)
1-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology

3GPP work on the Evolution of the 3G Mobile System started with the RAN Evolution Work Shop, 2 - 3 November 2004 in Toronto, Canada. The Work Shop was open to all interested organizations, members and non members of 3GPP. Operators, manufacturers and research institutes presented more than 40 contributions with views and proposals on the evolution of the Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN). A set of high level requirements was identied in the Work Shop: Reduced cost per bit Increased service provisioning more services at lower cost with better user experience Flexibility of use of existing and new frequency bands Simplied architecture, Open interfaces Allow for reasonable terminal power consumption
LTE Detailed Requirements

A number of detailed requirements were established in technical report 25.913 summarised here: Peak data rate Instantaneous downlink peak data rate of 100 Mb/s within a 20 MHz downlink spectrum allocation (5 bps/Hz) Instantaneous uplink peak data rate of 50 Mb/s (2.5 bps/Hz) within a 20MHz uplink spectrum allocation); Control-plane latency Transition time of less than 100 ms from a camped state, such as Release 6 Idle Mode, to an active state such as Release 6 CELL_DCH Transition time of less than 50 ms between a dormant state such as Release 6 CELL_PCH and an active state such as Release 6 CELL_DCH; Control-plane capacity At least 200 users per cell should be supported in the active state for spectrum allocations up to 5 MHz; User-plane latency Less than 5 ms in unload condition (ie single user with single data stream) for small IP packet; User throughput Downlink: average user throughput per MHz, 3 to 4 times Release 6 HSDPA Uplink: average user throughput per MHz, 2 to 3 times Release 6 Enhanced Uplink; Spectrum efciency Downlink: In a loaded network, target for spectrum efciency (bits/sec/Hz/site), 3 to 4 times Release 6 HSDPA ) Uplink: In a loaded network, target for spectrum efciency (bits/sec/Hz/site), 2 to 3 times Release 6 Enhanced Uplink; Mobility E-UTRAN should be optimized for low mobile speed from 0 to 15 km/h. Higher mobile speed between 15 and 120 km/h should be supported with high performance. Mobility across the cellular network shall be maintained at speeds from 120 km/h to 350 km/h (or even up to 500 km/h depending on the frequency band);
1-14
Version 1 Rev 0
Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology LTE Introduction
MME/UPE MME/UPE
Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
S1
X2
eNB
E-UTRAN
eNB
X2
eNB
X2
Note: MME = Mobility Management E ntity UP E = User P lane E ntity
K ey P oints: 100mbps DL 50mbps UL

S hort control and us er plane latenc y G reater s pec tral efficiency UT R AN and G E R AN compatible
1-15
Version 1 Rev 0

Coverage Throughput, spectrum efciency and mobility targets above should be met for 5 km cells, and with a slight degradation for 30 km cells. Cells range up to 100 km should not be precluded; Further Enhanced Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) While reducing terminal complexity: same modulation, coding, multiple access approaches and UE bandwidth than for unicast operation. Provision of simultaneous dedicated voice and MBMS services to the user. Available for paired and unpaired spectrum arrangements Spectrum exibility E-UTRA shall operate in spectrum allocations of different sizes, including 1.25 MHz, 1.6 MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 15 MHz and 20 MHz in both the uplink and downlink. Operation in paired and unpaired spectrum shall be supported The system shall be able to support content delivery over an aggregation of resources including Radio Band Resources (as well as power, adaptive scheduling, etc) in the same and different bands, in both uplink and downlink and in both adjacent and non-adjacent channel arrangements. A Radio Band Resource is dened as all spectrum available to an operator; Co-existence and Inter-working with 3GPP Radio Access Technology (RAT) Co-existence in the same geographical area and co-location with GERAN/UTRAN on adjacent channels. E-UTRAN terminals supporting also UTRAN and/or GERAN operation should be able to support measurement of, and handover from and to, both 3GPP UTRAN and 3GPP GERAN. The interruption time during a handover of real-time services between E-UTRAN and UTRAN (or GERAN) should be less than 300 ms; Architecture and migration Single E-UTRAN architecture. The E-UTRAN architecture shall be packet based, although provision should be made to support systems supporting real-time and conversational class trafc E-UTRAN architecture shall minimize the presence of "single points of failure" E-UTRAN architecture shall support an end-to-end QoS Backhaul communication protocols should be optimised; Radio Resource Management Requirements Enhanced support for end to end QoS. Efcient support for transmission of higher layers. Support of load sharing and policy management across different Radio Access Technologies.
1-16
Version 1 Rev 0
Long Term Evolution (LTE) of the 3GPP Radio Technology LTE Introduction
MME/UPE MME/UPE
Evolved Packet Core (EPC)
S1
X2
eNB
E-UTRAN
eNB
X2
eNB
X2
Note: MME = Mobility Management E ntity UP E = User P lane E ntity
K ey P oints: 100mbps DL 50mbps UL

S hort control and us er plane latenc y G reater s pec tral efficiency UT R AN and G E R AN compatible
1-17
Version 1 Rev 0
1-18
Pub-Date
Network Architecture
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 2
2-1
Version 1 Rev 0
2-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Name and state the purpose of the UMTS Domains Describe the architecture of a UMTS network. Describe the purpose of the major network components. Describe the options for evolution to future releases.
2-3
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
UMTS Domains
Domain split
A basic architectural split is between the user equipment (terminals) and the infrastructure. This results in two domains: the User Equipment Domain and the Infrastructure domain. User equipment is the equipment used by the user to access UMTS services. User equipment has a radio interface to the infrastructure. The infrastructure consists of the physical nodes which perform the various functions required to terminate the radio interface and to support the telecommunication services requirements of the users. The infrastructure is a shared resource that provides services to all authorised end users within its coverage area. The reference point between the user equipment domain and the infrastructure domain is termed the "Uu" reference point (UMTS radio interface).
User equipment Domain

This domain encompasses a variety of equipment types with different levels of functionality. These equipment types are referred to as user equipment (terminals), and they may also be compatible with one or more existing access (xed or radio) interfaces e.g. dual mode UMTS-GSM user equipment. The user equipment may include a removable smart card that may be used in different user equipment types. The user equipment is further sub-divided in to the Mobile Equipment Domain (ME) and the User Services Identity Module Domain (USIM). The reference point between the ME and the USIM is termed the "Cu" reference point.
Mobile equipment Domain

The Mobile Equipment performs radio transmission and contains applications. The mobile equipment may be further sub-divided into several entities, e.g. the one which performs the radio transmission and related functions, Mobile Termination, (MT), and the one which contains the end-to-end application or (e.g. laptop connected to a mobile phone), Terminal Equipment, (TE).
USIM Domain
The USIM contains data and procedures which unambiguously and securely identify itself. These functions are typically embedded in a standalone smart card. This device is associated to a given user, and as such allows to identify this user regardless of the ME he uses.
Infrastructure Domain
The Infrastructure domain is further split into the Access Network Domain, which is characterized by being in direct contact with the User Equipment and the Core Network Domain. This split is intended to simplify/assist the process of de-coupling access related functionality from non-access related functionality and is in line with the modular principle adopted for the UMTS. The Access Network Domain comprises roughly the functions specic to the access technique, while the functions in the Core network domain may potentially be used with information ows using any access technique. This split allows for different approaches for the Core Network Domain, each approach specifying distinct types of Core Networks which can be connected to the Access Network Domain, as well as different access techniques, each type of Access Network connected to th Core Network Domain. The reference point between the access network domain and the core network domain is termed the "lu" reference point.
2-4
UMTS Domains
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
Home Network Domain [Zu] Cu SIM CARD Uu Iu [Yu]
Serving Network Domain USIM Domain Mobile Equipment Domain Access Network Domain Core Network Domain Infrastructure Domain
Transit Network Domain
User Equipment Domain
2-5
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
UMTS Domains
Access Network Domain
The Access Network Domain consists of the physical entities which manage the resources of the access network and provides the user with a mechanism to access the core network domain.
Core Network Domain

The Core Network Domain consists of the physical entities which provide support for the network features and telecommunication services. The support provided includes functionality such as the management of user location information, control of network features and services, the transfer (switching and transmission) mechanisms for signalling and for user generated information. The core network domain is sub-divided into the Serving Network Domain, the Home Network Domain and the Transit Network Domain. The reference point between the serving network domain and the home network domain is termed the [Zu] reference point. The reference point between the serving network domain and the transit network domain is termed the [Yu] reference point.
Serving Network Domain

The serving network domain is the part of the core network domain to which the access network domain that provides the users access is connected. It represents the core network functions that are local to the users access point and thus their location changes when the user moves. The serving network domain is responsible for routing calls and transport user data/information from source to destination. It has the ability to interact with the home domain to cater for user specic data/services and with the transit domain for non-user specic data/services purposes.
Home Network Domain

The home network domain represents the core network functions that are conducted at a permanent location regardless of the location of the users access point. The USIM is related by subscription to the home network domain. The home network domain therefore contains at least permanently user specic data and is responsible for management of subscription information. It may also handle home specic services, potentially not offered by the serving network domain.

The transit network domain is the core network part located on the communication path between the serving network domain and the remote party. If, for a given call, the remote party is located inside the same network as the originating UE, then no particular instance of the transit domain is activated.
2-6
UMTS Domains
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
Home Network Domain [Zu] Cu SIM CARD Uu Iu [Yu]
Serving Network Domain USIM Domain Mobile Equipment Domain Access Network Domain Core Network Domain Infrastructure Domain
User Equipment Domain
2-7
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Architecture - Release 1999

The diagram opposite illustrates the basic conguration of a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) supporting UMTS and GSM/GPRS. This architecture is as dened in Release 1999 of the 3GPP (Dec 02) specications (TS23.002)
The Core Network (CN) Entities

The CN is constituted of a Circuit Switched (CS) domain and a Packet Switched (PS) domain. These two domains differ by the way they support user trafc, as explained below. These two domains are overlapping, i.e. they contain some common entities. A PLMN can implement only one domain or both domains. CS Domain The CS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "CS type of connection" for user trafc as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "CS type of connection" is a connection for which dedicated network resources are allocated at the connection establishment and released at the connection release. The entities specic to the CS domain are: MSC - The Mobile-services Switching Centre GMSC - Gateway Mobile Service Switching Centre VLR - Visitor Location Register PS Domain The PS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "PS type of connection" for user trafc as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "PS type of connection" transports the user information using autonomous concatenation of bits called packets: each packet can be routed independently from the previous one. The entities specic to the PS domain are the GPRS specic entities, i.e. SGSN - Serving GPRS Support Node GGSN - Gateway GPRS Support Node Entities Common to the CS and PS domains The following entities are common provide common functions to the CS and PS Domains: HLR - The Home Location Register AUC - Authentication Centre EIR - Equipment Identity Register
2-8
Version 1 Rev 0

Gi
GMSC
C
AuC
H Gc
GGSN
Gp
HLR
PSTN PSTN D Gr Gn
VLR MSC BSS BSC

Abis
G E A
EIR VLR MSC

IuCS F Gs Gf
SGSN CN
IuPS Gb IuCS
RNS RNC
lub
IuPS Iur
RNS RNC
lub
BSS BSC
Abis
BTS
BTS
Um
Node B
Node B
Node B
Node B MS
BTS
Um
BTS
Uu SIM-ME I/f
ME
Cu or
SIM
USIM
2-9
Version 1 Rev 0

The Access Network (AN) Entities
Two different types of access network are used by the CN: the Base Station System (BSS) and the Radio Network System (RNS). The BSS offers a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) based technology to access the Mobile Station whereas the RNS offers a Wideband-Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA) based technology. The MSC (resp. SGSN) can connect to one of these Access Network type or to both of them. The Base Station System (BSS) The Base Station System (BSS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers, controllers, etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single A-interface as being the entity responsible for communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supporting GPRS, the BSS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Gb interface. The functionality for the A interface is described in GSM 08.02 and for the Gb interface in TS 23.060. The radio equipment of a BSS may support one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more base stations. Where an Abis-interface is implemented, the BSS consists of one Base Station Controller (BSC) and one or more Base Transceiver Station (BTS). The Radio Network System (RNS) The Radio Network System (RNS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers, controllers, etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single Iu-interface as being the entity responsible for communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supporting GPRS, the RNS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Iu-PS interface. The functionality for the Iu-CS interface is described in TS 25.410 and for the Iu-PS interface in TS 23.060. The radio equipment of a RNS may support one or more cells. A RNS may consist of one or more base stations. The RNS consists of one Radio Network Controller (RNC) and one or more Node B.
The Mobile Station (MS)

The mobile station consists of the physical equipment used by a PLMN subscriber; it comprises the Mobile Equipment (ME) and the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), called User Services Identity Module (USIM) for Release 99 and following releases. The ME comprises the Mobile Termination (MT) which, depending on the application and services, may support various combinations of Terminal Adapter (TA) and Terminal Equipment (TE) functional groups. These functional groups are described in GSM 04.02.
2-10
Version 1 Rev 0

Gi
GMSC
C
AuC
H Gc
GGSN
Gp
HLR
PSTN PSTN D Gr Gn
VLR MSC BSS BSC

Abis
G E A
EIR VLR MSC

IuCS F Gs Gf
SGSN CN
IuPS Gb IuCS
RNS RNC
lub
IuPS Iur
RNS RNC
lub
BSS BSC
Abis
BTS
BTS
Um
Node B
Node B
Node B
Node B MS
BTS
Um
BTS
Uu SIM-ME I/f
ME
Cu or
SIM
USIM
2-11
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Network - Release 1999

The diagram opposite shows a simplied schematic of a Release 1999 UMTS Network. It illustrates only those entities associated with providing a UMTS service (i.e. excludes any entities specically associated with GSM/GPRS)
Entities of the CN-CS Domain

The Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC) The Mobile-services Switching Centre (MSC) constitutes the interface between the radio system and the xed networks. The MSC performs all necessary functions in order to handle the circuit switched services to and from the mobile stations. In order to obtain radio coverage of a given geographical area, a number of base stations are normally required; i.e. each MSC would thus have to interface several base stations. In addition several MSCs may be required to cover a country. The Mobile-services Switching Centre is an exchange which performs all the switching and signalling functions for mobile stations located in a geographical area designated as the MSC area. The main difference between a MSC and an exchange in a xed network is that the MSC has to take into account the impact of the allocation of radio resources and the mobile nature of the subscribers and has to perform procedures required for the location registration (see TS 23.012) and procedures required for handovers (see TS 23.009). The Gateway MSC (GMSC) If a network delivering a call to the PLMN cannot interrogate the HLR, the call is routed to an MSC. This MSC will interrogate the appropriate HLR and then route the call to the MSC where the mobile station is located. The MSC which performs the routing function to the actual location of the MS is called the Gateway MSC (GMSC). The acceptance of an interrogation to an HLR is the decision of the operator. The choice of which MSCs can act as Gateway MSCs is for the operator to decide (i.e. all MSCs or some designated MSCs). The Visitor Location Register (VLR) A mobile station roaming in an MSC area is controlled by the Visitor Location Register (VLR) in charge of this area. When a Mobile Station (MS) enters a new location area it starts a registration procedure. The MSC in charge of that area notices this registration and transfers to the VLR the identity of the location area where the MS is situated. If this MS is not yet registered, the VLR and the HLR exchange information to allow the proper handling of calls involving the MS. A VLR may be in charge of one or several MSC areas. The VLR contains also the information needed to handle the calls set-up or received by the MSs registered in its database. The following elements are included: The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI); The Mobile Station International ISDN number (MSISDN); The Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN), see TS 23.003 for allocation principles; The Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI), if applicable; The Local Mobile Station Identity (LMSI), if used; The location area where the mobile station has been registered; The last known location and the initial location of the MS.
2-12
Version 1 Rev 0

PSTN CN-CS CN Domain GMSC HLR VLR AuC MSC OMC-T (Transport) OMC-U (UTRAN) UTRAN RNS Iub Node B RNS RNC Iub Node B Iur Iub Node B RNC Iub Node B Iu-CS SGSN Iu-PS GGSN PDN CN-PS
Uu User Equipment
2-13
Version 1 Rev 0

Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains
The Home Location Register (HLR) This functional entity is a database in charge of the management of mobile subscribers. A PLMN may contain one or several HLRs: it depends on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of the equipment and on the organisation of the network. The following kinds of information are stored there: Subscription information. Location information enabling the charging and routing of calls towards the MSC where the MS is registered (e.g. the MS Roaming Number, the VLR Number, the MSC Number, the Local MS Identity). If GPRS is supported, location information enabling the charging and routing of messages in the SGSN where the MS is currently registered (e.g. the SGSN Number). The types of identity are attached to each mobile (e.g. International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI), one or more Mobile Station International ISDN Number(s) (MSISDN), if GPRS is supported zero or more Packet Data Protocol (PDP) address(es)). The Authentication Centre (AuC) The Authentication Centre (AuC) is an entity which stores data for each mobile subscriber to allow the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) to be authenticated and to allow communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network to be ciphered. The AuC transmits the data needed for authentication and ciphering via the HLR to the VLR, MSC and SGSN which needs to authenticate a mobile station. The Authentication Centre (AuC) is associated with an HLR, and stores an identity key for each mobile subscriber registered with the associated HLR. This key is used to generate: Data which are used to authenticate the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI). A key used to cipher communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network. The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) in the GSM system is the logical entity which is responsible for storing in the network the International Mobile Equipment Identities (IMEIs), used in the GSM system. The equipment is classied as "white listed", "grey listed", "black listed" or it may be unknown as specied in TS 22.016 and TS 29.002. This functional entity contains one or several databases which store(s) the IMEIs used in the GSM system. An EIR shall as a minimum contain a "white list" (Equipment classied as "white listed"). See also TS 22.016 on IMEI.
2-14
Version 1 Rev 0

PSTN CN-CS CN Domain GMSC HLR VLR AuC MSC OMC-T (Transport) OMC-U (UTRAN) UTRAN RNS Iub Node B RNS RNC Iub Node B Iur Iub Node B RNC Iub Node B Iu-CS SGSN Iu-PS GGSN PDN CN-PS
Uu User Equipment
2-15
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Network R4
UMTS Network R4
In R4 the separation of the switching and call control functions within the core network is commonly referred to as a softswitch architecture. The call control component, i.e. the MSC server, is the softswitch in this case. This separation of functions makes it easier to scale the network as the trafc demand increases. If the network planners require more switching capacity they can add MGWs; if they require more call control capacity they then add more MSC servers. This is a clear distinction from the UMTS Release 99 and GSM networks, in which the call control and switching functions are all carried out within the MSC and gateway MSC (GMSC).
Media Gateways (MGWs)

This translates media trafc between different types of network. Functionality carried out by the MGW includes: Termination of bearer channels from the circuit switched and packet switched networks; Echo cancellation for circuit switched circuits; Translation of media from one CODEC form to another, Each MGW is controlled by one or more MSC servers.
MSC Server
This performs functions such as call control for mobile-originated and mobile-terminated calls, and mobility management in terms of maintenance of the registry of mobiles within its area of control. The MSC server integrates with the Visitor Location Register (VLR) component, which holds location information as well as CAMEL (customized applications for mobile network enhanced logic) data for subscribers. Functions carried out by the MSC server include: Controlling the registration of mobiles to provide mobility management; Providing authentication functions; Routing mobile-originated calls to their destination; Routing mobile-terminated calls by using paging to individual mobiles.
The MSC server terminates signalling from the mobile network over the Iu interface to the RNC. It also controls the establishment of bearers across its core by the use of MGWs under its control.
2-16
UMTS Network R4
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Network R4
Network Management (NMS)
CN CS Domain Um GERAN
BTS BSC MGW MGW PSTN/ISDN
MSC Server
HLR/VLR/EIR
Uu UTRAN
NODEB RNC SGSN
CN PS Domain
GGSN Data Network
2-17
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Network Release 5

Release 5 (R5) builds on the partial implementation of IP packet switching within the core network, to move to an all-IP architecture. In this release, packets can be moved end-to-end using IP transport with an enhanced GPRS network connected to an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS). The GPRS backbone for R5 must be able to provide similar levels and classications of QoS usually associated with ATM networks. This is to allow for the delivery of time-sensitive trafc such as voice and multimedia. As well as enhancements to the core network, the RAN also migrates from ATM to IP. Even though the vision for R5 is for a total IP solution, the operator may well still use ATM as a transport solution for some parts of the network. This is possible because all UMTS releases must provide backward compatibility with earlier releases. Notice that in the R5 network, the CS domain can be dispensed with since the services associated with it, such as transfer of voice trafc, can be carried over the GPRS and IMS networks using IP QoS mechanisms. That given, many operators may still be using the R4 CS domain as well as the R5 IMS architecture. This allows for a gradual migration to an all-IP architecture with the minimal disruption to service. Some voice calls may be handled using the CS domain and some, for example video call services, via the IMS.
IP MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM (IMS)

R5 introduces a new network domain called the IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS). This is an IP network domain designed to provide appropriate support for real-time multimedia services. The UE communicates with the IMS using GPRS, with the IMS being directly connected to the GGSN. The IMS provides services to mobile users such as: Real-time communication using voice, video or multimedia messaging (i.e. voice and video telephony); Audioconferencing and videoconferencing; Content delivery services such as video, audio or multimedia download; Content streaming services such as video, audio or multimedia streaming (e.g. using video on demand server); Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS). Each operators IMS can be connected to other operators IMSs, allowing multimedia services between users on different networks. Connections to the public Internet allow MMS messaging as well as voice over IP (VoIP) and video telephony between mobile and xed-line users. Finally, the interface to the ISDN (or other circuit switched networks) allows VoIP calls to be connected through to conventional xed-line and mobile users, e.g. GSM. Connections between the IMS and other IP networks are controlled by rewalls to protect against hacking. The interface between the IMS and the CS network is controlled by the softswitch and MGW components. Within the operators network the IMS is connected to the Home Subscriber Server (HSS) to allow for subscriber authentication, authorization and mobility management. For R5 and beyond, the IMS can be used to provide transport for all of the operators services, including conventional voice calls.
2-18
Version 1 Rev 0

Network Management (NMS)
Um
PSTN/ISDN
GERAN
BTS BSC
CN PS Domain Uu UTRAN
HSS NODEB RNC
ATM/IP
SGSN
GGSN
IMS
IP Multimedia
2-19
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

The UTRAN consists of a set of Radio Network Subsystems (RNSs) connected to the Core Network through the IuCS and IuPS. A RNS consists of a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and one or more Node Bs. A Node B is connected to the RNC through the Iub interface. A Node B can support FDD mode, TDD mode or dual-mode operation. The RNC is responsible for the Handover decisions that require signalling to the UE. An RNC may include a combining/splitting function to support combination/splitting of information streams. Inside the UTRAN, the RNCs of the Radio Network Subsystems can be interconnected together through the Iur. Iu(s) and Iur are logical interfaces. Iur can be conveyed over direct physical connection between RNCs or virtual networks using any suitable transport network.
UTRAN Functions
The following is a list of the functions performed by the UTRAN sub-systems. These functions will be discussed in further detail in later chapters. Functions related to overall system access control Admission Control Congestion Control System information broadcasting Radio channel ciphering and deciphering Functions related to mobility Handover SRNS Relocation Functions related to radio resource management and control Radio resource conguration and operation Radio environment survey combining/splitting control Radio bearer connection set-up and release (Radio Bearer Control) Allocation and deallocation of Radio Bearers Radio protocols function RF power control RF power setting Radio channel coding/decoding Channel coding control Initial (random) access detection and handling CN Distribution function for Non Access Stratum messages
Functions related to broadcast and multicast services NOTE: Only Broadcast is applicable for Release 1999. Broadcast/Multicast Information Distribution Broadcast/Multicast Flow Control CBS Status Reporting
2-20
Version 1 Rev 0

Core Network Iu Iu
RNS
RNC Iub Node B Iub Node B Iur Iub Node B RNC Iub
RNS
Node B
2-21
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC)

A Radio Network Controller (RNC) is a network component within the PLMN with the functions to support one or more Node B, Cell and/or User Equipment. Typically one RNC can support up to 300 Node Bs, which in turn can provide resources for up to 6 cells. However, it should be noted that the ultimate limiting factor in planning the number of RNCs required within a PLMN will be the trafc capacity that the RNC can support. Typical values will start at around 1000 Erlang, rising to 10,000 Erlang as networks mature. A Radio Network Controller (RNC) can be considered to operate in one or more of the following roles: Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC) Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)
Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC)

Controlling RNC is a role an RNC can take with respect to a specic set of Node Bs. There is only one Controlling RNC for any Node B. The Controlling RNC has the overall control of the logical resources of its node Bs. The main functions of a CRNC are: Control of the Radio Resources for the Node-B it controls. Provision of Services to the Node-B that it controls. Load and Congestion Control Admission Control Code allocation for new radio links
2-22
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC) UTRAN CRNC Functions
Controlling of the Radio Resources Provision of Services to the Node-B Load and Congestion Control Admission Control Code Allocation for new Radio Links
C-RNC
Iu lur
Iu
C-RNC
2-23
Version 1 Rev 0

Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)
A Serving RNC is the RNC located within a Serving RNS (SRNS). SRNS is a role an RNS can take with respect to a specic connection between an UE and UTRAN. There is one Serving RNS for each UE that has a connection to UTRAN. The Serving RNS is in charge of the radio connection between a UE and the UTRAN. The Serving RNS terminates the Iu for this UE. The main functions of an SRNC are: Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE. L2 Processing (PDCP, RLC, MAC). Radio Resource Control operations. Mapping of Iu Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channels Parameters. Hand-over decisions. Outer loop power control. Macro-Diversity combining and splitting.
2-24
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC) UTRAN SRNC Functions
Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE L2 Processing (PDCP , RLC, MAC) Radio Resource Control Operations Mapping of Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channel Parameters Hand-Over Decisions Outer Loop Power Control Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting
S-RNC
2-25
Version 1 Rev 0

Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)
A Drift RNC is located within a Drift RNS. DRNS is role that an RNS can take with respect to a specic connection between a UE and UTRAN. A DRNS is any RNS that supports the Serving RNS by providing radio resources via the cell(s) it controls, to provide additional radio bearer services for a specic connection between a UE and UTRAN. There may be zero, one or more DRNSs associated with a specic connection between a UE and UTRAN. The main functions of a DRNC are: Macro-diversity combining and splitting. No L2 processing, i.e. no re-transmissions, acknowledgements or negative acknowledgements. Transparent routing of data on the Iub and Iur Interfaces, except when Common or shared channels are used.
2-26
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC) UTRAN DRNC Functions
Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting No L2 Processing Transparent Routing except for Common/Shared Channels
S-RNC
D-RNC
2-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Horizon 3G-n macro
Horizon 3G-n macro

The Horizon 3G-n macro logical structure is divided in four subsystems responsible for all processing needed for radio transmission and reception in one or more cells. The Horizon 3G-n macro Subsystems are: Transport subsystem. Baseband subsystem. Control subsystem Antenna and feeder subsystem
Transport subsystem
Its responsible for the termination of the IuB interface connecting the Horizon 3G-n to RNC to exchange information and performs ATM switching It is formed by two boards: NDTI (NodeB Digital Trunk Interface) and NAOI (NodeB ATM Optical Interface)
Baseband subsystem
The baseband subsystem processes uplink and downlink signals at the physical layer, and includes the following functions: Forwarding and controlling baseband signals and RF signals Processing uplink and downlink baseband signals Supporting the HSDPA Supporting the resource pool Supporting RRU connection Search over UL access channels Demodulation over dedicated channels Uplink channel encoding Channel estimation RAKE receiving Softer combination Decoding
HULP (NodeB HSUPA Up-link Processing Unit), HDLP (NodeB HSDPA Down-link Processing Unit), HBBI (HSDPA Baseband Processing and Interface Unit) (or NBBI (NodeB Baseband Processing and Interface Unit) ), and HBOI (HSDPA Baseband Processing and Optical Interface Unit) boards are part of the baseband subsystem .
2-28
Horizon 3G-n macro
Version 1 Rev 0
Horizon 3G-n macro Logical structure of the Horizon 3G-n macro

Figure 2-1
Transport
Subsystem
Baseband Subsystem
RF
Subsystem
RNC
Antenna
Control Subsystem
H3G-n macro
2-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Horizon 3G-n macro
Horizon 3G-n macro

RF subsystem
All RF signals and it conversion to digital signals are processed by the RF subsystem. This subsystem include the following functions: Modulate and demodulate RF signals. Amplifying the received signals Analog-to-digital conversion and viceversa. Digital down and up conversion. Matched ltering. Digital Automatic Gain Control (DAGC). Shaping and ltering downlink spread signals. converting RF signals to the transmit frequency band. Power amplication.
The MTRU (Multi-carrier Transceiver Unit) and MAFU (Multi-carrier Antenna Filter Unit) boards are installed in this subsystem.
Control subsystem
The control subsystem provides the control of the entire Horizon 3G-n macro Indoor, provides the system synchronization clock, alarm management, IuB signal termination, resource and conguration management environment monitoring, and control the RET antennas system. The control subsystem is formed by two boards: NMON (NodeB Monitor Unit) and NMPT (NodeB Main Processing and Timing Unit).
Antenna and Feeder Subsystem

This subsystem transmits and receives signals over the air interface. With the help of the (optional) TMA, amplies weak signals from the antennas, improves the receiver sensitivity and enhances the uplink coverage of the Horizon 3G-n macro BTS. The Antenna and Feeder subsystem is formed by the following components: Antenna. Feeder. TMA ( Optional)
2-30
Horizon 3G-n macro
Version 1 Rev 0
Horizon 3G-n macro logical structure of the Horizon 3G-n macro Indoor
Figure 2-2
Transport subsystem Baseband subsystem
MTRU Rx0
RF subsystem
MAFU Rx0 Duplexer
Antenna TMA Antenna TMA
RNC
NDTI/ NAOI
HULP HBBI HDLP
Rx1 Tx PA
Rx1 Tx
NMPT
NMON
Control subsystem
2-31
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

Introduction to User Equipment
UMTS aims to offer service capabilities that enable a wide variety of services to be implemented. Such services range from simple services like speech, to complex multimedia services containing several simultaneous media components that place totally different requirements on the system and on the terminal equipment. By standardising service capabilities rather than actual services, more exibility is available for service providers/network operators to create unique services. The same principle also applies for UMTS terminals, i.e. the types of terminals are not standardised and are therefore not limited in any way. A wide range of terminal types is likely in the UMTS environment, e.g. speech only terminals, videophones, data terminals, wideband data terminals, fax terminals, multi-band/multi-mode terminals and any combination of the aforementioned. Terminal development trends for todays terminals are mainly towards higher integration levels resulting in smaller size. The goal of "four 100s" has been a rule of thumb target for handsets, i.e., 100 hour standby, 100 cc size, 100 gram weight and also 100 MIPS performance. The size targets have already been achieved and any requirement for smaller terminals is questionable from the usability and physical size limitations perspective. The other target parameters have no maximum limitations. On the other hand, we can see the following further trends for near future terminals: Application specic terminals (smart trafc, vending machine radio, etc.); Increased number of value adding features (graphics, smart messaging, PC connectivity and compatibility, memory databases, speech recognition, messaging features, display functions, and different source coding methods (e.g., JPEG)); Support for higher number of source codecs (several speech codecs); Multiband terminals (e.g., GSM in 900MHz and DCS1800); Multimode terminals (e.g., UMTS/GSM dualmode terminal); Dynamic SW congurability; These trends are more than likely to continue in the future. Multiband and multimode terminals with high integration levels would be preferred by the users. Technological development of these terminals relies on new packaging and interconnection technologies, as well as technological steps like SW-radio. The concept trends of mobile handheld terminals is likely to diverge from simple speech terminals towards a variety of different types, e.g., communicators, wearable phones, data terminals, etc. The dominant role of speech terminals will be challenged in the future by these new data- and multimedia-oriented terminals.
2-32
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
Speech Only Videophones Data Terminals Wideband Data Terminals Fax Terminals Application Specific Terminals Multiband/Multimode Terminals Dynamic Software Configurability Value Adding Features
2-33
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

UE Architecture
The UMTS UE will consists of a number of logical software and hardware modules. Although these modules may be delivered by a single vendor as single physical and indivisable package, it is also possible that they will be independent physical units. The reference architecture showing the modules of the UE, along with their corresponding network functions are illustrated opposite and described in the following paragraphs.
Integrated Circuit (IC) Card

The IC card is the module on which are implemented the user and subscription dependent functions of the UE. The primary component of the IC card is the User Service Identity Module (USIM) The mandatory requirements for IC Cards used for holding USIM application, are related to the need to have one USIM application on the IC card, as well as to the security issues. The following functionality is required from the IC card holding a USIM application: Physical characteristics same as used for GSM SIM The support of one USIM application The support of one or more user prole on the USIM Possibility to update USIM specic information over the air, (e.g. such information as service prole information, algorithms, etc.) in a secure and controlled manner. Security mechanisms to prevent USIM application specic information from unauthorised access or alteration. User authentication. In addition to the mandatory functions, the IC Card may support the following additional, optional functionality The support for more than one simultaneous application (Multiple USIM, Ecash and/or some other applications). Possibility to have shared applications/les between multiple subscriptions, including ADNs, other user/SP controlled les and data. Possibility for some applications/les to be restricted to one or some of the subscriptions, under user/SP control. Inclusion of a payment method (electronic money and/or prepaid and/or subscription details) An interface allowing highly secure downloading and conguration of new functionality, new algorithms and new applications into the IC card as well as updating the existing applications, algorithms and data. Support for storing and possibly executing encryption related information, such as keys and algorithms. In multi application cards a functionality to prevent the unauthorised access and alteration of USIM specic information by other applications residing on the card. The ability to accept popular value-adding IC card applications, such as digital signature applications, EMV credit/debit card, electronic purses such as Mondex and Visacash, etc. Possibility for one UMTS SP to block multiple subscription on the card the SP has issued. Shared applications could include databases (e.g. telephone books), service proles (e.g. controlling divert information), users preferences (e.g. short dialling codes) and SP-specic parameters inside a USIM application (e.g. call barring tables).
2-34
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE) UE Architecture

USER APPLICATION USER APPLICATION
USER EQUIPMENT (UE)
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT R
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
TAF
USIM
NT Tu RT MT MOBILE EQUIPMENT
CORE NETWORK Iu UTRAN
IC CARD
2-35
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

Terminal Equipment (TE)
The TE is the part of the UE on which the users end-to-end application functions execute, terminating the services transported via the UMTS bearers. The TE is regarded as a service dependent component, interacting with a peer TE in the external network.
Mobile Equipment (ME)

The ME is the users subscription independent, but mobile system dependent component of the UE. It will terminate all control plane functions and the user plane UMTS bearer. The ME consists of the following modules: Terminal Adaptation Function (TAF) Mobile Termination (MT) TAF The TAF provided the interaction between the TE and MT, via the R interface/reference point. This may include the ability of the TE to control the MT by, for example, the use of commands sets ( e.g. Modem AT control commands). MT The MT is the telecom service independent, but UMTS dependent portion of the UE which terminates the radio transmissions to and from the network. Within the MT two further modules are dened. The Radio Termination (RT) which is dependent upon the the radio access network. A single RT will provide common functions for all services using the same radio access technology. For UMTS the RT terminates the UTRAN physical layer (Uu interface) and also encompasses the Access-Stratum layer 2 and layer three protocols. The RT interfaces to the Network Termination (NT), at the Tu reference points. While the RT is RAN dependent, the NT is CN dependent, and thus terminates, at the serving network, the Non-access Stratum layer 3 protocols, for functions such as mobility management, call control, session management, etc. To full many of these functions, the NT must have access to information stored on the USIM (e.g. security information), this is accessed via the interface at the Cu reference points.
2-36
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE) UE Architecture

USER APPLICATION USER APPLICATION
USER EQUIPMENT (UE)
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT R
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
TAF
USIM
NT Tu RT MT MOBILE EQUIPMENT
CORE NETWORK Iu UTRAN
IC CARD
2-37
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
2-38
Pub-Date
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
2-38
Pub-Date
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
2-38
Pub-Date
Network Services
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
Chapter 3
Network Services
3-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Services
3-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the UMTS service classications Describe Quality of Service Architecture Describe the UMTS Security Architecture
3-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Services in the UMTS Environment

Back in the days of 1G networks there was only one available service, speech. When 2G was released the idea of having third parties providing services or service content was open to development. The diagram opposite illustrates how services, their creation and content provision are located in UMTS. The system must be able to handle end-to-end service requirements in all levels and the high investment required is mainly there to provide the necessary QoS for those services. The lower layers (Physical and Network) have more hardware requirements so therefore more cost. The service creation layer is provided by such things as HTML and WAP and the Content Provider Layer provides the end user services, for instance a banks internet service. The commercial nature of the UMTS services means that sensitive information will be transferred and the security mechanisms used must be robust enough to cope.
3-4
Version 1 Rev 0

Content Provider Layer
Network Management Security Functions End-to-end QoS
Service Creation Layer
Network Element Layer
Physical Transmission Layer
3-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Quality of Service (QoS) Architecture

From the end user point of view, the UMTS network is a network for services. In this respect the technology itself is not the most important aspect but it is an enabler providing QoS so that the end-users can be satised with the end-to-end services they use. The end-to-end services in the UMTS network are carried by bearers and a bearer is a service providing QoS between two dened points. The UMTS network contains many system levels having their own QoS properties. For example the air interface and the Iub. The QoS that has to be provided by the different bearers is illustrated by the diagram opposite. The end-to-end service sets the requirement for QoS. These requirements are then mapped to the next level which in turn maps the QoS to the next level and so on. As a result the UMTS network forms a connection through itself fullling the original QoS requirements. To make this possible the QoS requirements are classied by trafc classes. The leading principles that are applied to UMTS QoS classes are: The QoS classes must allow for efcient use of the UMTS UTRA service (radio capacity); The CN and UTRAN must be allowed to evolve independently; The UMTS network can evolve independently but must be backwards compatible with its surrounding networks; The operator must be allowed to utilise existing technology within the UMTS system i.e. ATM and IP.
3-6
Version 1 Rev 0

UE TE MT NodeB RNC MSC/VLR SGSN GMSC GGSN
End-to-end Services
Local Bearer Services
UMTS Bearer Services

CN Bearer Services
External Bearer Services
Radio Access Bearer Services

Iu Bearer Services
Radio Bearer Services

UTRA Bearer Services
Backbone Bearer Services
Physical Bearer Services
Physical Bearer Services
3-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Quality of Service Classes

Network Services are considered end-to-end, this means from a Terminal Equipment (TE) to another TE. An End-to-End Service may have a certain Quality of Service (QoS) which is provided for the user of a network service. It is the user that decides whether he is satised with the provided QoS or not. To realise a certain network QoS a Bearer Service with clearly dened characteristics and functionality is to be set up from the source to the destination of a service. The diagram opposite illustrates the QoS classes for UMTS. The main distinguishing factor between these QoS classes is how delay sensitive the trafc is: Conversational class is meant for trafc which is very delay sensitive while Background class is the most delay insensitive trafc class. Conversational and Streaming classes are mainly intended to be used to carry real-time trafc ows. Interactive class and Background are mainly meant to be used by traditional Internet applications like WWW, Email, Telnet, FTP and News. Due to looser delay requirements, compared to conversational and streaming classes, both provide better error rate by means of channel coding and retransmission.
Conversational Class
The most well known use of this scheme is telephony speech (e.g. GSM). But with Internet and multimedia a number of new applications will require this scheme, for example voice over IP and video conferencing tools. Real time conversation is always performed between peers (or groups) of live (human) end-users. This is the only scheme where the required characteristics are strictly given by human perception. (e.g. The real time data ow is always aiming at a live (human) destination).
Streaming Class
This scheme is one of the newcomers in data communication, raising a number of new requirements in both telecommunication and data communication systems. It is characterised by the fact that the time relations (variation) between information entities (i.e. samples, packets) within a ow shall be preserved, although it does not have any requirements on low transfer delay. The delay variation of the end-to-end ow shall be limited, to preserve the time relation (variation) between information entities of the stream. When the user is looking at (listening to) real time video (audio) the scheme of real time streams applies.
Interactive class
Interactive trafc is the other classical data communication scheme that on an overall level is characterised by the request response pattern of the end-user. At the message destination there is an entity expecting the message (response) within a certain time. Round trip delay time is therefore one of the key attributes. Another characteristic is that the content of the packets shall be transparently transferred (with low bit error rate). Examples are: web browsing, data base retrieval, server access.
Background Task
Background trafc is one of the classical data communication schemes that on an overall level is characterised by that the destination is not expecting the data within a certain time. The scheme is thus more or less delivery time insensitive. Another characteristic is that the content of the packets shall be transparently transferred (with low bit error rate). Examples are background delivery of E-mail notication, SMS, download of databases and reception of measurement records.
3-8
Version 1 Rev 0

QoS C las s R equirement for R equirement for realtime data performanc e trans mis s ion
V ery high E rrors are permitted to a certain degree
S ervic e
C onvers ational
S peech s ervice and videophone
S treaming
High
Data needs to be Multimedia s ervice trans ferred s teadily and continuously Data needs to be integral and correct W eb brows er and location-bas ed s ervices E -mail
Interactive
F airly high
B ackground
No requirement
Data needs to be integral and correct
3-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Supported Service Rates

The supported bit rates supported used in UMTS range somewhere between 0 to 7.2 mbit/s per user. However the actual bit rates are meaningless without dening the QoS offered together with the bit rates. The slides opposite illustrate typical data rates together with the types of service offered. Different combinations of the supported bit rates maybe put together in one call, for example you may have Sig 3.4 kbit/s + CS service + PS Service.
Description of Terminology
In the sub sections below the terminology used in the slides is explained. Connection Oriented and Connectionless Oriented Services Connection-oriented Requires a session connection (analogous to a phone call) be established before any data can be sent. This method is often called a "reliable" network service. It can guarantee that data will arrive in the same order. Connection-oriented services set up virtual links between end systems through a network. Connectionless Does not require a session connection between sender and receiver. The sender simply starts sending packets (called datagrams) to the destination. This service does not have the reliability of the connection-oriented method, but it is useful for periodic burst transfers. A connectionless network provides minimal services. Trafc Type The bearer requirements are that the following is provided: Guaranteed/constant bit rate; Non-guaranteed/dynamically variable bit rate; Real time dynamically variable bit rate with a minimum guaranteed bit rate. Real time and non real time services
Trafc Characteristics Point-to-point services to be provided: Uni-directional Service offered in one direction; Bi-directional Service offered in both directions; Symmetric The data rate is roughly the same uplink and downlink; Asymmetric The data rate is more heavily weighted in one direction.
Uni-directional Point-to-Multipoint: Multicast Thie end user is specied before the connection is established. Multicast Broadcast Multimedia Service (MBMS) is an example of this: Broadcast The messages are broadcast to to all UEs and the end user is not known before. Cell Broadcast is an example of this.
3-10
Version 1 Rev 0

S R B S ervic e B idirectional S ignalling Data R ate 3.4 kbit/s , 13.6 kbit/s
T R B C S S ervic e AMR S peech S ervice T rans parent Data S ervice Non-trans parent Data S ervice
T R B P S S ervic e B idirectional s ymmetric V oIP s peech s ervice B idirectional s ymmetric or as ymmetric s treaming s ervice Unidirectional as ymmetric s treaming s ervice B idirectional s ymmetric or as ymmetric interactive s ervice
Data R ate 12.2 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 56 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , and 28.8 kbit/s 57.6 kbit/s , 28.8 kbit/s , and 14.4 kbit/s
Data R ate 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , 16 kbit/s , 8 kbit/s
256 kbit/s , 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s 384 kbit/s , 256 kbit/s , 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s 384 kbit/s , 256 kbit/s , 144 kbit/s , 128 kbit/s , 64 kbit/s , 32 kbit/s , 16 kbit/s and 8 kbit/s 3648 kbit/s , 2048 kbit/s , 1536 kbit/s , 1024 kbit/s , 768 kbit/s
B idirectional s ymmetric or as ymmetric background s ervice
High-s peed data s ervice interactive and background unidirectional
3-11
Version 1 Rev 0
The Security Architecture

Five security feature groups are dened. Each of these feature groups meets certain threats, accomplishes certain security objectives: Network access security (I): the set of security features that provide users with secure access to 3G services, and which in particular protect against attacks on the (radio) access link. Network domain security (II): the set of security features that enable nodes in the provider domain to securely exchange signalling data, and protect against attacks on the wireline network. User domain security (III): the set of security features that secure access to mobile stations. Application domain security (IV): the set of security features that enable applications in the user and in the provider domain to securely exchange messages. Visibility and congurability of security (V): the set of features that enables the user to inform himself whether a security feature is in operation or not and whether the use and provision of services should depend on the security feature.
3-12
Version 1 Rev 0

(IV) User Application Provider Application Application Stratum
(V) TE
(III) USIM
(I)
(I) HE (II)
Home Stratum/ Serving Stratum
(I)
(I) SN (I) Transport Stratum AN
MT
3-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Security and Privacy

User authentication:
The property that the Serving Network (SN) corroborates the identity of the user;
Network authentication:
The property that the user corroborates that he is connected to a serving network that is authorised by the users HE to provide him services; this includes the guarantee that this authorisation is recent.
Condentiality
Cipher algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securely negotiate the algorithm that they shall use subsequently; Cipher key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on a cipher key that they may use subsequently; Condentiality of user data: the property that user data cannot be overheard on the radio access interface; Condentiality of signalling data: the property that signalling data cannot be overheard on the radio access interface.
Data integrity
Integrity algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securely negotiate the integrity algorithm that they shall use subsequently; Integrity key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on an integrity key that they may use subsequently; Data integrity and origin authentication of signalling data: the property that the receiving entity (MS or SN) is able to verify that signalling data has not been modied in an unauthorised way since it was sent by the sending entity (SN or MS) and that the data origin of the signalling data received is indeed the one claimed.
Mobile equipment identication

In certain cases, SN may request the MS to send it the mobile equipment identity of the terminal. The mobile equipment identity shall only be sent after authentication of SN with exception of emergency calls. The IMEI should be securely stored in the terminal. However, the presentation of this identity to the network is not a security feature and the transmission of the IMEI is not protected. Although it is not a security feature, it should not be deleted from UMTS however, as it is useful for other purposes.
3-14
Version 1 Rev 0
User Authentication Network Authentication Confidentiality Data integrity Mobile equipment identification
3-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Authentication and Key Agreement

Authentication and Key Agreement (AKA) achieves mutual authentication by the user and the network showing knowledge of a secret key K which is shared between and available only to the USIM and the AuC in the users HE. In addition the USIM and the HE keep track of counters SEQMS and SEQHE respectively to support network authentication. The method was chosen in such a way as to achieve maximum compatibility with the current GSM security architecture and facilitate migration from GSM to UMTS. The method is composed of a challenge/response protocol identical to the GSM subscriber authentication and key establishment protocol combined with a sequence number-based one-pass protocol for network authentication derived from the ISO standard ISO/IEC 9798-4
Distribution of authentication data from HE to SN

Upon receipt of a request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE/AuC sends an ordered array of n authentication vectors (the equivalent of a GSM "triplet") to the VLR/SGSN. Each authentication vector consists of the following components: a random number RAND, an expected response XRES, a cipher key CK, an integrity key IK and an authentication token AUTN. Each authentication vector is good for one authentication and key agreement between the VLR/SGSN and the USIM.

When the VLR/SGSN initiates an authentication and key agreement, it selects the next authentication vector from the array and sends the parameters RAND and AUTN to the user. The USIM checks whether AUTN can be accepted and, if so, produces a response RES which is sent back to the VLR/SGSN. The USIM also computes CK and IK. The VLR/SGSN compares the received RES with XRES. If they match the VLR/SGSN considers the authentication and key agreement exchange to be successfully completed. The established keys CK and IK will then be transferred by the USIM and the VLR/SGSN to the entities which perform ciphering and integrity functions.
3-16
Version 1 Rev 0
MS
SN/VLR Authentication request
HE/HLR
Distribution authentication vectors from HE to SN
Generate vectors A V (1 . . . n) Authentication data respons e AV (1 . . . n) Store authentication vectors Select authentication vectors
User authentication request RAND(i) || U A TN(i) Verify A UTN(i) compute User authentication RES(i) Compare RES(i) and XRES(i) Compute CK(i) and IK(i) Select CK(i) and IK(i)
Authentication K ey
3-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Ciphering Algorithms
The ciphering algorithms used in UMTS are shown on the slide opposite. As can be seen a lot of different algorithms are active in the UMTS system. Algorithms f1 to f5 are of the type that are used to compute numbers for use in authentication procedures. Two very important algorithms, f8 and f9 are also shown, they have the following functions.
F8
This algorithm will perform the ciphering function. The ciphering function is performed either in the RLC sub-layer or in the MAC sub-layer according to the following rules: If a radio bearer is using a non-transparent RLC mode (AM or UM), ciphering is performed in the RLC sub-layer. If a radio bearer is using the transparent RLC mode, ciphering is performed in the MAC sub-layer (MAC-d entity). Ciphering when applied is performed in the S-RNC and the ME and the context needed for ciphering (CK, Count-C, etc.) is only known in S-RNC and the ME.
F9
Most of the control signalling information elements that are sent between the MS and the network are considered sensitive and must be integrity protected. Therefore a message authentication function has been developed to solve this problem. The MS will still go through the initial RRC connection establishment sequence and perform the set-up security functions. After this however some signalling messages will be encoded using the f9 algorithm. This will be the case for all RRC, MM, CC, GMM and SM Messages. The MM procedure in the MS will be the process responsible for starting the integrity protection procedure. AK AKA AUTN MAC XRES Anonymity Key Authentication and key agreement Authentication Token The message authentication code included in AUTN, computed using f1 Expected Response
3-18
Version 1 Rev 0
F1 - Message authentication function used to compute MAC F1* - Message authentication function used to compute MAC-S F2 - Message authentication function used to compute RES and XRES F3 - Key generating function used to compute CK F4 - Key generating function used to compute IK F5 - Key generating function used to compute AK in normal procedures F5* - Key generating function used to compute AK in re-synchronisation procedures K-Long-term secret key shared between the USIM and the AuC F8 - Data transfer between the UE and RNC F9 - Signalling elements between the UE and RNC
3-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens

Upon the receipt of the authentication data request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE may have pre-computed the required number of authentication vectors and retrieve them from the HLR database or may compute them on demand. The HE/AuC sends an authentication response back to the VLR/SGSN that contains an ordered array of n authentication vectors AV(1..n). The diagram opposite shows the generation of an authentication vector AV by the HE/AuC.
SQN and RAND

The HE/AuC starts with generating a fresh sequence number SQN and an unpredictable challenge RAND. SQNs are unique to each user (the HE/AuC keeps a counter: SQNHe for each user) and are generated in batches, with a "time stamp" derived from a clock giving universal time. RAND is a randomly generated number.
Authentication Key Management Field

An authentication and key management eld AMF is used as a third input variable to the algorithms and is also included in the authentication token of each authentication vector. AMF may be used by the operator to "switch" functions in the USIM (e.g to indicate the algorithm and key used to generate a particular authentication vector, or set the number of entries in a Sequence list (the list size)
Algorithms f1 -f5
Subsequently the following values are computed using the various algorithms (f1 - f5): A message authentication code MAC = f1K(SQN || RAND || AMF) where f1 is a message authentication function. An expected response XRES = f2K (RAND) where f2 is a (possibly truncated) message authentication function. A cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) where f3 is a key generating function. An integrity key IK = f4K (RAND) where f4 is a key generating function. An anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND) where f5 is a key generating function.
AUTN and AV
Finally the authentication token (AUTN = SQN AK || AMF || MAC) and the authentication Vector (AV:=RAND||XRES||CK||IK||MAC) are constructed from the products of the algorithms. Here, AK is an anonymity key used to conceal the sequence number as the latter may expose the identity and location of the user. The concealment of the sequence number is to protect against passive attacks only. If no concealment is needed then f5 0 (AK = 0).
3-20
Version 1 Rev 0

Generate SQN
Generate RAND
SQN AMF K
RAND
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
MAC
XRES
CK
IK
AK
AUTN := SQN AK || AMF || MAC AV := RAND || XRES || CK || IK || AUTN
3-21
Version 1 Rev 0
USIM Authentication Function

The VLR/SGSN invokes the procedure by selecting the next unused authentication vector from the ordered array of authentication vectors in the VLR/SGSN database. The VLR/SGSN sends to the USIM the random challenge RAND and an Authentication Token AUTN for network authentication from the selected authentication vector. Upon receipt the user proceeds as shown in the diagram opposite.
Retrieval of SQN
Upon receipt of RAND and AUTN the USIM rst computes the anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND) and retrieves the sequence number SQN = (SQN AK) AK.
Computation of X-MAC
Next the USIM computes XMAC = f1K (SQN || RAND || AMF) and compares this with MAC which is included in AUTN. If they are different, the user sends user authentication reject back to the VLR/SGSN with an indication of the cause and the user abandons the procedure. In this case, VLR/SGSN shall initiate an Authentication Failure Report procedure towards the HLR. VLR/SGSN may also decide to initiate a new identication and authentication procedure towards the user.
Verication of SQN
Next the USIM veries that the received sequence number SQN is in the correct range. If the USIM considers the sequence number to be not in the correct range, it sends synchronisation failure back to the VLR/SGSN including an appropriate parameter, and abandons the procedure. If the sequence number is considered to be in the correct range however, the USIM computes RES = f2K (RAND) and includes this parameter in a user authentication response back to the VLR/SGSN.
Computation of CK and IK
Finally the USIM computes the cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) and the integrity key IK = f4K (RAND). USIM shall store original CK, IK until the next successful execution of AKA.
User Authentication Response

Upon receipt of user authentication response the VLR/SGSN compares RES with the expected response XRES from the selected authentication vector. If XRES equals RES then the authentication of the user has passed. The VLR/SGSN also selects the appropriate cipher key CK and integrity key IK from the selected authentication vector. If XRES and RES are different, VLR/SGSN shall initiate an Authentication Failure Report procedure towards the. VLR/SGSN may also decide to initiate a new identication and authentication procedure towards the user.
3-22
Version 1 Rev 0
RAN D SQN AK
AUT N AMF MAC
f5
AK SQN K (USIM)
f1
f2
f3
f4
XMA C
RES
CK
IK
Verify MAC = X MAC Verify that SQN i s in the c orrect range
3-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Access Link Data Integrity

Most control signalling information elements that are sent between the UEand the network are considered sensitive and must be integrity protected. A message authentication function shall be applied on these signalling information elements transmitted between the UE and the RNC.
Data integrity protection method

The diagram opposite illustrates the use of the integrity algorithm f9 to authenticate the data integrity of a signalling message. Based on the input parameters the user computes message authentication code for data integrity MAC-I using the integrity algorithm f9. The MAC-I is then appended to the message when sent over the radio access link. The receiver computes XMAC-I on the message received in the same way as the sender computed MAC-I on the message sent and veries the data integrity of the message by comparing it to the received MAC-I.
Input parameters to the integrity algorithm

COUNT-I The integrity sequence number COUNT-I is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-I value per logical signalling channel. COUNT-I is derived from a count of the number of RRC SDUs send/received. IK The integrity key IK is 128 bits long. There may be one IK for CS connections (IKCS) and one IK for PS connections (IKPS). IK is established during UMTS AKA as the output of the integrity key derivation function f4. FRESH The network-side generated FRESH message is 32 bits long. There is one FRESH parameter value per user. The input parameter FRESH protects the network against replay of signalling messages by the user. At connection set-up the RNC generates a random value FRESH and sends it to the user in the (RRC) security mode command. The value FRESH is subsequently used by both the network and the user throughout the duration of a single connection. This mechanism assures the network that the user is not replaying any old MAC-Is.
DIRECTION The direction identier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identier is input to avoid the use of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of the DIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE. MESSAGE The signalling message itself with the radio bearer identity. The latter is appended in front of the message. Note that the radio bearer identity is not transmitted with the message but it is needed to avoid the circumstance where for different instances of message authentication codes the same set of input parameters is used.
3-24
Version 1 Rev 0
COU NTI MESSAGE
DIRECT ION FRESH
COU NTI MES SAG E
DIREC TIO N FRE SH
IK
f9
IK
f9
MAC -I Sen der UE o r RNC
XMA C-I Rec eiver RNCor UE
3-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Ciphering of User/Signalling Data

User data and some signalling information elements are considered sensitive and must be condentiality protected. To ensure identity condentiality the temporary user identity (P-)TMSI must be transferred in a protected mode at allocation time and at other times when the signalling procedures permit it. These needs for a protected mode of transmission are fullled by a condentiality function which is applied on dedicated channels between the UE and the RNC. The diagram opposite illustrates the use of the ciphering algorithm f8 to encrypt plaintext by applying a keystream using a bit per bit binary addition of the plaintext and the ciphertext. The plaintext may be recovered by generating the same keystream using the same input parameters and applying a bit per bit binary addition with the ciphertext.
Input parameters to the cipher algorithm

COUNT-C The integrity sequence number COUNT-C is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-C value per logical signalling channel. COUNT-C is derived from a count of the number of RLC/MAC SDUs send/received. CK The Cipher key CK is 128 bits long. There may be one CK for CS connections (CKCS) and one CK for PS connections (CKPS). CK is established during UMTS AKA as the output of the integrity key derivation function f3. BEARER The radio bearer identier BEARER is 5 bits long. There is one BEARER parameter per radio bearer associated with the same user and multiplexed on a single 10ms physical layer frame. The radio bearer identier is input to avoid the condition where for different keystream an identical set of input parameter values is used. DIRECTION The direction identier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identier is input to avoid the use of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of the DIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE. LENGTH The length indicator LENGTH is 16 bits long. The length indicator determines the length of the required keystream block. LENGTH shall affect only the length of the KEYSTREAM BLOCK, not the actual bits in it.
3-26
Version 1 Rev 0
COU NT-C BEARER
DIRE CTI ON LENGTH
COU NT-C BEA RER
DIR ECTI ON LEN GTH
CK
f8
CK
f8
KEY STR EAM BLO CK PLAINTEXT BLO CK CYP HERTE XT BLO CK
KEY STR EAM BLO CK
Sen der UE or RNC
Rec eiver RNCor UE
3-27
Version 1 Rev 0
3-28
Pub-Date
W-CDMA Theory
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 4
W-CDMA Theory
4-1
Version 1 Rev 0
W-CDMA Theory
4-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe various options for multiple access schemes. State the Characteristics of UMTS W-CDMA. State why W-CDMA has been chosen for the UMTS multiple access scheme. Describe W-CDMA spreading and despreading procedures. Describe the use of orthagonal codes and the channelisation code tree. Describe the scrambling and summation process. Describe the effects of multi-path radio channels and the purpose of the RAKE receiver.
4-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Multiple Access Schemes

There are 3 forms of multiple access schemes, frequency, time and code. The major issue with the rst two is the requirement to have guard bands.
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)

FDMA divides radio channels into a range of radio frequencies and is used in the traditional analogue system. With FDMA, only one subscriber is assigned to a channel at one time. Other subscribers cannot access this channel until the original call is terminated or handed off to a different channel.
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)

TDMA is a common multiple access technique employed in digital cellular systems. It divides radio channels into time slots to obtain higher capacity. As with FDMA, no other conversations can access an occupied channel until that channel is vacated.
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

CDMA assigns each subscriber a unique code to put multiple users on the same channel at the same time. CDMA users can share the same frequency channel because their conversations are distinguished only by digital code.
4-4
Version 1 Rev 0
Power FDMA Power
Time
Time
Frequency
TDMA Frequency Time
Codes
CDMA Frequency
4-5
Version 1 Rev 0
W-CDMA Characteristics
The vital statistics for our W-CDMA UMTS system is shown opposite. Dont be confused by the slots and frames, this is not a TDMA system, every user does share the same band. The frames and slots are used for interleaving, power control. The major points are: FDD requires paired frequencies for up and down channels. The chip rate of 3.84 Mcps provides a bandwidth of 5 MHz. A chip is the original signal split or chipped by the spreading code. The carrier spacing of 200 kHz is used to allow re-farming of GSM frequencies which have been set at 200 kHz spacing. The frame length is set at 10 ms. Each frame is split into 15 timeslots, each timeslot contains user data, power control and signalling data. The UMTS system does not require synchronisation due to the framing structure and use of matched lters for the framing alignment. The spreading factor is the ratio between the user data and the chip rate. As the user data increases this factor will vary between 4 and 512. The spreading factor is a rough indication of the number of users in the system. The user data rates available in the FDD system is up to 384 Kbps.
4-6
Version 1 Rev 0
Multiple Access Scheme Duplexing Method Chip Rate Bandwidth Carrier Spacing Frame Length Slots per Frame Inter-cell Synchronization Spreading Factor User Data Rate
CDMA FDD 3.84 Mcps 5 MHz 200 kHz Raster 10 ms 15 None Variable (4-512) 3-384 Kbps
4-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Frequency
Re-Use of Frequency
Mobile telephones and cell broadcast networks use cellular radio, a technique developed in recent years to enable the use of mobile telephones. It would be impossible to provide each phone with an individual radio frequency, so the idea of cellular radio evolved. A region is divided into geographical areas called cells, varying in size depending on the number of users in the area. In cities cells are small whereas in rural areas cells are much larger. In GSM cells use a set of frequencies that are different from any neighbouring cell, but can be the same as another cell as long as it is far enough away. For UMTS, a frequency re-use of one, may be employed. This means that all cells within a given geographical area, or even an entire network may use the same carrier frequency. An alternate method of discriminating between neighbouring cells must therefore be found.
4-8
Re-Use of Frequency
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Frequency
2 4 1 5 7 4 1 3 5 7 4 1 3 6 1 2 7 4 6 1 3 5 2 7 4 6 3 5 2 6 1 7
5 2 4 6 3 5 7 4 1 3 3 2 6 2
4-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Codes
Re-Use of Codes
Codes are used to uniquely identify a cell in the network. Frequency planning is more or less a thing of the past but code planning will have to be implemented. Code planning will be much easier then frequency planning since we have 512 Codes to play with, the code re-use pattern will thus be extremely large. Codes can be reused when the separation between cells containing the same channel set is far enough apart so that co-channel interference can be kept below acceptable levels. The number of cells in a cluster is 512, which provides greater separation between co-channel cells than GSM.
4-10
Re-Use of Codes
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Codes
31 1
30 29 26 32 36
7 28 27 25 34 35
5 6 7 14 2 37
1 4 15 4 13 33 41
2 17 16 6 5 40
10 4 12 22 23 24
11 19 18 21 38 20 39
4-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Spectral Efciency (GSM and UMTS)

The Slide opposite shows how spectrally efcient UMTS and GSM is in comparison to each other when employed in a multi-cellular structure. The capacity, which Shannon derived in 1947, provided a Law, which we now call Shannons Law. This details the digital capacity of the link given the transmit power and the bandwidth. If we are using, FDMA, TDMA or CDMA, the capacity is still controlled by this law. However, some gains are made by technology and coding methods.
4-12
Version 1 Rev 0

GSM 8 Calls = 200 kHz Carrier 1 Call = 25 kHz UMTS 256 Calls = 5 MHz Carrier 1 Call = 19.4 kHz
7 x 200 kHz = 1.4 MHz 1 Call = 25 kHz
7 Cells, 5 MHz 1 Call = 2.8 kHz
4-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

Transmitter
The digital modulator will take digital speech/data and multiply it with the spreading code. The radio modulator moves the baseline signal from the digital modulator onto a 2GHz carrier to produce the W-CDMA output.
Receiver
The modulated carrier is moved by the radio demodulator to the digital demodulator which can be very complicated due to the large number of users. Here the input is multiplied by the de-spreading codes to produce digital speech.
4-14
Version 1 Rev 0
Single User Channel
Multiple User Channel
Multiple User Channel
Output
5 MHz
5 MHz
5 MHz
Digital Signal
Digital Modulator
Radio Modulator
W-CDMA Modulated Carrier C o m b i n e r S p l i t t e r
Radio Demodulator
Digital Demodulator
Digital Signal
Tx
Spreading Code Generator Digital Modulator
Radio Carrier
Radio Carrier
Spreading Code Generator Digital Demodulator
Rx
Digital Signal
Radio Modulator
Radio Demodulator
Digital Signal
Input
External Interference
t0
4-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading
Spreading
The spreading operation is the multiplication of each user data bit with a "Spreading Code" , which is a pre-dened bit pattern. To discriminate between User data "bits" and spreading code "bits", the symbols in the spreading code are referred to as "Chips". The chip rate for UMTS is xed at 3.84 Mcps. After the spreading operation each "Bit" of the data signal is represented by a number of "chips". The number of chips representing each bit is referred to as the Spreading Factor (SF) and is given by dividing the chip rate by the source signal bit rate; in this example: 3.84 Mcs / 480 kbps = (SF=8) The spreading operation has resulted in an increase of the "signalling rate of the user data, in this case by a factor of 8, and corresponds to a widening of the "spectrum" occupied by the user data signal. Due to this, CDMA systems are more generically referred to as "Spread Spectrum" systems. The SF is also referred to as the Processing Gain (PG), which is expressed as a Decibel ratio and describes the gain or amplitude increase that will be applied to the signal at the receiving station as a result of the de-spreading operation. This concept is described in more detail later in this chapter
4-16
Spreading
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading
Data 480 kB/s
1 1
Spreading Code 3.84 Mcs
1 1
Spread Data
1 1
4-17
Version 1 Rev 0
De-spreading
De-spreading
De-spreading is performed at the receiving station (UE or Node B) by multiplying the chip rate, spread user data signal by a chip rate spreading code. By using the same spreading code as used at the transmitting station for the spreading operation, the multiplication of the two chip rate signals will reproduce the original bit rate user data signal. To aid accurate recovery of the user data, a Correlation Receiver is employed in most CDMA systems. The correlation receiver integrates the product of the de-spreading process on a chip-by-chip basis. In the upper diagram opposite, the example shown illustrated that for a perfectly received de-spread signal, the correlation receiver output has effectively "Lifted" the amplitude of the received signal by a factor of 8, a function of the processing gain.
4-18
De-spreading
Version 1 Rev 0
De-spreading
Spread Data
1 1
Spreading Code
1 1
Correlation RX Integrator O/P
Recovered Data
1 1
4-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Orthogonal Codes
Orthogonal Codes
Transmissions from a single source are separated by channelisation codes. The channelisation codes of UTRA are based upon the Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) technique. There are a nite number of OVSF codes available, and some restrictions in their use. OVSF codes are, as their name implies, orthogonal codes. Orthogonal codes possess good cross correlation properties allowing easy discrimination between signals produced using correctly selected codes. For OVSF the cross correlation between codes is zero, meaning interferer signals between different codes is effectively "zero" after correlation.
Channelisation Code Tree

For separating channels from the same source, channelisation codes called Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors are used. The lines in the diagram represent codes, these are Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) codes, allowing to mix in the same timeslot channels with different spreading factors while preserving the orthogonality. The OVSF codes can be dened using the code tree shown opposite. Each level in the code tree denes a Spreading Factor (SF) indicated in the gure. All codes within the code tree cannot be used simultaneously in a given timeslot. A code can be used in a timeslot if and only no other code on the path from the specic code to the root of the tree or in the sub-tree opposite the specic code is used in this timeslot. This means that the number of available codes in a slot is not xed but depends on the rate and spreading factor of each physical channel. The spreading codes can be used to identify individual channels, but a mobile usually has to identify the base station that it is currently parented on. A long code is usually used for that.
4-20
Orthogonal Codes
Version 1 Rev 0
Orthogonal Codes Channelisation Code Tree
Cch, 8, 0
Cch, 4, 0 Cch, 2, 0 (1, 1) Cch, 4, 1 Cch, 1, 0 (1, 1, -1 , -1) (1, 1, 1,1)
(1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1)
Cch, 8,1
(1, 1, 1, 1, -1, -1, -1, -1)
Cch, 8,2
(1, 1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1)
Cch, 8,3
(1, 1, -1, -1, - 1, -1, 1, 1)
(1)
Cch, 4, 2 (1, -1, 1 , -1) Cch, 2, 1 (1, -1) Cch, 4, 3 (1, -1, 1, 1)
Cch, 8,4
(1, -1 , 1,- 1 , 1,-1, 1, -1)
Cch, 8,5
(1, -1, 1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1)
Cch, 8,6
(1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1 , -1 , 1)
Cch, 8,7
(1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1, 1, -1)
SF = 1
SF = 2
SF = 4
SF= 8
4-21
Version 1 Rev 0
De-spreading Other Users Signals

It must be remembered that in a CDMA system, all users are potentially transmitting on the same frequency. This means that at any given receiver station, in addition to the desired signal, multiple interferer signals will also be received. It is the task of the correlation receiver to reject these interferer signals. The diagram opposite shows the effect of de-spreading and correlation at a given receiving station (e.g UE "A"), on an interferer signal, (e.g a signal transmitted on the same carrier for reception by UE "B"). The de-spreading/correlation of the interferer signal will result in a cross correlation of zero (i.e. the output of the integration process will be zero). This process is only true when correctly selected orthogonal spreading codes are employed.
4-22
Version 1 Rev 0

Data for UE B 1 -1
Spreading Code for UE B
1 -1
Spread Data for UE B
1 -1
Spread Code for UE A
1 -1
Correlation RX Integrator O/P at UE A
Recovered Data at UE A
1 -1
4-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Processing Gain
Processing Gain
Processing Gain can be dened as the Chip Rate divided by the bit rate. This gives a ratio that can be converted to decibels by using the following formula. PG = 10 x log SF The gain that we get from the Processing Gain is an extremely important part of CDMA. It is in fact because of this relationship that CDMA is so effective and is used even in space transmissions. Processing gain will determine how much the received signal can be lifted out of the noise oor. There is one simple rule to follow, the higher the SF the higher the processing gain will be, the lower the SF the lower the processing gain. As we know, the SF is also inversely proportional to the speed of the transmission. This means that the higher the speed of transmission the lower the processing gain will be. Due to this relationship the power output must be increased for any transmitter if the transmission rate is increased due to the loss in Processing Gain. This will also mean that if the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) is increased on the receiver side the power must be increased or the transmission rate must drop on the transmitter side to meet the FER requirement.
4-24
Processing Gain
Version 1 Rev 0
Processing Gain
PG = 10 x log (Chip Rate/Bit Rate) or PG = 10 x log (SF)
4-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Exercise 1 - Spreading
This Exercise demonstrates the Modulo-2 Addition, Spreading Factor usage, Code Lengths and in general will give the student a feel for the Spreading Principle.
NOTES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
4-26
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading Data 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1
Spread Data
1 -1 De-spreading
Spreading Code 1 -1
De-spread Data
1 -1
Calculation Box SF = 4 PG = 4 (ratio) PG = 6 dB
S/N = 5dB
C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB = -1 dB
4-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading
To gain some experience in Spreading the student can complete the following exercise. The student can complete the despreading part of the exercise and then calculate the SF and PG. See if it matches with the answers provided. Note the irregular structure in the answer. NOTES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
4-28
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading Data 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1 Spread Data 1 -1 De-spreading Spreading Code 1 -1 De-spread Data 1 -1
1 Wrong Spreading Code -1 De-spread Data 1 Wrong Code -1

Calculation Box SF = 4 PG = 4 (ratio) PG = 6 dB
S/N = 5dB
C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB = -1 dB
4-29
Version 1 Rev 0
In this exercise the student must complete the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Determine the SF used? Do the spreading part of the exercise? Do the despreading part of the exercise using the right code? Do the despreading part of the exercise using the wrong code? Complete the calculation?
NOTES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
4-30
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading Data 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1 Spread Data 1 -1 De-spreading Spreading Code 1 -1 De-spread Data 1 -1
Wrong 1 Spreading Code -1 De-spread Data 1 Wrong Code -1

Calculation Box SF = PG = PG = C/I = = -1 dB
S/N = 5dB
4-31
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling
Scrambling
As previously described, OVSF spreading codes can be used to separate individual users on a common RF carrier freq. However, because of the need to maintain orthogonality of codes, the number of codes available is very limited (512 Downlink, 256 Uplink). These 512 code must be reused in every cell, as such they do not become unique to a cell and users located at the boundaries of cells, would receive transmissions using the same OVSF code, from more than one cell. For UMTS therefore, OVSF codes are used only as channelisation codes, used identify individual physical channels. A further coding, process, known as a "Scrambling" is performed, in order to discriminate between the transmissions between different cells on the downlink and different UEs on the uplink. Each physical channel is rst individually spread to chip rate using a channelisation code (Cch sf,k) taken from the OVSF code tree, resulting in an increase in bandwidth of the signal form "Bit Rate" to "Chip Rate" The Sequence of chips produced by the channelisation process is then "Scrambled", using a chip-to-chip multiplication with a complex-valued scrambling code (Csc). The code chosen is used to identify the source of the signal. As scrambling is performed on top of spreading, it has no further effect on the bandwidth of the signal. Although the primary purpose of using a scrambling code is to identify all channels from a single source, that single source may use more than scrambling code. For example, in the downlink, a cell may transmit using one of 16 possible scrambling codes. After scrambling, all physical channels are then combined, using complex addition, before being forwarded to the RF Modulator for transmission.
4-32
Scrambling
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling
Channel x Data
Cch SF,x Csc,x
Channel y Data
Cch SF,x Csc, x
Channel z Data
Cch SF,x Csc,x
4-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes

The Slide shows the major differences between Scrambling Codes (SC) and Channelisation Codes (CC).
4-34
Version 1 Rev 0
CC Usage Uplink Usage Downlink Length Uplink Length Downlink Number of Codes available Separation of Data & Control Channels (from the same UE) Separation of channels to different UEs 4 - 256 Chips 4 - 512 Chips 512 Uplink and Downlink
SC Separation of UEs Separation of Cells LC - 10ms=38400 Chips or SC = 66.7us = 256 Chips LC =38400 Chips Uplink = 2 1 = 16,777,215 18 Downlink = 2 1 = 262,143 (truncated to 8,192) LC=10ms = Gold Code SC = Extended S2 Family No effect on Bandwidth
24
Code Family Spreading
OVSF Increases Tx Bandwidth
4-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling and Summation

The diagram opposite illustrates the process of scrambling and summation of multiple channels, prior to modulation onto the RF carrier and transmission over the UMTS air interface (Uu). For the purposes of this example, three separate data streams (Channels X, Y and Z), each carrying a user bit sequence of "1,0,0,1", have been spread using channelisation codes of Cch 8,1 , Cch 8,2 and Cch 8,3 respectively. The spread signals are then independently scrambled using a single scrambling code. The resultant chip sequences are then combined using complex addition, to produce the multi level digital baseband signal, that will be used to modulate the RF carrier.
4-36
Version 1 Rev 0
Spread Data Channel X Cch 8,1 Spread Data Channel Y Cch 8,2 Spread Data Channel Z Cch 8,3 Scrambling code Channel X after scrambling Channel Y after scrambling Channel Z after scrambling Complex added scrambled codes
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 +3 +2 +1 -1 -2 -3
4-37
Version 1 Rev 0
De-Scrambling and Data Recovery

The diagram opposite illustrates the processes of de-scrambling of a complex scrambled signal and the recovery of user data from one channel. The input signal, (derived from the example on the preceding page) is rst de-scrambled by multiplication with the specied scrambling code. The result is a combined version of all received channels, represented by a complex chip sequence. The dispreading process must now be performed to recover the user data. The example illustrates the recovery of the data for Channel "X" from the preceding page. By performing a direct multiplication of the complex signal with the appropriate channelisation code, the illustrated correlation receiver output will be obtained. As can be seen, the integrated output indicates bit values of 1,0,0,1", the expected result for this example.
4-38
Version 1 Rev 0

Received Scrambled +3 +2
+1
-1 -2 -3 1 -1 +3 +2 +1 -1 -2 -3
Scrambling Code
De-scrambled Signal
Chan Code for Chan Y (Cch8,2)
Correlation Output
4-39
Version 1 Rev 0
Multi-path Radio Channels

Radio propagation for mobile communications suffers greatly from the effects of mulipath reections, diffractions and attenuation of the signal energy. These effects are causes by objects such as buildings, hills, etc, resulting in "Multipath Propagation", which has two main effects upon the signal.
Inter-symbol Interference
Inter-symbol interference occurs when the signal energy from more than one radio path, pertaining to a single symbol (or chip in the case of W-CDMA), such that the energy from the various paths overlaps. This results in the smearing of the signal, such that is hard to dene where one chip starts and one chip ends and the true value of the chips may be distorted. This problem can be resolved, providing the delay between the two paths is greater than one chip period (0.26s at 3.84 Mcs). This equates to a path length difference of 78 m). Delays of 1 or 2 s are typical in urban areas, with 20s possible in hilly areas.
Signal Fade
In multi-path situations where path lengths are multiples of half a wavelength of the received frequency (7cm at 2GHz), the signals on two (or more) paths will arrive in anti-phase to each other. This results in cancellation of the signals, causing fast or Rayleigh fading. Such fading can result in signal level drops in the order of 20 to 30dB, making the reception of error free data bits very difcult.
4-40
Version 1 Rev 0
4-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Matched Filter Operation

The main task of the matched lter is to determine the timing reference of the information as it arrives at the receiver. The lter will perform a chip-by-chip comparison of the received signal against a known "Pilot" reference, to identify multiple copies of the same chip pattern. After several iterations of the multiple paths have been accumulated, the time dispersion between the two paths can be calculated and tracked, allowing the paths to be separated.
4-42
Version 1 Rev 0
RF Front End Circuitry
Matched Filter
Slot Wise Accumulation
4-43
Version 1 Rev 0
The Rake Receiver
The Rake Receiver

The Rake receiver performs a similar (but not identical) function to the equaliser in GSM. Instead of training bits, the pilot signals (all zeros) are used as a basis for the search for the best path. The rake receiver then constructs its ngers to track the other multi-path rays by stepping through delays one chip at a time until it nds another, lower level pilot. It can then use the weightings to bring the rays into phase and constructive addition. Note that the different rays are uncorrelated if the delay difference is greater than one chip. The effect of the propagation environment on spread spectrum modulated signals is to produce a series of signal components that have traversed differing paths. This is known as multipath interference and, depending on whether or not there is a signicant specula multipath component, the envelope of the multipath signal may be Rician or Rayleigh distributed. Multipath results in two signal perturbations, known as Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) and fading. Both introduce severe degradation in the system performance. ISI creates signal components that are delayed into the next signal period, making these signals overlap and therefore interfere with one another. Fading is caused by signals of opposite phase cancelling in the receiver. To combat this, a RAKE receiver may be used. This is the type of receiver shown in the gure and contains many signal paths, each with an individual delay. These delays are changed so that the total delay from the transmitter for all paths is the same and thus when combined they are in-phase.
4-44
The Rake Receiver
Version 1 Rev 0
The Rake Receiver
D0
t1 Cch sf,k
D1
t2 Cch sf,k
D2
t3 Cch sf,k
D3
Cch sf,k
4-45
Version 1 Rev 0
The Rake Receiver
4-46
Pub-Date
The Physical Layer
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 5
The Physical Layer
5-1
Version 1 Rev 0
The Physical Layer
5-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the procedures performed by the Air Interface Physical Layer Describe the UMTS Channel Structure. Logical Channels Transport Channels Physical Channels
Describe the Downlink and Uplink Flow Processes.
5-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Layer Services

The Physical Layer (L1) will be the main discussion in this section since this is where most of the air interface tasks are performed. The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these services is through the use of transport channels via the MAC sub-layer. The physical layer is expected to perform the following functions in order to provide the data transport service. Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution. Error detection on transport channels and indication to higher layers. FEC encoding/decoding of transport channels. Multiplexing of transport channels and demultiplexing of coded composite transport channels (CCTrCHs). Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels. Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels. Power weighting and combining of physical channels. Modulation and spreading/demodulation and despreading of physical channels. Frequency and time (chip, bit, slot, frame) synchronisation. Radio characteristics measurements including FER, SIR, Interference Power, etc., and indication to higher layers. Inner - loop power control. RF processing.
When network elements (UEs and network) provide compatible service bearers (for example support a speech bearer) they should be assured of successful interworking. Moreover, different implementation options of the same (optional) feature would lead to incompatibility between UE and network. Therefore, this shall be avoided.
5-4
Version 1 Rev 0

Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution. Error detection on transport channels. FEC encoding & decoding of transport channels. Mux & Demux of transport channels and CCTrCHs. Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels. Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels. Power weighting and combining of physical channels. Modulation demodulation and spreading of physical channels. Frequency and time synchronisation. Radio characteristics measurements. Inner - loop power control. RF processing.
5-5
Version 1 Rev 0
QPSK
QPSK
The modulation scheme used in W-CDMA is quadrature phase shift keying (PSK) which allows 2 bits to be sent per symbol (I and Q). The reason for using QPSK is that it is fairly resilient to amplitude variations. The major problem with CDMA is that all users are on the same frequency and thus interfering with each other.
5-6
QPSK
Version 1 Rev 0
QPSK
QPSK
Q
(0,1) (0,0)
I
(1,1) (1,0)
2 bits per symbol
5-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Structure of Transmission
The physical layer receives information, on a transport channel, as Transport Blocks (or Transport Block sets) from Layer 2. This information will consist of User Plane or Control Plane streams. In addition the physical layer will generate Layer 1 control information, used to maintain the radio bearer between the UE and the UTRAN. This layer 1 control information must be transmitted on the physical channel along with the transport channel information. As previously discussed, even when FDD mode is in use, a radio frame/timeslot structure is observed. (A 10 ms radio frame is divided into 15 timeslots). Though it is important to note that any given radio bearer is able to use all timeslots in every radio frame.
Downlink Transmission
On the downlink each timeslot will contain transport channel information and Layer 1 control information in time-multiplex. Each timeslot will contain elds supporting transport block information, interspersed with Layer 1 control elds. The exact structure of the elds is dependent upon the type of physical channel in use, and is described in detail later in this chapter.
Uplink Transmission
On the Uplink a time-multiplex structure is not practical as Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) is frequently employed. The combination of DTX and Time-multiplex would result in a "Bursty" transmission, which would generate audio band noise perceptible to the other party in a voice call. To overcome this problem, the transport channel information and Layer 1 control information are I/Q code multiplexed within each timeslot, allowing them to be transmitted in parallel. This make the transmission of Layer 1 control information continuous and hence prevents bursty transmission, even when DTX is applied.
5-8
Version 1 Rev 0
I Q
5-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Locations
Channel Locations
The radio interface is the section of the network between the UE and the Network. This section of the network is where the biggest limitation lies at the moment, it is the most vulnerable section and therefore very complex methods have to be invented in order to transmit the required data at the high speeds that is demanded of todays networks. The radio interface is composed of Layers 1, 2 and 3. The slide opposite shows the UTRA radio interface protocol architecture around the physical layer (Layer 1). The physical layer interfaces with the Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of Layer 2 and the Radio Resource Control (RRC) Layer of Layer 3. The physical layer offers different Transport channels to MAC. A transport channel is characterized by how the information is transferred over the radio interface. MAC offers different Logical channels to the Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer of Layer 2. The type of information transferred characterizes a logical channel. Physical channels are dened in the physical layer. In FDD mode, physical channels are dened by a specic carrier frequency, scrambling code, channelization code (optional), time start and stop (giving duration) and, on the uplink, relative phase (0 or /[Symbol_ps2]). In the TDD mode the physical channels is also characterized by the timeslot. The physical layer is controlled by RRC.
5-10
Channel Locations
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Locations
Layer 2
RLC
Logical Channels
Layer 2
MAC
Transport Channels
Layer 1
Physical Layer
Physical Channels
UE
5-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Channels on the Air Interface

The diagram opposite shows the most common channels used on the air interface. The channels are divided horizontally into the Physical Channels (PCHs), the Transport Channels (TCHs) and the Logical Channels (LCHs). Vertically they are divided into 2 channel types, the Dedicated Channels and the Common Channels. Dedicated Channels are dedicated to one UE only and Common Channels can be shared by multiple UEs.
5-12
Version 1 Rev 0

DCCH DTCH BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH
Logical Channels
PTM CCH DCH BCH PCH FACH RACH

Transport Channels
PDCH
PCCH
P-CCPCH DPDCH DPCCH
S-CCPCH
PICH
PRACH
SCH
CPICH
AICH Physical Channels
P-SCH
S-SCH
Primary
Secondary
5-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Logical Channels
Logical Channels
The MAC layer provides data transfer services on logical channels. A set of logical channel types is dened for different kinds of data transfer services as offered by MAC. Each logical channel type is dened by what type of information is transferred. A general classication of logical channels is into two groups: Control Channels (for the transfer of control plane information). Trafc Channels (for the transfer of user plane information).
Control Channels
Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) A downlink channel for broadcasting system control information. Paging Control Channel (PCCH) A downlink channel that transfers paging information. This channel is used when the network does not know the location cell of the UE, or, the UE is in the cell connected state (utilising UE sleep mode procedures). Common Control Channel (CCCH) Bi-directional channel for transmitting control information between network and UEs. This channel is commonly used by the UEs having no RRC connection with the network and by the UEs using common transport channels when accessing a new cell after cell reselection. Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) A point-to-point bi-directional channel that transmits dedicated control information between a UE and the network. This channel is established through RRC connection set-up procedure.
Trafc Channels
Dedicated Trafc Channel (DTCH) A Dedicated Trafc Channel (DTCH) is a point-to-point channel, dedicated to one UE, for the transfer of user information. A DTCH can exist in both uplink and downlink. Common Trafc Channel (CTCH) A point-to-multipoint unidirectional channel for transfer of dedicated user information for all or a group of specied UEs.
5-14
Logical Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
Logical Channels
Between MAC and RLC
DCCH
DTCH
BCCH
PCCH
CCCH
CTCH
U-RNTI
PTM
5-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Channels
Transport Channels
The physical layer offers information transfer services to MAC and higher layers. The physical layer transport services are described by how and with what characteristics data is transferred over the radio interface. An adequate term for this is Transport Channel. A general classication of transport channels is into two groups: Common transport channels (where there is a need for inband identication of the UEs when particular UEs are addressed. Dedicated transport channels (where the UEs are identied by the physical channel, i.e. code and frequency for FDD and code, time slot and frequency for TDD).
Random Access Channel (RACH)

A contention based uplink channel used for transmission of relatively small amounts of data, e.g. for initial access or non-real-time dedicated control or trafc data.
Forward Access Channel (FACH)

Common downlink channel without closed-loop power control used for transmission of relatively small amount of data.
Broadcast Channel (BCH)

A downlink channel used for broadcast of system information into an entire cell.
Paging Channel (PCH)

A downlink channel used for broadcast of control information into an entire cell allowing efcient UE sleep mode procedures. Currently identied information types are paging and notication. Another use could be UTRAN notication of change of BCCH information.
Dedicated Channel (DCH)

A channel dedicated to one UE used in uplink or downlink.
5-16
Transport Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Channels
Between the Physical Layer and MAC
CCH
DCH
BCH
PCH
FACH
RACH
5-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Channels
Physical Channels
Common Physical Channels (CPCHs)
P-SCH ; S-SCH P-CCPCH S-CCPCH Primary Synchronisation Channel; Secondary Synchronisation Channel Synchronisation to the network Primary Common Control Physical Channel Cell Information and Frequency info Secondary Common Control Physical Channel Paging Information and Transfer of small amounts of user data. Downlink only. PRACH Physical Random Access Channel Initial message when UE wants to gain access to the network; Transfer of small amounts of data; Uplink only PICH AICH Paging Indicator Channel Provides UEs with efcient sleep mode operation Acquisition Indicator Channel Acknowledges an effective request for access after preamble has been send up P-CPICH; S-CPICH DPDCH/DPCCH Primary Common Pilot Indicator Channel; Secondary Pilot Indicator Channel Helps with channel estimation and shows the attractiveness of the cell Dedicated Physical Channels Uplink and downlink control and data information; Dedicated to a single user
5-18
Physical Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Channels
PDCH
PCC H
P-C CPCH DPDCH DPC CH
S-C CPCH
PICH
PRA CH
SCH
CPI CH
AIC H
P-S CH
S-S CH
Primary
Sec ondary
5-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Mapping
Channel Mapping
The diagram opposite summarises the mapping of logical channels onto transport channels, and transport channels onto physical channels. The DCHs are coded and multiplexed, as described later in this chapter, and the resulting data stream is mapped sequentially (rst-in-rst-mapped) directly to the physical channel(s). The mapping of BCH and FACH/PCH is equally straightforward, where the data stream after coding and interleaving is mapped sequentially to the Primary and Secondary CCPCH respectively. Note that the BCCH logical channel can be mapped to both BCH and FACH, so as to be available to idle mode and connected mode UEs respectively. Also for the RACH, the coded and interleaved bits are sequentially mapped to the physical channel, in this case the message part of the PRACH.
Physical signals
Physical signals are entities with the same basic on-air attributes as physical channels but do not have transport channels or indicators mapped to them. Physical signals may be associated with physical channels in order to support the function of physical channels. SCH, CPICH, and AICH are classied as physical signals and hence are not shown on the diagram opposite.
5-20
Channel Mapping
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Mapping
Uplink
CCCH DCCH DTCH PCCH
Paging Control Channel
Downlink
BCCH CCCH CTCH
Common Traffic Channel
DCCH DTCH
Dedicated Control Channel Dedicated Traffic Channel
Common Broadcast Control Channel Contro Channel
RACH
DCH
PCH
BCH
FACH
DCH
Primary CCPCH DPDCH DPCCH Sec CCPCH
PRACH
DPDCH DPCCH
5-21
Version 1 Rev 0
Generic Frame Structure

The diagram opposite illustrates the generic frame structure, use to delimit the transfer of units of information on the UMTS air interface.
Radio Frame
As previously outlined the basic unit of the air interface is the radio frame. A radio frame is dened as a processing duration which consists of 15 timeslots. The length of a radio frame corresponds to 38,400 chips." With a system chip rate of 3.84 Mcps being employed, a radio frame thus has a duration of 10 ms.
System Frame
Several physical layer procedures (e.g. Paging and Random Access) span more than a single frame. To accommodate these procedures, a system frame is dened. The frame within the system frame structure is identied by a System Frame Number (SFN), which is a 12 bit binary number, thus a System Frame can consist of 4096 frames.
Timeslot
Each radio frame consists of 15 timeslots. A slot duration consists of elds containing bits. The length of the slot always corresponds to 2560 chips. The time duration of a timeslot is approximately 666 s. The number of elds within each timeslot is dependent upon the physical channel in use. Similarly the number of bits which can be accommodate by a timeslot is dependent upon the spreading factor in use for that physical channel.
5-22
Version 1 Rev 0

666s
SLOT
Time Slot = 2560 chips
FRAME
TS0 TS1 TSn TS13 TS14
SYSTEM FRAME
Frame 1 Frame n 10ms 40.96 secs Frame 4094 Frame 4095
5-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Synchronisation Channel (SCH)

The Synchronisation Channel (SCH) is a downlink signal used for cell search. The SCH consists of two sub channels, the Primary and Secondary SCH. The 10 ms radio frames of the Primary and Secondary SCH are divided into 15 slots, each of length 2560 chips. The diagram opposite illustrates the structure of the SCH radio frame.
The Primary SCH

The Primary SCH consists of a modulated code of length 256 chips, the Primary Synchronisation Code (PSC) denoted cp in the diagram, transmitted once every slot. The PSC is the same for every cell in the system.
The Secondary SCH

The Secondary SCH consists of repeatedly transmitting a length 15 sequence of modulated codes of length 256 chips, the Secondary Synchronisation Codes (SSC), transmitted in parallel with the Primary SCH. The SSC is denoted csi,k in the diagram, where i = 0, 1, , 63 is the number of the scrambling code group, and k = 0, 1, , 14 is the slot number. Each SSC is chosen from a set of 16 different codes of length 256. This sequence on the Secondary SCH indicates which of the code groups the cells downlink scrambling code belongs to.
Modulation Symbol "a"

The primary and secondary synchronization codes are modulated by the symbol a shown in the diagram, which indicates the presence/ absence of Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) encoding on the P-CCPCH and is given by the following table: P-CCPCH STTD encoded P-CCPCH not STTD encoded a = +1 a = -1
5-24
Version 1 Rev 0

Tslot = 2560 chips 256 chips Primary SCH
acp
acp
acp
acp
acp
Secondary SCH
acsi,0
acsi,1
acsi,2
acsi,3
acsi,14
One 10ms SCH radio frame
5-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure

During the cell search, the UE searches for a cell and determines the downlink scrambling code and frame synchronisation of that cell. The cell search is typically carried out in three steps:
Step 1: Slot synchronisation

During the rst step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the SCHs primary synchronisation code to acquire slot synchronisation to a cell. This is typically done with a single matched lter (or any similar device) matched to the primary synchronisation code which is common to all cells. The slot timing of the cell can be obtained by detecting peaks in the matched lter output.
Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identication

During the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the SCHs secondary synchronisation code to nd frame synchronisation and identify the code group of the cell found in the rst step. This is done by correlating the received signal with all possible secondary synchronisation code sequences, and identifying the maximum correlation value. Since the cyclic shifts of the sequences are unique the code group as well as the frame synchronisation is determined.
Step 3: Scrambling-code identication

During the third and last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primary scrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identied through symbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group identied in the second step. After the primary scrambling code has been identied, the Primary CCPCH can be detected, and the system and cell specic BCH information can be read. If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for, steps 2 and 3 above can be simplied.
5-26
Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronisation
ScramblingCode Group #0 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16 Group 17 Group 18 Group 19 Group 20 Group 21 Group 22 Group 23 Group 24 Group 25 Group 26 Group 27 Group 28 Group 29 Group 30 Group 31 Group 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 #1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 11 12 12 15 16 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 #2 2 5 1 3 16 4 11 6 10 13 8 10 12 14 2 15 9 14 12 15 4 3 5 12 6 8 7 13 9 11 2 9 12 #3 8 16 15 1 6 7 3 6 10 2 5 9 9 10 15 6 11 4 13 5 3 12 10 3 16 2 9 12 9 7 13 7 15 #4 9 7 5 8 6 4 4 14 4 14 7 16 9 14 15 16 15 13 14 4 7 11 16 15 12 9 5 12 3 2 3 7 2 #5 10 3 5 6 11 1 10 9 11 2 2 7 4 1 16 2 7 2 7 14 6 9 11 5 16 15 4 7 12 11 3 16 12 slot number #6 15 14 12 5 15 5 9 10 7 6 4 9 13 15 10 13 6 9 2 3 10 13 3 8 3 14 9 15 8 9 12 13 4 #7 8 16 16 2 5 5 2 2 13 5 3 15 16 15 7 14 4 10 8 16 13 5 10 3 13 3 11 10 14 4 9 3 10 #8 10 3 6 5 12 3 11 13 16 5 8 1 5 8 8 10 16 12 14 7 12 8 11 5 13 14 2 5 15 16 7 12 13 #9 16 10 11 8 1 6 2 9 11 13 3 8 1 5 1 11 5 16 2 8 5 2 8 14 6 9 14 2 12 7 16 2 15 #10 2 5 2 4 15 2 10 2 13 10 2 16 13 11 10 7 2 8 1 6 14 14 5 12 7 5 5 15 14 16 6 13 13 #11 #12 7 12 16 4 12 8 12 5 6 9 6 8 5 4 8 4 12 5 13 2 16 7 13 9 9 5 14 5 5 9 9 12 4 15 14 11 6 16 7 12 14 4 1 6 15 12 10 2 5 13 3 11 10 8 4 3 8 2 15 11 13 3 14 16 9 5 #13 7 12 15 3 11 6 9 1 1 14 4 2 4 5 16 12 3 15 8 11 2 10 13 9 12 8 16 7 2 14 13 16 5 #14 16 10 12 7 2 8 3 13 16 10 5 2 8 4 9 3 14 6 11 13 11 15 8 14 7 12 16 4 15 4 12 6 10
5-27
Version 1 Rev 0

ScramblingCode Group #0 Group 33 Group 34 Group 35 Group 36 Group 37 Group 38 Group 39 Group 40 Group 41 Group 42 Group 43 Group 44 Group 45 Group 46 Group 47 Group 48 Group 49 Group 50 Group 51 Group 52 Group 53 Group 54 Group 55 Group 56 Group 57 Group 58 Group 59 Group 60 Group 61 Group 62 Group 63 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 9 9 9 #1 7 8 9 10 11 16 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 8 10 13 14 5 6 6 7 9 10 10 13 10 11 12 #2 14 5 13 3 15 4 4 6 5 9 16 12 4 8 16 7 15 10 11 7 8 11 13 9 6 10 12 15 13 12 10 #3 16 12 4 2 3 5 6 5 14 16 10 11 10 8 11 15 4 15 5 9 14 7 8 10 8 12 6 15 10 15 15 #4 5 5 2 13 11 16 11 16 4 10 5 14 6 16 4 4 16 16 4 14 16 10 13 7 10 8 5 14 11 12 13 #5 9 2 13 16 6 14 12 9 6 4 10 5 5 11 15 8 4 5 12 10 13 8 5 11 9 11 12 8 15 9 14 slot number #6 2 14 8 8 14 7 13 15 12 16 4 11 9 12 3 15 8 4 4 13 6 5 7 6 8 9 8 6 15 13 9 #7 9 14 11 10 10 11 6 5 13 15 9 13 15 4 15 12 7 6 11 8 14 8 7 12 12 7 9 7 9 13 14 #8 16 8 6 8 15 4 12 9 5 3 9 3 4 15 11 3 7 16 6 7 13 7 6 9 5 8 7 16 16 11 15 #9 11 15 4 13 10 11 14 10 13 5 16 6 15 11 12 16 15 4 6 8 7 12 16 12 11 9 6 8 12 14 11 #10 11 3 6 11 6 14 4 6 6 10 15 14 5 4 12 4 12 3 5 10 8 12 14 11 10 5 7 7 14 10 11 #11 #12 5 9 8 11 7 9 5 4 11 5 6 6 16 7 4 16 11 15 3 4 15 10 15 8 11 12 8 13 13 16 13 7 12 15 16 7 9 13 15 11 15 3 13 16 16 7 12 3 9 14 4 6 6 8 8 12 6 11 14 16 15 12 #13 4 15 15 3 14 7 5 4 12 6 5 4 9 3 8 11 16 6 13 13 15 9 16 6 7 7 11 5 14 14 16 #14 14 9 11 5 3 5 14 10 14 6 15 4 10 15 16 11 12 9 12 9 7 11 15 10 7 6 9 16 11 16 10
5-28
Version 1 Rev 0
5-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)

The CPICH is a xed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channel that carries a pre-dened bit/symbol sequence. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the CPICH. In case transmit diversity (open or closed loop) is used on any downlink channel in the cell, the CPICH shall be transmitted from both antennas using the same channelization and scrambling code. In this case, the pre-dened symbol sequence of the CPICH is different for Antenna 1 and Antenna 2, see lower diagram opposite. In case of no transmit diversity, the symbol sequence of Antenna 1 in the lower diagram opposite is used. There are two types of Common pilot channels, the Primary and Secondary CPICH. They differ in their use and the limitations placed on their physical features.
Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH)

The Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) has the following characteristics: The same channelization code is always used for the P-CPICH (SF=256,0). The P-CPICH is scrambled by the primary scrambling code. There is one and only one P-CPICH per cell. The P-CPICH is broadcast over the entire cell.
The Primary CPICH is the phase reference for the following downlink channels: SCH, Primary CCPCH, AICH, PICH. The Primary CPICH is also the default phase reference for all other downlink physical channels.
Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH)

A Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) has the following characteristics: An arbitrary channelization code of SF=256 is used for the S-CPICH. A S-CPICH is scrambled by either the primary or a secondary scrambling code. There may be zero, one, or several S-CPICH per cell. A S-CPICH may be transmitted over the entire cell or only over a part of the cell. A Secondary CPICH may be the reference for the Secondary CCPCH and the downlink DPCH. If this is the case, the UE is informed about this by higher-layer signalling.
5-30
Version 1 Rev 0
Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) Frame Structure
Pre-dened symbol sequence , 20bits = 10 symbols Tslot = 2560 chips
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i 1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
Modulation Pa ttern f or C ommon Pilot Chan nel
Antenna 1
A AA A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Antenna 2 -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A
slot #14 Frame#i slot #0 Frame#i+1 slot #1
Frame B oundary
5-31
Version 1 Rev 0
P-CCPCH Frame Structure

The Primary CCPCH is a xed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channels used to carry the BCH. The frame structure of the Primary CCPCH is illustrated opposite. The frame structure differs from the downlink DPCH in that no Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands, no Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) and no pilot bits are transmitted The Primary CCPCH is not transmitted during the rst 256 chips of each slot. Instead, Primary SCH and Secondary SCH are transmitted during this period.
5-32
Version 1 Rev 0

256 chips (Tx OFF) Data 18 bits Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
5-33
Version 1 Rev 0
SCH and P-CCPCH
SCH and P-CCPCH

The diagram opposite shows the construction of the SCH and the P-CCPCH. It is thus clear that different channels can be multiplexed onto one link. The structure of these 2 Physical Channels are very important to the synchronization process.
5-34
SCH and P-CCPCH
Version 1 Rev 0
SCH and P-CCPCH

SCH SCH SCH
Frame 0 Data on P-CCPCH
5-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

PICH Channel Structure.
The Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) is a xed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carry the Paging Indicators (PI). The PICH is always associated with a S-CCPCH to which a PCH transport channel is mapped.
5-36
Version 1 Rev 0

288 bits for paging indication b 0 b1 12 bits (transmission off) b287 b288 b299
One radio frame (10ms)
5-37
Version 1 Rev 0

Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICH
The PICH Channel is used to alert the mobile that a possible paging message will be broadcast to it on the PCH channel. Each mobile will calculate a paging occasion, which it listens to for such an alert. In order to save on UE battery life the time between monitoring the paging occasions can be altered, also the number of paging indicators per frame that carry the alerts may be congured. These settings are all broadcast in the cell system information messages. The main parameters that determine the time between the UE monitoring its paging indicator are as follows: DRX Cycle length. The DRX Cycle Length is made up of a number of system Frames (each 10ms duration). It is this period that determines how long the mobile is actually in DRX mode thus conserving battery power. The cycle is repeated continuously and the UE must only become active once during each cycle. The duration of the cycle is variable and maybe altered to suit network conditions. Paging Occasion. The Paging Occasion determines the frame number the UE becomes active in, during the DRX Cycle. Paging Indicator. The Paging Indicator is repeated multiple times per system frame. The UE calculates which paging indicator to listen to using network-determined parameters. The mobile listens to the system information messages to obtain the parameters required for receiving paging indicators in the selected cell. It then performs a standard calculation using the cell parameters and its IMSI. The result of this calculation is a single paging indicator during the DRX cycle time. In other words the mobile must power up and listen to the calculated paging indicator (now know as its paging occasion) between a repetition period of 80ms to 5.12s (DRX Cycle Period). The diagram opposite illustrates the frame structure of the PICH.
5-38
Version 1 Rev 0

DRX Cycle, 80s to 5.12s Paging Indicators 18,36,72 or 144 per 10msecs PICH Frame.
Frame. 10s
Calculated Paging Occasion UE is in DRX until this Paging Indicator
5-39
Version 1 Rev 0
Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)

The Secondary CCPCH is used to carry the FACH and PCH. There are two types of Secondary CCPCH: those that include TFCI and those that do not include TFCI. It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted, hence making it mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI. The set of possible rates for the Secondary CCPCH is the same as for the downlink DPCH. The frame structure of the Secondary CCPCH is shown opposite. The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink Secondary CCPCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 256/2k. The spreading factor range is from 256 down to 4. The values for the number of bits per eld are given in the table opposite. The channel bit and symbol rates given in the table are the rates immediately before spreading. The FACH and PCH can be mapped to the same or to separate Secondary CCPCHs. If FACH and PCH are mapped to the same Secondary CCPCH, they can be mapped to the same frame. The main difference between a CCPCH and a downlink dedicated physical channel is that a CCPCH is not inner-loop power controlled. The main difference between the Primary and Secondary CCPCH is that the transport channel mapped to the Primary CCPCH (BCH) can only have a xed predened transport format combination, while the Secondary CCPCH support multiple transport format combinations using TFCI. Furthermore, a Primary CCPCH is transmitted over the entire cell while a Secondary CCPCH may be transmitted in a narrow lobe in the same way as a dedicated physical channel (only valid for a Secondary CCPCH carrying the FACH). For slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to a certain transport format combination of the FACHs and/or PCHs currently in use. This correspondence is (re-)negotiated at each FACH/PCH addition/removal.
5-40
Version 1 Rev 0

TFCI NTFCIbits Data Ndatabits Tslot = 2560 chips, 20*2kbits (k = 0..6) Pilot Npilotbits
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i 1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
Secondary CCPCH Fields

Slot Format #i 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Channel Bit Rate (kbps) 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 120 120 240 240 480 480 960 960 1920 1920 Channel Symbol Rate (ksps) 15 15 15 15 30 30 30 30 60 60 120 120 240 240 480 480 960 960 SF Bits/ Frame 300 300 300 300 600 600 600 600 1200 1200 2400 2400 4800 4800 9600 9600 19200 19200 Bits/ Slot 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40 80 80 160 160 320 320 640 640 1280 1280 Ndata Npilot NTFCI
256 256 256 256 128 128 128 128 64 64 32 32 16 16 8 8 4 4
20 12 18 10 40 32 38 30 72 64 152 144 312 296 632 616 1272 1256
0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 16 0 16 0 16
0 0 2 2 0 0 2 2 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8*
* If TFCI bits are not used, then DTX shall be used in TFCI eld.
5-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

Structure of the PRACH
The random-access transmission is based on a Slotted ALOHA approach with fast acquisition indication. The UE can start the random-access transmission at the beginning of a number of well-dened time intervals, denoted access slots. There are 15 access slots per two frames and they are spaced 5120 chips apart, see diagram opposite. Information on what access slots are available for random-access transmission is given by higher layers and is based upon the Access Service Class (ASC) of the UE
Random Access Transmission

The structure of the random-access transmission is also shown opposite. The random-access transmission consists of one or several preambles of length 4096 chips and a message of length 10ms or 20ms.
PRACH Pre-amble
Each preamble is of length 4096 chips and consists of 256 repetitions of a signature of length 16 chips. There are a maximum of 16 available signatures
5-42
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) RACH access slot numbers and their spacing
radio frame: 10ms 5120 chips radio frame: 10ms
Access slot
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10 #11 #12 #13 #14
Random Access Transmission Random Access Transmission
Random Access Transmission Random Access Transmission
Structure of the random-access transmission
Preamble 4096 chips
Preamble
Preamble
Message part 10ms (one radio frame)
Preamble 4096 chips
Preamble
Preamble
Message part 20ms (two radio frames)
5-43
Version 1 Rev 0

Structure of PRACH Message Part
The structure of the Random-access message part is shown opposite. The 10ms message is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips. Each slot consists of two parts, a data part that carries Layer 2 information and a control part that carries Layer 1 control information. The data and control parts are transmitted in parallel. The data part consists of 10*2k bits, where k=0,1,2,4. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256, 128, 64, and 32 respectively for the message data part. The value for the number of bits in the data eld are given in the table opposite. The control part consists of 8 known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection and 2 TFCI bits. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256 for the message control part. The total number of TFCI bits in the random-access message is 15*2 = 30. The TFCI value corresponds to a certain transport format of the current Random-access message. The Random Access Channel(s) (RACH) is characterised by: Existence in uplink only Limited data eld Collision risk Open loop power control
5-44
Version 1 Rev 0

Data Data Ndatabits
Control
Pilot Npilotbits Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2kbits (k = 0..3)
TFCI NTFCIbits
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i Message part radio frame TRACH = 10ms
Slot #14
Random-access message data fields

Slot Format #i Channel Bit Rate (kbps) 15 30 60 120 Channel Symbol Rate (ksps) 15 30 60 120 SF 256 128 64 32 Bits/ Frame 150 300 600 1200 Bits/Slot Ndata
0 1 2 3
10 20 40 80
10 20 40 80
5-45
Version 1 Rev 0
Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

The Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) is a xed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carry Acquisition Indicators (AI). Acquisition Indicator AIs corresponds to signature s on the PRACH. The diagram opposite illustrates the structure of the AICH. The AICH consists of a repeated sequence of 15 consecutive access slots (AS), each of length 5120 chips. Each access slot consists of two parts, an Acquisition-Indicator (AI) part consisting of 32 real-valued symbols a0, , a31 and a part of duration 1024 chips with no transmission that is not formally part of the AICH. The part of the slot with no transmission is reserved for possible use by CSICH or possible future use by other physical channels. The spreading factor (SF) used for channelization of the AICH is 256. The phase reference for the AICH is the Primary CPICH.
5-46
Version 1 Rev 0

Al part = 4096 chips, 32 real-valued symbols 1024 chips
a0 a1 a 2
a30 a31
Transmission Off
AS # 14 AS # 0
AS # 1
AS # i 20ms
AS # 14
AS # 0
5-47
Version 1 Rev 0
Relationship Between PRACH and AICH

The PRACH contains two sets of access slots as shown below. Access slot set 1 contains PRACH slots 0 - 7 and starts p-a chips before the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFN mod 2 = 0. Access slot set 2 contains PRACH slots 8 - 14 and starts (p-a -2560) chips before the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFN mod 2 = 1.
5-48
Version 1 Rev 0

AICH access slots
Tp-a
SFN mod 2 = 0 #0 #2 #1 #3 #2 #4 #3 #5 #4 #6 #5 #7 #6 #8 #7 #9 #8
SFN mod 2 = 1 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14
#0 PRACH access slots
#1
#10 #11 #12 #13 #14
Access slot set 1
Access slot set 2
10ms
10ms
5-49
Version 1 Rev 0
Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)

DL-DPCH Structure
There is only one type of downlink dedicated physical channel, the Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel (Downlink DPCH). Within one Downlink DPCH, dedicated data generated at Layer 2 and above, i.e. the Dedicated Transport Channel (DCH), is transmitted in time-multiplex with control information generated at Layer 1 (known pilot bits, TPC commands, and an optional TFCI). The downlink DPCH can thus be seen as a time multiplex of a downlink DPDCH and a downlink DPCCH. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the downlink DPCH. Each frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one power-control period. The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink DPCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 512/2k. The spreading factor may thus range from 512 down to 4. The exact number of bits of the different downlink DPCH elds (Npilot, NTPC, NTFCI, Ndata1 and Ndata2) is dependent upon the SF. What slot format to use is congured by higher layers and can also be recongured by higher layers. There are basically two types of downlink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for xed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it is mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the downlink. The Pilot bits are provided to permit frame synchronisation and channel estimation at the receiving node. TPC symbol will indicate a step increase or decrease of transmitter power by the receiving node. TPC Bit Pattern NTPC = 2 11 00 NTPC = 4 1111 0000 NTPC = 8 1111 1111 00000000 1 0 Transmitter power control command
5-50
Version 1 Rev 0

DPDCH Data 1 DPCCH TPC DPDCH Data 2 DPCCH Pilot Npilot bits Tslot = 2560 chips
TFCI
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i One radio frame = 10ms K = 0.........7
Slot #14
5-51
Version 1 Rev 0

Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code Transmission
For slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to a certain combination of bit rates of the DCHs currently in use. This correspondence is re-negotiated at each DCH addition/removal. When the total bit rate to be transmitted on one downlink CCTrCH exceeds the maximum bit rate for a downlink physical channel, multicode transmission is employed, i.e. several parallel downlink DPCHs are transmitted for one CCTrCH using the same spreading factor. In this case, the Layer 1 control information is put on only the rst downlink DPCH. The additional downlink DPCHs belonging to the CCTrCH do not transmit any data during the corresponding time period. TFCI DCH CCTrCH DPCH TPC Transport Formation Combination Indicator Dedicated Channel Coded Composite Transport Channel Dedicated Physical Channel Transmit Power Control
5-52
Version 1 Rev 0

DPDCH TPC Transmission Power TFCI DPDCH Pilot
Physical Channel 1
Transmission Power
Physical Channel 2
Transmission Power
Physical Channel L
One Slot (2560 chips)
5-53
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)

There are two types of uplink dedicated physical channels, the Uplink Dedicated Physical Data Channel (Uplink DPDCH) and the Uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (uplink DPCCH). The DPDCH and the DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed within each radio frame. The uplink DPDCH is used to carry the DCH transport channel. There may be zero, one, or several uplink DPDCHs on each radio link. The uplink DPCCH is used to carry control information generated at Layer 1. The Layer 1 control information consists of known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection, Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands, Feedback Information (FBI), and an optional Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI). The transport-format combination indicator informs the receiver about the instantaneous transport format combination of the transport channels mapped to the simultaneously transmitted Uplink DPDCH radio frame. There is one and only one Uplink DPCCH on each radio link. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the Uplink dedicated physical channels. Each radio frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one TPC period. The parameter k in the diagram determines the number of bits per uplink DPDCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the DPDCH as SF = 256/2k. The DPDCH spreading factor may range from 256 down to 4, giving data rates between 15kbs and 960kbs The spreading factor of the uplink DPCCH is always equal to 256, i.e. there are 10 bits per uplink DPCCH slot. What slot format to use is congured by higher layers and can also be recongured by higher layers. The FBI bits are used to support techniques requiring feedback from the UE to the UTRAN Access Point, including closed loop mode transmit diversity and Site Selection Diversity Transmission (SSDT). There are two types of Uplink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for xed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it is mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the uplink. Multi-code operation is possible for the uplink Dedicated Physical Channels. When multi-code transmission is used, several parallel DPDCH are transmitted using different channelization codes. However, there is only one DPCCH per radio link.
5-54
Version 1 Rev 0

DPDCH Data Ndatabits
DPCCH
Pilot Npilotbits
TFCI NTFCIbits
FBI NFBIbits
TPC NTPCbits
Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2kbits (k = 0..6)
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
K = 0........7
5-55
Version 1 Rev 0
Downlink Flow Process

The downlink ow process consists of the following physical layer functions. Data arrives to the coding/multiplexing unit in the form of transport block sets once every transmission time interval. The transmission time interval is transport-channel specic from the set {10ms, 20ms, 40ms and 80ms}. The following coding/multiplexing steps can be identied for downlink: Add CRC to each transport block Transport block concatenation and code block segmentation Channel coding Rate matching First insertion of discontinuous transmission (DTX) indication bits First interleaving Radio frame segmentation Multiplexing of transport channels Second insertion of DTX indication bits Physical channel segmentation Second interleaving Mapping to physical channels
It should be noted that not every step is applicable to every data type.
5-56
Version 1 Rev 0

CRC attachment TrBk concatenation / Code block segmentation Channel coding Rate matching 1st insertion of DTX indication 1st interleaving Radio frame segmentation TrCH Multiplexing 2nd insertion of DTX indication CCTrCH Physical channel segmentation 2nd interleaving Physical channel mapping
PhCH#2 PhCH#1
5-57
Rate matching
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Flow Process
Uplink Flow Process

The uplink ow process is largely the same as that for the downlink, and is illustrated in the diagram opposite. The differences in the individual process steps are as follows.
Radio Frame Equalisation

Radio frame size equalisation is padding the input bit sequence in order to ensure that the output can be segmented in data segments of equal size. Radio frame size equalisation is only performed in the UL (DL rate matching output block length is always an integer multiple of the frame length).
Rate Matching
The rate matching operation in the uplink, is a much more dynamic process that may vary on a frame-by-frame basis. The rate matching operation needs to take into account the the number of bits coming from all transport channels. When the data rate of one service, the dynamic rate matching adjusts the rates of the remaining service as well so that all symbols in the radio frame will be used. For example if with two transport channels, one has a momentary zero rate, rate matching used repetition to increase the symbol rate for the other service sufciently so that all uplink channel symbols are used.
DTX
Because Uplink rate matching ensures that all unused transport channel bits are lled, there is no requirement for DTX indication bits to be inserted in the uplink ow
5-58
Uplink Flow Process
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Flow Process

CRC attachment TrBk concatenation / Code block segmentation Channel coding Radio Frame equalisation 1st interleaving Radio frame segmentation Rate matching Rate matching
TrCH Multiplexing CCTrCH Physical channel segmentation 2nd interleaving Physical channel mapping
PhCH#1 PhCH#2
5-59
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Flow Process
5-60
Pub-Date
MAC, RLC, BMC, PDCP and RRC Protocols and Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 6
6-1
Version 1 Rev 0
6-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
Describe Describe Describe Describe Describe Describe the Radio Protocol Stack the MAC layer the RLC layer the PDCP protocol the BMC protocol the RRC protocol and its common procedures
6-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction
Introduction
In this chapter we are going to look at the layer 2 protocols in more detail after being introduced to them in previous chapter in the shape of the MAC and RLC layers. The layer 3 protocols are also going to be discussed and some of the more common procedures explored to gain a better understanding of the essential functions of UMTS.
Layer 2 Protocols
Layer 2 offers services of information transmission to layer 3 in the form of Radio Bearers (RB) for data services and Signalling Radio Bearers (SRB) for control information originated either in the Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol or in the Non Access Stratum (NAS). With respect to the ow of control information, it goes through the RLC and MAC layers, while in the case of data information, depending on the specic service, there exist two additional sub-layers, namely the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) and the Broadcast Multicast Control (BMC).
Layer 3 Protocols
With respect to layer 3, only the lowest sub-layer, denoted as Radio Resource Control (RRC) terminates in the UTRAN control plane. Each layer communicates with the same layer at the peer entity (e.g. the RRC layer at the UE communicates with the RRC at the RNC), and this communication is dened by the specic protocol of each layer. At the UTRAN side, the RLC and above radio protocols are located in the RNC. In turn, with respect to the MAC protocol, some of its functionalities are located in the Node B and others in the RNC. The layered structure is constructed upon the assumption that each layer provides message transfer services to the upper layers. At one extreme network entity (e.g. UE or RNC), a given layer receives Service Data Units (SDUs) containing the messages from its upper layer, processes them adding the required headers and control elements and eventually delivers them in the form of Protocol Data Units (PDUs) to its lower layer. Note that the PDU delivered by a given layer corresponds to the SDU seen by its lower layer. At the lowest layer, the information is nally transferred through the channels existing in the physical layer (i.e. the specic code sequences, time slots and frequency bands). At the other extreme network entity (e.g. RNC or UE), the information is received at the physical layer and delivered to the upper layers until reaching the destination layer. Note that this transfer of information requires the denition of adequate interfaces between adjacent layers specifying the path that information follows depending on its nature. Layer 2 offers to the upper layers the service of information transmission between the UE and the UTRAN by means of the Radio Bearers (RBs) and Signalling Radio Bearers (SRBs). The former provide the transmission of user data while the latter are intended to transfer control information that can be originated either in the RRC protocol or in upper layers. Whenever a service is provided to a given UE (e.g. a voice service, a videoconference service, an interactive web browsing service, etc.) it should be associated to a specic RB that species the conguration and the parameters of the sub-layers in layer 2 and the physical layer depending on the characteristics of the service being provided. The information ow associated to a RB or a SRB is mapped into different types of channels depending on the position in the layered protocol architecture.
6-4
Introduction
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction
6-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol

The MAC protocol exists in the lowest sub-layer of layer 2 protocol architecture of the radio interface. It exists in the UE, the node B and the RNC entities. The MAC provides data transfer services to the logical channels and it is serviced by the physical layer by means of the transport channels, so one of the main functionalities of the MAC is the mapping between logical and transport channels. The MAC layer at either the UTRAN or the UE receives MAC SDUs from the RLC and it is responsible for transferring them to the corresponding peer MAC entity at the other side. A MAC SDU is the minimum amount of information that can be transferred between the two sub-layers in a logical channel. This transfer service is done in unacknowledged mode, which means that the delivery to the other side is not guaranteed, so the RLC layer must have mechanisms to detect errors and losses of SDUs as well as perform retransmissions. Furthermore, the MAC protocol does not execute any type of segmentation of the MAC SDUs. For each MAC SDU, a MAC header is added, whose length and contents depend on the specic transport channels. The MAC header includes the C/T eld that identies the specic logical channel when several logical channels are multiplexed onto the same transport channel, as well as elds to identify the specic UE in the case of common transport channels like RACH or FACH. It is also possible that the MAC header is empty. Typically, this would be the case of the transfer of user information through a DCH transport channel that is not multiplexed with any other channel at the MAC layer, and in which no UE identication is required. The MAC layer functions (as well as the tasks discussed above and on the next page) also include: Priority handling of data ows Priority handling between UEs by dynamic scheduling Identity of UEs on common channels Trafc volume monitoring Dynamic transport channel switching Ciphering for transport RLC mode Access service class selection.
6-6
Version 1 Rev 0

BCCH MAC MAC Control Control MAC Control MAC MAC Control Control BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH DCCH DTCH MAC Control
MAC-b (NodeB)
MAC- hs (NodeB)
MAC- e (NodeB)
MAC- es (RNC)
MAC- c/sh (RNC)
MAC-d (RNC)
BCH
HS-DSCH
HS-DSCH
E-DCH
BCH
PCH FACH RACH RACH
DCH
DCH
6-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Formats
Transport Formats
The combination of a MAC SDU and a MAC header is a MAC PDU, which corresponds to a TB transferred to the physical layer through the corresponding transport channel. In each Transmission Time Interval (TTI) the MAC layer selects a suitable Transport Format (TF) or a Transport Format Combination (TFC), depending on the instantaneous source rate, the service characteristics and the Transport Format Combination Set (TFCS). Each TF is related to a given instantaneous bit rate. Once the selection is done, the MAC layer delivers a set of TBs to the physical layer, denoted as the Transport Block Set (TBS). The transport blocks must be delivered in the same order in which the corresponding MAC SDUs were delivered by the RLC layer. Transport Block (TB):Transport Block (TB) is the basic unit MAC transfers to L1 for L1 processing. A TB is equivalent to a MAC Protocol Data Unit (PDU). TB size indicates the number of bits in a TB Transport Block Set (TBS):Transport Block Set (TBS) is a set of TBs MAC transfers on a transport channel at one time to L1. A TBS is equivalent to a MAC PDU Set. TBS size indicates the number of bits in a TBS. Transport Format (TF):Transport Format (TF) is a format L1 applies for transferring a TBS to MAC on a transport channel at a Transmission Time Interval (TTI). The TF consists of two parts a dynamic part and a semi-static part. Transport Format Set (TFS):Transport Format Set (TFS) is a set of TFs. A TF represents a bit rate. A TFS consisting of multiple TFs may have multi rates. For example, a xed-rate DCH has only a single TF. A variable-rate DCH has a TFS, with one TF for each rate. Transport Format Combination (TFC):Transport Format Combination (TFC) is the combination of currently valid TFs on all transport channels of a UE. It contains the TF from each transport channel. Transport Format Combination Set (TFCS)Transport Format Combination Set (TFCS) is a set of TFCs of a UE. Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI):Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) is a label for a specic TFC within a TFCS. Transport Format Identication (TFI)Transport Format Identication (TFI) is a label for a specic TF within a TFS. is a label for a specic TF within a TFS.
0101010011110101001 (MAC PDU)
Transport Channel (TrCH)

Transport Block Set Size (Size in bits) Transmission Time Interval (TTI) 10ms, 20ms, 40ms or 2ms for HSDPA
Transport Block (TB) Basic unit of the transport format generated every 10ms or multiple of 10ms
Transport Format Indicator (TFI)
Transport Block Size (TBS) Size of the Transport Block in bits
Physical Layer
6-8
Transport Block Set (TBS)
Transport Formats
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Formats
0101010011110101001 (MAC PDU)
Transport Channel (TrCH)

Transmission Time Interval (TTI) = 10ms Transport Block Set Size is 336 bits
168 bits
Transport Block Set (TBS)
Transport Format Indicator (TFI)
168 bits
Example Transport Format: Dynamic part 168 bit TB, 336 bit TBS Semi- static TTI 10ms, turbo coding, 1/3 rate conv coding, 16 crc
Transport Channel (TrCH1)

TBS size is 336 bits
Transport Channel (TrCH2)

TBS size is 336 bits
168 bits
168 bits
(TBS)
(TBS)
(TFI)
168 bits
(TTI) = 10ms
(TFI)
168 bits
Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI)
Coded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH)
DPCCH
DPDCH
(TTI) = 10ms
6-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Link Control (RLC) Protocol

The RLC sub-layer is located in both the UE and the RNC immediately above the MAC sub-layer according to the radio interface protocol architecture. In the control plane, it provides services directly to layer 3, while in the user plane it may also provide services to the PDCP and BMC sub-layers. In turn, it receives information transfer services from the MAC layer by means of the logical channels.The RLC protocol receives from the upper layer RLC SDUs The RLC protocol receives from the upper layer RLC SDUs and transmits RLC PDUs to the MAC layer (note that the RLC PDUs are the same as the MAC SDUs). Essentially, the RLC provides three types of data transfer services corresponding to the three modes of operation: Transparent Mode (TM); Unacknowledged Mode (UM); and Acknowledged Mode (AM). Each mode is associated with a different Service Access Point (SAP) for upper layers, denoted as TM-SAP, UM-SAP and AM-SAP, respectively, and with different RLC entities,
Transparent Mode (TM)

The features of TM are dened by a no delay, no overhead and no assured delivery of data. The transparent mode can be used by any of the logical channels except the CTCH, and it is the only mode that can be used by the BCCH and PCCH for the transfer of broadcast and paging messages. It is the mode typically used by the streaming service class in the case of dedicated channels and CS voice services.
Unacknowledged Mode (UM)

The features of UM are dened by low delay, lower transmission efciency caused by having a UM header and no assured delivery of data. Unlike TM the segmentation of RLC PDUs is allowed and is taken care of by the UM header when re-segmentation takes place. UM can be used by CCCH, CTCH, DTCH and DCCH logical channels, and it is normally used by some RRC control procedures, in which there exist specic RRC acknowledgement messages, so that acknowledgement at the RLC layer is not necessary. Voice over IP services may also use this mode.
Acknowledged Mode (AM)

The features of AM are dened by high delay caused by having assured delivery of data, low transmission efciency caused by having a large AM header. Services (web browsing, FTP download) with the following features: Not insensitive to delay High or very high requirement for transmission quality
6-10
Version 1 Rev 0
6-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)

The PDCP only exists in the user plane and is specically for PS services. Its main functionality is to improve the efciency in the radio transmission by means of executing header compression of the IP data packets coming from upper layers. It receives PDCP SDUs from upper layers and delivers to the RLC sub-layer different PDCP PDUs. The types of PDCP PDUs: PDCP Data PDU, which contains a PDCP SDU, either compressed or uncompressed, or header compression related control signalling. The type of information contained is indicated in a one-byte header; PDCP-No-Header PDU, which contains an uncompressed PDCP SDU without adding any type of header; PDCP SeqNum PDU, which, apart from containing a compressed or uncompressed PDCP SDU, also includes a PDCP SDU sequence number. The specic header compression protocol depends on the particular upper layer protocols that form the incoming PDCP SDU and on the conguration of the PDCP sub-layer by upper layers. For TCP/IP packets, the IP header compression mechanism described in IETF RFC 2507 is used, which is essentially based on providing a variable length TCP/IP header whose contents are specied by the bits of the rst byte. The amount of information in the header is reduced by sending only the changes from one packet to the next. In this way, it is possible to reduce the TCP/IP header from the usual value of 40 bytes down to 4 or 5 bytes. Note that when such a TCP/IP compressed packet is lost due to errors in the lower layers, the incremental condition of the header compression mechanism makes it no longer possible to decode the headers of the subsequent packets. Consequently, in such cases it is necessary to send sporadic uncompressed TCP/IP segments. Different types of compressed headers are accepted by the protocol. The type of compression is indicated in the PDCP Data PDU header. For RTP/UDP/IP packets, in which certain time constraints must be met, the Robust Header Compression (ROHC) method dened in IETF RFC 3095 is used. This protocol supports segmentation of packets and can transmit information packets from several contexts, distinguished by the Context Identier (CID), which is included either in the PDCP header or in the upper layer packet. The ROHC protocol involves some signalling parameters that must be exchanged between the compressor and the decompressor entities at the transmitter and the receiver sides. The PDCP protocol may operate with any of the three RLC modes (i.e. transparent, unacknowledged and acknowledged), and the selection will depend on the specic service characteristics. When operating with acknowledged RLC mode congured with in-sequence delivery, the PDCP with ROHC protocol also provides support for a lossless SRNS relocation procedure by means of PDCP sequence numbering.
6-12
Version 1 Rev 0

Applications
Data protocols
IP
PPP
FTP
etc Header de/compres s ion
P DC P
T rans fer of us er data F orwarding of P DC P S DUs and as s ociated s equence numbers
R LC
MAC
P HY S
6-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC) Protocol

Like the PDCP, the BMC protocol only exists in the user plane, and provides a broadcast/multicast transmission service operating in RLC unacknowledged mode. The BMC entity at the UTRAN side is located in the RNC and its functions include the storage of Cell Broadcast Messages, which are transmitted in a given cell to certain UEs that support the SMS Cell Broadcast Service. These messages, which carry information that depends on the geographical area, are transmitted by means of the CTCH logical channel and the mobile should be able to receive them in idle mode as well as in the rest of RRC states. The stored messages are scheduled by the BMC in order to decide the appropriate instant for their transmission. The specic scheduling algorithm is implementation dependent. At the UE side, the BMC entity delivers the received cell broadcast messages to the upper layers. Trafc volume monitoring is done by the BMC by making predictions on the expected amount of capacity in terms of bit rate that is needed for the transmission of cell broadcast messages and indicates it to the RRC entity, so that it can act accordingly.
6-14
Version 1 Rev 0

Applications S torage of cell broadcas t mes s ages Traffic volume monitoring and radio res ource reques ts for CBS S cheduling of cell broadcas t ms gs Trans mis s ion of cell broadcas t ms gs R LC S toring of ms g IDs and s erial numbers of rxd C B S ms gs in UE s Delivery of cell broadcas t mes s ages to upper layers (NAS )
Data protocols
IP
PPP
FTP
etc
P DC P
B MC
MAC
P HYS
6-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Resource Control (RRC)

According to the radio interface protocol architecture that was shown in the rst slide of this chapter, the RRC protocol only exists in the control plane and occupies the lowest sub-layer of layer 3 while, at the same time, being the highest layer of the Radio Access Network (i.e. the UTRAN part) protocol stack. Although layer 3 is partitioned in other sub-layers above RRC, they belong to the Non Access Stratum (NAS) and are specied between the UE and the Core Network parts of the UMTS architecture. Some examples of control protocols above the RRC include Session Management (SM), Connection Management (CM), Mobility Management (MM) or GPRS Mobility Management (GMM). Supplementary Services (SS), Short Message Services or GPRS Short Message Services (GSMS) and Connection Control (CC) The RRC protocol provides the service of transferring signalling information to the NAS upper layer entities. Besides, RRC handles the control plane signalling between the UE and the UTRAN through Signalling Radio Bearers. This includes procedures specic of the Access Stratum (AS) that allow the appropriate conguration of the lower layers in both control and user planes taking into account the network status. Therefore, these signalling procedures provide the support for the execution of the Radio Resource Management (RRM) strategies. The RRC functions include: Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum (Core Network) Broadcast of information related to the access stratum Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN Establishment, reconguration and release of Radio Bearers Assignment, reconguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection RRC connection mobility functions Control of requested QoS UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting Outer loop power control Control of ciphering Paging. Initial cell selection and cell re-selection; Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH; RRC message integrity protection; CBS control
6-16
Version 1 Rev 0
6-17
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
RRC Procedures
In this part of the course some of the more important RRC procedures will be discussed to allow understanding of the signalling that must take place to allow UMTS to operate.
Broadcast of System Information.

This procedure allows the broadcasting of system information messages from the UTRAN to the terminals of a given cell. These messages are organised into System Information Blocks (SIBs), ranging from 1 to 18, which are sent periodically on the BCCH. A System Block (SB) is a block of SIBs. There exists a Master Information Block (MIB) that includes the reference information to decode the rest of the SIBs and which is the rst block that the mobile should read when it selects a new cell. Additionally, it contains a tag that allows the detection of changes in certain SIBs whose information does not change frequently, so that the terminals do not need to decode continuously all the broadcast messages. In the case of important changes in the SIBs, the network may notify these to the mobiles in Cell_PCH and URA_PCH states through a Paging Type 1 message in the PCH channel, while the mobiles in Cell_FACH are informed through the FACH channel by means of the System Information Change Indication message. Supported System Information Block Types The list below shows the SIBs that are currently supported. The missing ones are for UMTS TDD mode of working. A normally running RNC cell broadcasts SIB1/3/5/7/11 and optionally SIB2/18. Conguration of system information blocks (SIBs) are shown in the table opposite. SIB 1 Contains NAS system information as well as UE timers and counters to be used in idle mode and in connected mode. SIB 2 Contains the URA identication. SIB 3 Contains parameters for cell selection and reselection. SIB 5 Contains parameters for the conguration of the common physical channels in a cell e.g., power offset of AICH and PICH, SCCPCH information and PRACH information. SIB 7 Contains the fast changing parameters e.g., UL interference and dynamic persistence level. SIB 11 Contains measurement control information to be used in a cell e.g., FACH measurement occasion information, measurement control system information and neighbouring cell measurement information. SIB 18 Contains PLMN identities of neighbouring cells to be considered in idle mode as well as in connected mode.
6-18
RRC Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
C ore Network
S IB 1
Iu
Non acces s s tratum s ys info + UE timers and counter
SB S IB 3 E xample only
C ell s ys tem info i.e cell s election and res election info
R NC
Iub
MIB
BCH
NodeB
S IB 5
S C C P C H and P R AC H information
6-19
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
RRC Procedures
Cell Selection/Re-selection
The goal of the cell selection procedures is to fast nd a cell to camp on. To speed up this process, at "power up" or when returning from "out of coverage", the UE shall start with the stored information from previous network contacts. If the UE is unable to nd any of those cells the initial cell search will be initiated. If it is not possible to nd a cell from a valid PLMN the UE will choose a cell in a forbidden PLMN and enter a "limited service state". In this state the UE regularly attempt to nd a suitable cell on a valid PLMN. If a better cell is found the UE has to read the system information for that cell. The cell to camp on is chosen by the UE on link quality basis. However, the network can set cell re-selection thresholds in order to take other criteria into account, such as, for example: available services; cell load; UE speed. In CDMA, it is important to minimise the UE output power, and also to minimise the power consumption in the UE. In order to achieve that, an Immediate Cell Evaluation Procedure at call set up can ensure that the UE transmits with the best cell, while keeping the power consumption low. Cell Re-selection The cell reselection procedure is a procedure to check the best cell to camp on. The evaluation of the measurements for this procedure is always active, in idle mode, after the cell selection procedure has been completed and the rst cell has been chosen. The goal of the procedure is to always camp on a cell with good enough quality even if it is not the optimal cell all the time. It is also possible to have a "time to trigger" and hysteresis criteria in the cell reselection to control the number of cell reselections. The parameters needed for the cell reselection procedure (e.g., the offset value and the hysteresis) are unique on a cell to neighbour cell relation basis. These have therefore to be distributed, together with time to trigger value, in system information in the serving cell. This implies that the UE does not need to read the system information in the neighbouring cells before the cell reselection procedure nds a neighbouring cell with better quality.
6-20
RRC Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
go here whenever a new PLMN is selected cell information stored for the PLMN Stored Information Cell Selection no suitable cell found suitable cell found Cell Selection when leaving connected mode return to idle mode suitable cell found no suitable cell found 1 no cell information stored for the PLMN Initial Cell Selection
no suitable cell found
suitable cell found
Camped normally suitable cell selected trigger
NAS registration rejected
leave idle mode
Connected Mode
Cell Reselection
no suitable cell found
go here when no USIM in the UE 1 no acceptable cell found an acceptable cell found Cell Selection when leaving connected mode return to idle mode Connected Mode (Emergency calls only) USIM inserted
Any Cell Selection
acceptable cell found
Camped on Any Cell acceptable cell selected trigger
suitable cell found
leave idle mode
Any Cell Reselection
no acceptable cell found
6-21
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
RRC Procedures
UE State Transition Algorithm
After the RRC connection is set up, the RNC observes UE activity and uses the UE state transition algorithm to transit the UE state. UE State Transition Algorithm The gure opposite shows the RRC states in UTRA RRC Connected Mode, including transitions between UTRA RRC connected mode and GSM connected mode for CS domain services, and between UTRA RRC connected mode and GSM/GPRS packet modes for PS domain services. It also shows the transitions between Idle Mode and UTRA RRC Connected Mode and furthermore the transitions within UTRA RRC connected mode. In our algorithm, we only care for the state transition in the UTRAN connected mode. The principle of UE state transition is that: The state of the UE transits from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH or from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH/URA_PCH if the activity of UE decreases. The state of the UE transits from CELL_PCH/URA_PCH to CELL_FACH or from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH if the activity of UE increases. Paging This procedure is used to transmit paging information to selected UEs that are in idle mode or in Cell_PCH and URA_PCH states. It makes use of the Paging Type 1 message. The reasons for a paging message can be the establishment of a network originated call or session set-up, the request to trigger a cell update procedure, the change to Cell_FACH state because of downlink packet data activity, the request to start the release of an RRC connection and the request to read updated system information in the broadcast channel. A similar procedure exists for paging mobiles in Cell_DCH and Cell_FACH states, but in this case a Paging Type 2 message is sent through the DCCH.
6-22
RRC Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures UE State Transition and Status of the RRC Connection

UTRAN Connected Mode UTRAN Inter-RAT Handover
URA_PCH CELL_PCH CELL_DCH (with HSDSCH) CELL_FACH CELL_DCH

Release RRC connection Release RRC connection Establish RRC connection Establish RRC connection
GSM Connected Mode

GSM Handover Release RR Connection
Cell Reselection
GPRS Packet Transfer Mode

Release of temporary block flow Initiation of temporary block flow
Establish RR Connection
Camped on a UTRAN Cell
Camped on a GSM/GPRS Cell
Idle Mode
6-23
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
RRC Procedures
RRC connection establishment
UEs in idle mode that require the initiation of a signalling connection make use of the RRC connection establishment procedure. The procedure starts with a RRC Connection Request message mapped to the CCCH logical channel and transmitted through the RACH. The mobile identies itself by means of NAS identiers like the IMSI or the TMSI and it includes the establishment cause. There exist several causes including the registration, the establishment of originating calls for each of the four possible service classes (conversational, streaming, interactive and background) or the transfer of higher layer signalling. Upon receipt of this message, the network may either accept or reject the request by means of a RRC Connection Setup or a RRC Connection Reject message, respectively, which is mapped to the CCCH logical channel and the FACH transport channel. In the case of acceptance, the RRC Connection Setup message includes the Radio Network Terminal Identier (RNTI) for the mobile and the indication about whether to pass to Cell_DCH or to Cell_FACH. It also includes the characterisation of the allocated dedicated radio channel in terms of code sequence and TFCS in both the uplink and downlink direction, when the user is moved to the Cell_DCH. In any case, the mobile terminal is now in connected mode and there is a DCCH logical channel allocated to it that includes SRB#1, SRB#2, SRB#3 and optionally SRB#4. The procedure completes when the mobile sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message through DCCH and either DCH or RACH transport channel, thus acknowledging the correct reception and conguration of the allocated channel. Only one RRC connection may exist for a given mobile.
Establishment of signalling connections between the UE and the Core Network and direct transfer of signalling messages.
These procedures are intended to establish and release NAS signalling connections between the terminal and the different core network domains (i.e. CS and PS domains). This allows the direct transfer of signalling messages between the upper layer entities of mobiles that have previously established a RRC connection. The term direct transfer refers to the transmission of signalling NAS messages through the RRC layer either in the uplink or in the downlink direction. The establishment of the signalling connection is done by means of the Initial Direct Transfer procedure, which is initiated by the NAS of the UE. In this case, the RRC layer of the UE sends an Initial Direct Transfer message to the peer entity at the SRNC that includes the message denoted as Initial UE Message (which belongs to the RANAP protocol dened between RNC and CN and that contains a NAS message) and some information about the core network domain (i.e. CS or PS) to which the NAS message should be delivered. Once the signalling connection has been established with the Initial Direct Transfer message, subsequent NAS messages corresponding to this connection are transmitted with the Uplink Direct Transfer and Downlink Direct Transfer messages between RRC entities. Some examples of NAS messages that can be exchanged could be, for example, a CM Service Request in order to start a call, a MM Location Updating Request, etc.
6-24
RRC Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
UE
RRC Message (Logical Channel)
S R NC
RANAP Message
CN
RRC Connection Request (CCCH) RRC connection establishment (UE-UTRAN)
Establish radio resource at the Node B for SRB (NBAP Signalling)
RRC Connection Setup (CCCH) Establish resources at the Iu interface Initial UE Message
RRC Connection Complete (DCCH) Signalling connection establishment (UE-CN) Initial Direct Transfer (DCCH)
UL/DL Direct Transfer Messages RAB Assignment Request Message Service establishment (UE-CN) Radio Bearer Setup (DCCH)
Establish radio resource at the Node B for RB (NBAP Signalling)
Radio Bearer Setup Complete (DCCH)
6-25
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
RRC Procedures
Radio bearer establishment
The radio bearer establishment is a procedure initiated by the upper layers of the network side in order to request the allocation of radio resources to a mobile terminal that previously has established a RRC connection. The establishment of a RRC connection involves the establishment of different SRBs by means of the allocation of the required radio resources to allow the transfer of signalling messages between the UE and the network. At a given instant during the RRC connection, the upper layer signalling messages exchanged by the UE and the Core Network may request the initiation of a user service belonging to a certain service class and with different requirements (e.g. a circuit switched call by means of a CC Setup message or a packet transfer by means of a SM Activate PDP Context Request). This user service requires the extension of the radio resource allocation to the corresponding user taking into consideration the service requirements. Then, after the acceptance of the new service by the admission control, the RRC of the SRNC will receive from the core network (i.e. from the MSC for CS services or from the SGSN for PS services) the order to allocate the corresponding radio resources to the terminal. This will initiate the establishment of a radio bearer through the corresponding RRC procedure, which starts with the transmission of a Radio Bearer Setup message from the RRC at the SRNC to the peer entity at the UE side. This message includes all the parameters to congure the RLC/MAC/PHY layers according to the transport and physical channels that are being assigned for both the uplink and downlink direction (e.g. transport channel type, code sequence, TFCS, RLC mode, etc.). Note that depending on the service nature (i.e. CS or PS) and the specic service requirements, this procedure may or may not involve the establishment of a dedicated channel. Similarly, and in the case when previous physical dedicated channels are already allocated to the user, the procedure may involve the modication of the physical channel characteristics. When the transport and physical channels allocated in the radio bearer are successfully established, the RRC at the UE side will issue a Radio Bearer Setup Complete message. In the case of failure, it will issue a Radio Bearer Setup Failure message.
6-26
RRC Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
UE
RRC Message (Logical Channel)
S R NC
RANAP Message
CN
RRC Connection Request (CCCH) RRC connection establishment (UE-UTRAN)
Establish radio resource at the Node B for SRB (NBAP Signalling)
RRC Connection Setup (CCCH) Establish resources at the Iu interface Initial UE Message
RRC Connection Complete (DCCH) Signalling connection establishment (UE-CN) Initial Direct Transfer (DCCH)
UL/DL Direct Transfer Messages RAB Assignment Request Message Service establishment (UE-CN) Radio Bearer Setup (DCCH)
Establish radio resource at the Node B for RB (NBAP Signalling)
Radio Bearer Setup Complete (DCCH)
6-27
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
RRC Procedures
Measurement Procedures
These procedures allow the mobile terminals to provide the network with different measurement reports that will be used by the radio resource management strategies to take the appropriate decisions that maintain the required QoS for the accepted mobiles. The network congures the measurements that should be provided by the mobile terminal by indicating the objects to be measured (i.e. the cells, the transport channels and the physical channels), the criteria to be used (i.e. periodic reporting or event-triggered reporting when certain events are detected at the UE) and the RLC mode to be used (i.e. acknowledged or unacknowledged). This conguration is done by means of the Measurement Control message. Measurements are required only by terminals in Cell_DCH and Cell_FACH states, although in some cases such as trafc volume monitoring, terminals in Cell_PCH may also send measurement reports. The Measurement Reports provided by the terminals include several types of measurements, which are classied into the following groups: Intra-frequency measurements - These correspond to downlink physical channels in the cells with the same frequency as the cells from the Active Set. The measured cells belong to the Monitored Set, which is broadcast in the cell where the mobile is allocated. These measurements include: Ec/No of the primary CPICH channel, which is equivalent to the ratio between the power of the pilot channel and the total received power at the antenna connector. Downlink path loss which can be measured as the difference between the transmitted and the received CPICH power. The transmitted CPICH power is broadcast by the network. Downlink Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) for the primary CPICH, corresponding to the power measured at the code of the primary CPICH. Measured time difference between P-CCPCH frames of the different cells.
Inter-frequency measurements These are done over downlink physical channels of cells with a different frequency to that of the cells in the active set. The measurements included in this group are essentially the same as in the intra-frequency measurements. Inter-RAT measurements These are done over cells from other RATs, like GSM/GPRS, and will be required to decide the execution of inter-RAT handovers. The measured quantities for GSM cells include the GSM carrier RSSI, BSIC and the observed time difference with respect to the GSM cell. Trafc volume measurements These include uplink measurements of the RLC buffer occupancy, providing instantaneous and average values as well as the measured variance. Quality measurements These report downlink quality parameters, such as the transport block error rate for specic transport channels. UE internal measurements These measurements include the UE transmission power, the UE received RSSI and the observed difference between reception and transmission times (i.e. the difference between the start of the uplink DPCCH/DPDCH transmission and the reception of the rst path of the downlink DPCH).
6-28
RRC Procedures
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
Neighbour Cells Intra-frequency measurements
Ec/No of the primary CPICH channel C ore Network Downlink path loss RSCP for the primary CPICH
Inter-RAT measurements
GSM RSSI BSIC
Iu
Inter-frequency measurements
Ec/No of the primary CPICH channel Downlink path loss
R NC
Iub
RSCP for the primary CPICH
UE internal measurements
UE transmission power UE received RSSI NodeB
Traffic volume measurements

RLC buffer occupancy
Quality measurements
transport block error rate
6-29
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Procedures
6-30
Pub-Date
Radio Resource Management Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 7
7-1
Version 1 Rev 0
7-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe basic Radio Resource and Mobility Management functions. Describe handover control Describe compressed mode Describe macro diversity Describe SRNS relocation Describe power control Describe DCCC Describe load control
7-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Resource Management Overview

Introduction to Radio Resource Management
Radio Resource Management (RRM) consists of a series of procedures designed to achieve the most efcient utilisation of the air interface (Uu). The purpose of RRM is to: Guarantee Quality of Service Maintain planned coverage Offer high capacity To achieve this end, the objectives of RRM can be summarises as: Power Control - Minimise User/Network transmission power, whilst maintaining requested Quality of Service, to reduce interference on the system, thus increasing capacity and coverage. Admission and Load Control - To maintain the load of the entire system at a steady, manageable level Handover Control - maintain QoS, even when the UE moves to other cells or systems
7-4
Version 1 Rev 0
of Se rv ice (Q oS )
g ra ve Co e
Power Control
Qu ali ty
Handover Control
Admission and Load Control Capacity
7-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Handover Control
Handover Control
The handover function in UTRAN manages the mobility of the UE and the radio interface. It is based on radio measurements and cell topology and it is used to maintain the Quality of Service requested by the Core Network regardless of UE mobility. The RNC supports the following handover types: Intra-frequency soft, softer and hard handover, Inter-frequency hard handover Inter-RAT hard handover in both CS and PS domains. In addition, the procedures may be intra-RNC or inter-RNC and may require the performance of SRNS relocation. The decision on what handover type needs to be performed depends on a number of conditions and parameters that are presented in the following sections. In general, soft/softer handover has higher priority than intra-frequency hard handover and inter-frequency and inter-RAT HHO only occurs in border cells that have inter-frequency or inter-RAT neighbouring cells set accordingly. Three different handover causes are supported in the RNC: Handover due to poor radio link quality Handover due to radio interface overload Operator forced handover.
7-6
Handover Control
Version 1 Rev 0
Handover Control
7-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Measurement Control
Measurement Control
The handover algorithm also controls the measurement reporting performed by the UE in CELL_DCH state for handover purposes. The MEASUREMENT CONTROL message is used to set up and modify the way measurements are taken by the UE. The contents and frequency of the MEASUREMENT REPORT messages from the UE depends on the measurement type, the UE state and its measurement capability. The list of cells that the UE must monitor is divided into three different categories. Active Set: Group of UTRAN cells which the UE has a radio link established to, i.e. it is in soft/softer handover with. The Active Set contains only UTRAN cells that operate on the same UMTS frequency. In USR3.0 the maximum number of cells in the Active Set is xed to 3. This is a hard coded parameter in USR3.0. Monitored Set: Cells that are not currently in the Active Set, but the UE is monitoring for handover according to a neighbour list assigned by UTRAN (stored as CELL_INFO_LIST in the UE). The Monitored Set may contain UTRAN and GSM cells and the UTRAN cells may be under different UMTS frequencies. The maximum number of cells to measure in USR3.0 is: 32 intra-frequency, 32 inter-frequency and 32 inter-RAT cells. Detected Set: Cells that are not included in the neighbour list to monitor but are detected by the UE on its own. The UE only reports detected UTRAN cells that are under the same frequency as the active cells and only when in CELL_DCH state. The purpose is to provide information to the network operator for manually updating the neighbour cell list of cells.
Monitored List Determination

The best cell in the active set to control the monitored list. The strategy is as follows: If there is only one cell in the active set, use its neighbour list to build the monitored set list. If there is more than one cell in the active set use the neighbour list of the best cell to build the monitored set list. If a 1D event is received, indicating a new best cell, use the neighbour list of the new best cell to build the monitored set list. If the best cell is removed, use the neighbour list of the best cell amongst those left in the active set at that time in order to build the new monitored list.
7-8
Measurement Control
Version 1 Rev 0
Measurement Control
Monitored Set Monitored Set Monitored Set Active Set Monitored Set Monitored Set Detected Set Monitored Set Active Set Monitored Set Detected Set Active Set Monitored Set Detected Set Monitored Set Detected Set
7-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Intra-frequency Handover
Algorithm Description
The gure opposite shows the scenario where a mobile moves from one cell to another. It can be seen that in CDMA there is blur zone where the mobile can be connected to both cells, maximizing the quality of service. This is often referred to as Soft or Softer Handover. The handover control function for soft handover is responsible of the following tasks. Determining whether a soft handover is necessary. Receiving intra-frequency measurement reports from UEs (intra-frequency measurement results and information about intra-frequency events that triggered the measurement report), which may refer to Node Bs under the same or different RNCs. Deciding whether to add any of these reported cells to the active set or drop any of the cells from the active set (adding or deleting the radio links) When radio links are added, splitting/combining or splitting/selection functions in the appropriate network elements are also instructed to begin diversity processing with the new radio link. Intra-frequency Event Driven Reporting Event Event 1a Event 1b Event 1c Event 1d Event 1f Event Description A Primary CPICH enters the Reporting Range. A Primary CPICH leaves the Reporting Range. A Non-active Primary CPICH becomes better than an active Primary CPICH Change of best cell Absolute value of a Primary CPICH becomes worse than a threshold (Used to trigger interFreq Ho)
7-10
Version 1 Rev 0
The UE has a radio connection with cell A
When the UE established an additional radio connection with Cell B this is called a softer handover When the UE establishes an additional radio connection with Cell C this is a soft handover even when Cell C is located under a different RNC Cell A Cell C
Cell B
7-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Intra-frequency Hard Handover
Although soft/softer handover is the preferred procedure to handle RRC connection mobility, there are times when only a hard handover can be performed. The hard handover procedure removes all the RL(s) in the active set and establishes new RL(s). An intra-frequency hard handover is only performed when one of the following conditions apply. There is no Iur interface between the source and target RNC. The UE is using a PS RAB at a bit rate above a preset threshold.
7-12
Version 1 Rev 0
Cell A
Cell B
A hard handover occurs when the UE has to release the old radio links before it establishes a radio connection with a new cell Occurs on 1D (change of best cell) event when: 1. 2. There is no Iur interface between the source and target RNC The UE is using a BE PS RAB at a bit rate above a preset threshold
7-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Inter-frequency Hard Handover

Overview of Inter-Frequency Hard Handover
Based on handover triggering causes, inter-frequency handover includes the following types: Inter-frequency handover based on coverage The UE might leave the coverage of the current frequency during the movement of the UE. In this case, the RNC needs to trigger an inter-frequency handover based on coverage to avoid call drop. Inter-frequency handover based on load To balance the loads between inter-frequency concentric cells, the RNC would choose some UEs to do inter-frequency handover according to user and service priorities. Inter-frequency handover based on speed When the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) is used, cells are divided into different layers according to their coverage. Marco cell corresponds to large coverage and low priority and Micro cell corresponds to small coverage and high priority. Inter-frequency handover can be triggered by UE speed estimation algorithm of the HCS. The UE with high speed is handed over to a cell with larger coverage to reduce the frequency of handover, while the UE with low speed is handed over to a cell with smaller coverage and larger capacity to improve the system capacity. Handover Triggering Conditions The inter-frequency handover triggering conditions are as follows: Inter-frequency Handover Type Handover based on coverage Triggering Conditions UE Reporting of event 2D or periodically measurement reporting. When receiving event 1F, the RNC will decide to try a blind handover to inter-frequency cell if a blind handover neighboring cell is available. Note: Blind handovers only used in specic strategic areas. Load could be shared by inter-frequency cells. Estimation decision from Load Reshufing (LDR) Algorithm Module. Estimation decision of the UE speed in HCS
Handover based on load
Handover based on estimation decision of the UE speed in HCS
7-14
Version 1 Rev 0
f1
f2
Handover based on coverage

Handover based on load Handover based on speed
7-15
Version 1 Rev 0

Handover Procedure
Inter-frequency handover procedure includes the following three phases: 1. 2. 3. Handover measurement Handover decision Handover execution Inter-Frequency Handover Based on Coverage The UE reports event 2D. Then the RNC enables the compressed mode and starts inter-frequency measurement. Periodical reporting mode or event reporting mode can be used. When receiving event 1F, the RNC will decide to try a blind handover. Inter-Frequency Handover Based on Load Inter-Frequency Handover Based on Speed The HCS speed estimation algorithm initiates a handover procedure. If the handover is from a micro cell to another macro cell, and blind handover condition is fullled, the RNC performs blind handover to the target cell. Otherwise, the RNC enables the compressed mode and starts inter-frequency measurement. The RNC performs load reshufing algorithm and then performs blind handover decision. The UE reports event 2C. Then the RNC performs handover decision.
Phase
Handover measurement
Handover decision
After UE reports event 2B, the RNC performs handover decision. Or the UE periodically reports the inter-frequency measurement report, and the RNC decides the handover after evaluation. The RNC initiates a handover procedure.
Handover execution
The RNC initiates a blind handover to the target cell.
The RNC initiates a handover procedure.
7-16
Version 1 Rev 0
7-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Inter-RAT Hard Handover

The purpose of the inter-RAT handover procedure is to, under the control of the network, transfer a UE connection from one radio access technology (e.g. UTRAN) to another (e.g. GSM). The RNC supports both, handover from GSM to UTRAN and, handover from UTRAN to GSM on CS and PS domains (Cell Change Order), but not simultaneously. This section covers only handover from UTRAN to GSM.
Algorithm Overview
In order to offer worldwide coverage, the handover from UTRAN to GSM is a key feature, especially during early deployment stages where islands of UMTS coverage are envisaged. The procedure is initiated from UTRAN with a RRC message HANDOVER FROM UTRAN COMMAND. Then the UE must establish the connection to GSM and release all UMTS radio resources. When the UE works in CELL_DCH state, the UMTS GSM handover is the procedure during which the WCDMA RAN initiates handover (for CS services) or cell reselection (for PS services) to the GSM. Based on triggering causes, UMTS to GSM handover includes: UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover. The coverage of UMTS s usually discontinuous at the very beginning of the network rollout. On the border, if the signal quality of UMTS rather than GSM is poor and if all services of the UE are supported by GSM, UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover is triggered. UMTS to GSM load-based handover. If the load of UMTS rather than GSM is heavy and all services of the UE are supported by GSM, UMTS GSM load-based handover is triggered. UMTS GSM service-based handover. Based on layered services, trafc of different classes is handed over to different systems. For example, when an Adaptive Multi Rate (AMR) speech service is requested, this call could be handed over to GSM. UMTS to GSM Handover Triggering Conditions UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover. The CPICH Ec/N0 or CPICH RSCP of the UMTS cell to which the UE connects is lower than the corresponding threshold. In addition, there is a GSM cell whose GSM carrier RSSI is higher than the preset threshold. UMTS to GSM load-based handover. The load of the UMTS cell to which the UE connects is higher than the threshold. UMTS to GSM service-based handover. When a service is established, the Core Network (CN) requests a handover of the service to GSM.
7-18
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS
GSM
UMTS to GSM coverage-based handover UMTS to GSM Load-based handover UMTS to GSM Service-based handover
7-19
Version 1 Rev 0

Preconditions for UMTS to GSM Handover
Overview of Preconditions Before the UMTS GSM handover is performed, the following preconditions must be taken into account: Service handover indicators. The indicators are congured by CN and indicate CN policy for service handover to GSM. GSM cell capability. The capability, Inter-RAT cell type, of each GSM cell must be congured at the RNC. The parameter indicates whether the cell supports GSM, GPRS, or EDGE. It also indicates that the cell may not be supported by 2G. Service capability. The required 2G Capability, of each service must be congured at the RNC. The parameter indicates whether the service is supported by GSM, GPRS, or EDGE. It also indicates that the service may not be supported by 2G. UE capability. The RNC obtains the capability information of a UE according to the UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION reported by the UE. The information indicates whether the UE supports GSM, GPRS, or EDGE. It also indicates that the UE may not be supported by 2G. Service Handover Indicators Among the four preconditions, service handover indicators are taken into account rstly. An indicator is contained in the RAB assignment signalling that is delivered by the CN. Based on the indicators, the other three preconditions, and the handover types (UMTS to GSM handover based on coverage/load/service), the RNC decides whether to perform inter-RAT handover. There are the following service handover indicators: Handover to GSM should be performed Handover to GSM should not be performed Handover to GSM shall not be performed By default, the RNC does the following: For a UE with a single signalling RAB, the handover to GSM is not allowed. For the UE accessing combined services (with CS services), the RNC sets the service handover indicator of the UE to that of the CS service because the CS service has the highest Quality of Service (QoS) priority. For the UE accessing combined services (with only PS services), the RNC sets the service handover indicator of the UE to that of the PS service who has the highest QoS priority.
7-20
Version 1 Rev 0
7-21
Version 1 Rev 0

GSM Cell Capability With the Inter-RAT cell type capability, the RNC decides whether to start inter-RAT measurement. Service Capability For combined services, the RNC selects the Required 2G Capability parameter required by the RAB that has the highest priority. UE Capability With the UE CAPABILITY INFORMATION, the RNC decides whether to start inter-RAT measurement.
7-22
Version 1 Rev 0

Service Capabilities configured at the RNC
Iub
Iu
CN
RNC
UE Capabilities
RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST Handover indicators (last slide)
GSM Cell capabilities i.e. supports GPRS/EDGE?
7-23
Version 1 Rev 0

Handover Procedures for UMTS to GSM
The UMTS to GSM handover includes the following four phases: Handover Handover Handover Handover triggering measurement decision execution
Non coverage-based handover has two cases: UMTS to GSM handover based on load UMTS to GSM handover based on service When the UE works in CELL_FACH or CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state, the inter-RAT handover is initiated by the UE. In this situation, the handover is the procedure for inter-RAT cell reselection. During cell reselection, the UE evaluates the quality of the existing cell on which it is camped, starts inter-RAT measurement, selects a best cell in another system according to the cell reselection criteria, and then initiates the access to GSM/GPRS/EDGE.
7-24
Version 1 Rev 0
7-25
Version 1 Rev 0

UMTS to GSM Handover Measurement
UMTS GSM handover based on coverage After receiving a 2D event report message, the RNC performs the following: 1) Decides an inter-RAT handover measurement based on coverage. 2) Starts periodic controlling or 3A event triggered measurement reporting. The Inter-RAT report mode can be set to Periodic reporting or Event trigger. 3) Decides to initiate an inter-RAT handover based on measurement reports from the UE. If a 2F event is received, the RNC will stop inter-RAT handover measurement. UMTS GSM handover based on load After receiving a 3C event report message, the RNC decides to initiate an inter-RAT handover.
7-26
Version 1 Rev 0
7-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Hierarchical Cell Structure

In a 3G network, the so-called hot spots in radio communications may appear with an increase of subscribers and trafc. This requires more cells to increase the network capacity. More cells and smaller cell radius indicate that more frequent handovers of UEs take place. For a UE in fast speed, frequent handovers reduce call quality, increase uplink interference, and increase signaling load. In this situation, Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) is required to divide cells into different hierarchies. The RNC supports the HCS with eight hierarches, typically there are three Macro Cells, Micro Cells and Pico Cells. The features of different cells are as follows: Macro Cell: Large coverage Continuous coverage networking Low requirement on capacity Fast-moving environment
Micro cell: Densely populated areas High requirement on capacity Slow-moving environment Pico cell: Indoor coverage Outdoor dead-area coverage. Where, the pico cell has the highest priority and the macro cell has the lowest priority.
7-28
Version 1 Rev 0

Large coverage Macro Cell Low capacity Fast moving
Densely populated areas Micro Cell High capacity S low moving
Indoor Coverage Pico Cell Outdoor dead area coverage
7-29
Version 1 Rev 0

HCS Handover Overview
The HCS handover is divided into the following two phases. Speed Estimation The speed estimation on each hierarchy of an HCS cell falls into one of the following types: Fast speed Normal speed Slow speed According to the number of changes of the best cell within a given time unit, the speed estimation algorithm estimates the moving speed of the UEs. See details as follows: If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is above the fast-speed threshold, this UE is calculated to be in fast speed; If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is below the slow-speed threshold, this UE is calculated to be in slow speed; If the number of changes of best cell for a UE is between fast-speed threshold and slow-speed threshold, this UE is calculated to be in normal speed. HCS Handover Based on Speed Estimation After the moving speed of the UE is estimated, inter-hierarchy handover algorithm initiates the corresponding handover based on this speed decision. According to the results of speed estimation: The UE in fast speed is handed over to the cell of lower priority; The UE in slow speed is handed over to the cell of higher priority; The UE in normal speed is not required to be handed over to any cell.
7-30
Version 1 Rev 0
T he change of best cell (E vent 1D) is monitored for a time period and if there has been no change of best cell with that time then handover to micro cell and vice versa.
7-31
Version 1 Rev 0
Compressed Mode Control

Algorithm Overview
Compressed mode is used to allow UEs to perform inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements. The prerequisite is that the UE supports the functionality. The RNC supports compressed mode in uplink, downlink and combined uplink + downlink, according to UE capabilities. Compressed Mode (CM) operation is used when a dual mode UE (UMTS + GSM and/or DCS1800) or a dual band UE (UMTS + UMTS) nears the limit of coverage in a UMTS system that borders a GSM, DCS1800, or another UMTS system on a different frequency. The CM algorithm creates a hole" or gap in the transmitted DL and/or UL radio frame, allowing the UE receiver to change frequency and monitor the adjacent GSM or DCS1800 system (for inter-RAT handover) or UMTS system (for inter-frequency handover). Even though there is a gap in the transmitted frame no data is lost. All of the data that would normally have been sent in the frame is compressed to t into fewer slots. The process for compressing the data to t into fewer than the normal 15 slots is called time compression". Several time compression methods are available: spreading factor reduction by 2 (SF/2), puncturing (rate matching), and higher layer scheduling. Puncturing refers to applying rate matching techniques for creating a transmission gap in a radio frame. SF/2 consists of reducing the spreading factor by 2 during one compressed radio frame to enable transmission of the information bits in half of the radio frame (7.5 slots). And in the higher layer scheduling method, only a subset of the allowed TFCs are used in the compressed mode frame. The UE can be congured with a single compressed mode pattern sequence for each measurement purpose. These settings are currently established using Motorola Internal MML commands and, include the following patterns: For inter-frequency measurements FDD measurement
For inter-RAT measurements GSM carrier RSSI measurement Initial BSIC identication BSIC conrmation
Depending on whether the UE needs to perform FDD measurements only, GSM measurements only or both, the RNC activates the appropriate gap patterns. For FDD operation only, a single FDD measurement gap is activated. For GSM operation only, three simultaneous gap patterns are activated (RSSI, BSIC_ID, and BSIC_conrmation). For combined FDD and GSM operation, three simultaneous gap patterns are used (RSSI, BSIC_ID and FDD measurement). The BSIC re-conrmation gap pattern is not used when the UE needs to measure simultaneously inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbours in order to decrease the impact of compressed mode operation on quality and performance. The compressed mode procedure is initiated by the CRNC by sending a RADIO LINK RECONFIGURATION PREPARE message to the Node B with a modication of the Transmission Gap Pattern Sequence Code Information radio link parameters. On the other hand, deactivation is achieved via the COMPRESS MODE COMMAND.
7-32
Version 1 Rev 0
FDD Measurement Gap activated UMTS Interfreq Cell
UMTS Source Cell
Combined RSSI BSIC_ID FDD Measurement
RSSI BSIC_ID BSIC_re-confirm

10ms
GSM Cell
Transmission gap available for inter-frequency measurements
7-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Macro Diversity
Macro Diversity
Macrodiversity provides an improved error correction capability through the use of combining/splitting at the RNC and Node B. Communications will be sent via the Iur interface from the RNC in the D-RNS to the RNC in the S-RNS and on to the Iu to the core network. This function controls the duplication/ replication of information streams to receive/ transmit the same information through multiple physical channels from/ towards a single mobile terminal. This function also controls the combining of information streams generated by a single source (diversity link), but conveyed via several parallel physical channels (diversity sub-links). Macrodiversity control should interact with channel coding control in order to reduce the BER when combining the different information streams. In some cases, depending on physical network conguration, there may be several entities that combine the different information streams, i.e. there may be combining/splitting at the S-RNC, D-RNC or Node B level. This function is located in the UTRAN.
7-34
Macro Diversity
Version 1 Rev 0
Macro Diversity
UTRAN
lu D-RNS RNC
Iur
D-RNS RNC
Iur
S-RNS RNC
7-35
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNS Relocation
SRNS Relocation
SRNS Relocation Overview
The Serving RNS (SRNS) manages the connection between the UE and the UTRAN and can be relocated. The SRNS relocation is of three types: Static relocation (UE not involved) Relocation due to hard handover (UE involved) Relocation due to cell or URA update (UE involved) If no Iur interface exists, the relocation can be triggered only by the hard handover or cell/URA update. Purposes The main benets of SRNS relocation are as follows: When the Iur interface is involved Relocating the SRNC to the DRNC can avoid data forwarding on the Iur interface. Thus it can reduce the bandwidth occupied by the Iur interface and the transmission delay of user plane. When the SRNC and the DRNC become independent of each other, the data of cell radio resource management algorithms cannot be transmitted over the Iur interface. Thus the algorithms cannot be optimized. This problem can be solved by initiating the static relocation to relocate the SRNC to the CRNC. When the Iur interface is not involved SRNS relocation can ensure communications not interrupted when the UE moves to the coverage area of another RNC.
Static Relocation
When the Iur interface exists, the UE may use the radio resources of one RNC and connects to the CN through another RNC. After SRNS relocation, the Iur resources for the UE are released. The target RNC not only provides radio resources for the UE but also connects the UE to the CN. The purposes of the static SRNS relocation are as follows: To reduce the bandwidth occupied by the Iur interface To reduce the transmission delay of user plane To get the parameters of cell-level algorithms to optimize the performance
7-36
SRNS Relocation
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNS Relocation
7-37
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNS Relocation
SRNS Relocation
Relocation Due to Hard Handover
The relocation happens when the UE is in CELL_DCH state and moves from one RNC to another RNC with no Iur interface connecting the two RNCs.
Relocation Due to Cell or URA Update

The relocation happens when the UE reselects a cell that belongs to another RNC.
7-38
SRNS Relocation
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNS Relocation
7-39
Version 1 Rev 0
Power Control
Power Control
The power control mechanism is an essential part of cellular systems using the spread spectrum technique of medium access. There are important functions of power control. First, is to support high system capacity, which is basically achieved in CDMA-based systems by reducing the level of adverse interference. The major contribution to system interference level, in uplink and downlink direction respectively, comes from simultaneous RF signal transmissions by many UEs and adjacent Node Bs on the same frequency. The second function of power control procedures is to preserve required radio communication quality regardless of dynamic changes in the propagation environment resulting from the mobility of UEs, the changing number of active users in the system, and the ever propagation characteristics of and radio channel. The quality may be dened here as low delay and error-free transmission of digitised user data through radio channel. One of the ways to obtain, at the same time, large system capacity and high service quality is to keep UE and Node B RF signals transmission power at the lowest possible level and adjust it dynamically upon variations of propagation conditions. The more accurate are UE and Node B power control mechanisms to follow real dynamic structure of RF environment, the higher system capacity and service quality performance may be achieved. The goal of power control in WCDMA system is thus dynamic interference control, rather than wide coverage area support. The UE and UTRAN power control procedures use different sources of feedback information on temporal propagation channel condition in the process of adjusting their transmitted signals power levels.
7-40
Power Control
Version 1 Rev 0
Power Control
Power Control Concept To Support High System Capacity by reducing the level of Interference. To Preserve The Required Radio Communication Quality Resulting From: Changes to the Propagating Environment due to UE Mobility Changes to the number of active users Changes to the Propagating Characteristics of the Radio Channel
Three Types of Power Control Open Loop Power Control Inner Closed Loop Power Control Outer Closed Loop Power Control
7-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Open Loop Power Control

In UTRAN, open loop power control is applied only immediately prior to initiating a transmission on the PRACH. The UE determines an estimation of the downlink pathloss between the base station and the UE by measuring the UTRA carrier received signal strength at the mobile. Through the medium of the System Information messages on the P-CCPCH, the UE will also have access to certain cell parameters, such as Cell ERP, Cell size, receiver sensitivity, etc. Form this information the UE will calculate the required mean output power level required to achieve the access requirements of the cell it wishes to connect to. The UE will now send its rst RACH Pre-amble at this calculated value. If no positive or negative acquisition indicator is detected, the UE will increase its power by the required power-ramping factor, (cell dened parameter), and send a second RACH Pre-amble. This process will be repeated until an acknowledgement is received, or the max retries value is exceeded. If a positive Ack is received, the UE will again adjust its output power, according to an offset value notied by the cell, and transmit the RACH message part. On receipt of the RACH Message part, the UTRAN can accurately calculate the uplink path loss and initiate the use of closed loop power control.
7-42
Version 1 Rev 0

UE monitors Common Pilot and Broadcast information, and calculates DL path Loss
Using DL path loss as "perceived" UL path loss, UE calculates TX power O/P required access network
Only used prior to initial transmission on PRACH
7-43
Version 1 Rev 0
Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

The objective of Closed loop power control is to maintain the the received signal strength, at the base station, for all UEs at the same average level. As all UEs in a cell transmit on the same frequency, a single overpowered mobile could block a whole cell to other users. The uplink inner-loop power control adjusts the UE transmit power in order to keep the received uplink Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIR) at a given SIR Target (SIRtarget). The serving cells (cells in the active set) should Estimate Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIRest) of the uplink, using the received pilot symbols in each uplink uplink timeslot. The serving cells should then generate TPC commands and transmit the commands once per slot, using the TPC symbols in each time slot, according to the following rule: if SIRest > SIRtarget then the TPC command to transmit is "0", while if SIRest < SIRtarget then the TPC command to transmit is "1". The UE uses this information to derive TPC_cmd. After deriving of the TPC_cmd, the UE shall adjust the transmit power of the uplink with a step (in dB) which is given by: D = DTPC TPC_cmd. The step size TPC is a layer 1 parameter which is derived from the UE-specic higher-layer parameter "TPC-StepSize" which is under the control of the UTRAN. If "TPC-StepSize" has the value "dB1", then the layer 1 parameter TPC shall take the value 1dB and if "TPC-StepSize" has the value "dB2", then TPC shall take the value 2dB. A similar process is used in the downlink, to control the relative power weighting to be applied to each downlink dedicated channel.
7-44
Version 1 Rev 0

UE monitors DL Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) And compares against Target SIR level
UE sends Transmit Power Control (TPC) information to Node B, adjusting Node B transmit power output in an attempt to acheive target SIR
Inner Loop Power Control command rate is 1500Hz
7-45
Version 1 Rev 0
Directed Retry
Directed Retry
The Directed Retry Decision (DRD) algorithm includes three components: RRC Retry Decision algorithm Redirection algorithm RAB Retry Decision algorithm Within the UTRAN, a UE can take on one of two connection modes: namely, RRC connected mode and idle mode. When a UE wants to establish an RRC connection it must rst send an RRC CONNECTION SETUP REQUEST message to the UTRAN (RNC). At this stage of the call set-up process, the objective of the RRC CONNECTION REQUEST is to establish an SRB on a DCH. To invoke the DRD algorithm, the UE should include a RACH measurement report (containing the CPICH EcNo measurements of several neighbour/candidate cells). This list of candidate cells is then ranked in descending order, based on the EcNo measurements. If the UE cannot establish an RRC connection with its preferred cell, the candidate list is then sequentially examined in a top-down manner until a suitable cell is obtained. If none of the cells in the list satisfy the criteria of the RRC Retry Decision algorithm, the UE fails in its attempt to establish an RRC connection and the Redirection algorithm is invoked. If on the other hand the UE is successful in its attempt to establish the requested RRC connection, the CN then initiates the RAB assignment procedure. If the assignment procedure is not successful, the RAB Retry Decision algorithm is invoked. The DRD algorithm can be triggered by both UE originating and terminating calls. The Figure opposite illustrates the RRC and RAB establishment procedures incorporating the three components of the DRD algorithm.
7-46
Directed Retry
Version 1 Rev 0
Directed Retry
UE RNC CN RRC CONNECTION REQUEST (Containing RACH Measurement Report) RRC CONNECTION SETUP (Containing (New) Cell Information) RRC Retry Decision Algorithm
RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE
Redirection Algorithm
RRC DIRECT TRANSFER
RANAP DIRECT TRANSFER
RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST RAB Retry Decision Algorithm
RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT RESPONSE
7-47
Version 1 Rev 0
Dynamic Channel Conguration Control (DCCC)

Dynamic Channel Conguration Control (DCCC) includes the following two parts.
Rate Re-allocation
Upsize and downsize the data rate of the Best Effort (BE) services, (i.e. interactive and background) in the CELL_DCH RRC state. Dynamically adjust the uplink and downlink bandwidth of the Dedicated Channel (DCH) according to the trafc volume which reects the state of data transmission. Dynamically adjust the bandwidth of the Dedicated Channel (DCH) according to the quality of radio link due to coverage. Dynamically adjust the bandwidth of the Dedicated Channel (DCH) according to the load congestion. This part of the algorithm works in conjunction with the load control mechanism.
UE State Transition
Switch the UE state to the CELL_FACH and CELL_PCH/URA_PCH state when the UE inactivity is detected, and back to CELL_DCH state when the UE activity is detected because there is data to be transmitted.
Measurements
The trafc volume measurement executed by UEs are used in the uplink bandwidth re-allocation process and the UE state transition to improve the resource utilization. The downlink Transmitted Code Power (TCP) measurements executed by NodeBs are used in the downlink rate re-allocation to keep the link stability. The Trafc Volume Measurements (TVMs) executed by RNC are used in the downlink bandwidth re-allocation process and the UE state transition to improve the resource utilization.
Purpose
The DCCC is to improve the performance of the network resource utilization and to keep the link stability. This is done in three keys ways as listed below: In the downlink and uplink, the DCCC re-allocates the bandwidth based on the trafc volume measurement. In this way, the DCCC algorithm makes efcient use of the resource such as the OVSF code resources, the Channel Element (CE) resources of the NodeB and the transmission resources on the Iub and the Iur interfaces. In the downlink, the DCCC downgrades the data rate if the link quality deteriorates, in order to prevent the call drop. The state of the UE can transit from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH, or from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH/URA_PCH. In the state of CELL_FACH or the CELL_PCH/URA_PCH, the resources of the network and the UE battery can be saved.
7-48
Version 1 Rev 0
Rate Re-allocation Control of BE services Adjust DCH rate based on data throughput UL TVM taken in UE Adjust DCH rate based on link quality Adjust DCH rate based on congestion
RNC
NodeB
UE State Transition DL TVM taken in the RNC DL TCP Taken in NodeB Switch the UE state based on activity
7-49
Version 1 Rev 0
Load Control
Load Control
The WCDMA system is a self interference system. With the load of the system increasing, the interference rises. If the interference is high enough, it affects the coverage and QoS of established services. Therefore, capacity, coverage and Quality of Service (QoS) of the WCDMA system are mutually affected. The purpose of load control is to maximize system capacity while ensuring the coverage and QoS. In different phases of UE access as shown in the diagram below, different load control algorithms are used as follows: Before UE access: Potential User Control (PUC) and Cell Breathing During UE access: Call Admission Control (CAC) and Intelligent Access Control (IAC) After UE access: Load Reshufing (LDR), and Overload Control (OLC). In addition, functional load control algorithms vary according to the load levels of the cell, as shown in the slide opposite.
7-50
Load Control
Version 1 Rev 0
Load Control
PUC CELL BREATHING
CAC IAC
LDR OLC
1. Before UE access
2. During UE access
3. After UE access
time
7-51
Version 1 Rev 0
Overview of Load Control

The load control algorithm is built into the RNC. The input of load control comes from the measurement information taken from the NodeB. Load control has the following sub-features: PUC The function of PUC is to balance trafc load among inter-frequency cells. By modifying cell selection and reselection parameters and broadcasting them through system information, PUC leads UEs to cells with light load. The UEs may be in idle mode, CELL_FACH state, CELL_PCH state, or URA_PCH state. Cell Breathing This feature is also know as intra-frequency load balancing. The technique alters the power level of the CPICH to either capture more trafc is the loading is light or push trafc away if the loading is high. CAC The function of CAC is to decide on resource requests from UEs, such as access, reconguration, and handover requests, according to the resource status of the cell. IAC The purpose of IAC is to increase the access success rate with the current QoS assured through rate negotiation, queuing, pre-emption, and DRD. LDR The function of LDR is to reduce the load of a cell when the available resource of the cell reaches the specied alarm threshold. The purpose of LDR is to increase the access success rate in the following ways: Inter-frequency load handover BE service rate reduction AMR voice service rate reduction Uncontrolled realtime trafc QoS renegotiation CS inter-system load handover PS inter-system load handover
OLC The function of OLC is to reduce the cell load rapidly by restricting the Transport Format (TF) of the BE service or releasing UEs when the cell is overloaded. The purpose of OLC is to ensure the stability of the system and the QoS of most UEs.
7-52
Version 1 Rev 0

NodeB transmit power (noise)
Cell Load (number of subscribers)
OLC starts: to reduce the TFs of BE subscribers, and release some UEs forcibly CAC: to prevent new calls into cells with heavy load DRD starts: to enable rejected UEs to retry neighbouring cells or GSM cells Load control is unneeded PUC starts: to enable UEs in idle mode to camp on cells with light load Cell breathing starts: to switch loads of hot spot cells to othe r cells LDR starts: to check and release initial congestion in cells
7-53
Version 1 Rev 0
7-54
Pub-Date
HSDPA Overview
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 8
HSDPA Overview
8-1
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Overview
8-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the Student will be able to: Describe the important changes and characteristics of HSDPA State the new channels of HSDPA and how they operate in principle Describe the extended UTRAN protocol stack with HSDPA State the advantages and disadvantages of HSDPA and future enhancements
8-3
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA

HSDPA considers the trend that the volume of IP-based trafc has already exceeded that for circuit-switched trafc in most xed networks. The same change can be anticipated in mobile networks because of new IP-based mobile services becoming available and are used by increasing number of people in their daily communication. Current estimates show that in advanced mobile communication markets, packet-switched trafc will overtake circuit-switched trafc in the near future. Delivery of digital content over mobile networks will generate additional trafc and revenue.
Feature Study
The HSDPA feature in 3GPP Release 5 is the result of a study carried out in the Release 4 time frame. This study considered a number of techniques in order to provide instantaneous high speed data in the downlink. Some of the considerations and goals taken into account in the evaluation of the different techniques were: To focus on the streaming, interactive and background services: services which require a constant and/high throughput or low error rate. To prioritise urban environments and then indoor deployments (but not limited to these environments and supporting full mobility). To enable compatibility with advanced antenna and receiver techniques: transmit and receive diversity methods are used and might be enhanced To take into account User Equipment processing time and memory requirements: UEs limitations are taken into account by the network To minimize changes on existing techniques and architecture: modest changes to NodeB hardware and UTRAN software
Compatibility with Release 99

HSDPA is designed to co-exist on the same carrier as the current Release 99 WCDMA services, enabling a smooth and cost-efcient introduction of HSDPA into existing WCDMA networks.
Demand for Packet Switched Trafc

The increasing demand for capacity in order to provide high data rate multimedia services in wireless environments necessitates enhanced radio transmission techniques and network protocol functionality. Such techniques have to be added to already existing mobile cellular networks. For 3rd generation UMTS networks based on WCDMA, the HSDPA is being introduced to meet this demand and improve spectral efciency by higher order modulation using 16-QAM. Note: HSDPA achieves gross data rates in downlink up to 14 Mbit/s under ideal conditions. The reverse link (uplink) may remain on 64 kbit/s unless the operator decides to use High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA).
8-4
Version 1 Rev 0
8-5
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Targets
HSDPA Targets
Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background Services
HSDPA is a feature based on a downlink shared channel that allows user net-data rates of up to 10 Mbit/s. It is designed to support services that require instantaneous high rates in the downlink and lower rates on the uplink. This feature also decreases the level of retransmissions (at the radio link and hence higher layers), in turn allowing the reduction of delivery time. Examples of end-user services targeted by HSDPA are internet browsing and video on demand.
Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory Requirements

HSDPA takes UE limitations like available physical memory for transmission and especially for retransmission into account. Also the physical channel processing capability is considered. (Examples: Minimum inter-TTI interval, transport channel bits per TTI)
Higher Spectrum Efciency

With 16-QAM applied in downlink, throughput rates can be doubled compared to QPSK which is used for Rel. 99 and Rel. 4 physical channels. The amount of bits/Hz is increased with 16-QAM as one modulation symbol corresponds to 4 chips whereas in QPSK one modulation symbol represents 2 chips. Even when HSDPA is using QPSK modulation the spectrum efciency increases as HSDPA exploits good C/I conditions. This is achieved by reducing the protection (increasing the code rate) and thus having more capacity for the application data.
Small Changes to existing Techniques and Architectures

HSDPA minimizes the necessary upgrades and changes in UTRAN and UE. Nevertheless some protocol additions are necessary in NodeB and UE as well some enhancements of existing procedures and protocols.
Efcient Resource Sharing in Downlink among Users

HSDPA introduces a new transport channel type that makes efcient use of valuable radio frequency resources. Beside this, it takes into account the bursty nature of packet switched data by sharing the channelization codes, transmission power and infrastructure hardware among users.
8-6
HSDPA Targets
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Targets
8-7
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Characteristics
High Speed Downlink Packet Access comes with certain characteristics which distinguishes it clearly from Rel. 99 UTRAN.
Modulation Types
QPSK is already known from Rel. 99 UTRAN. Besides QPSK, HSDPA incorporates the 16-QAM modulation to increase the peak data rates for users served under favorable radio conditions. Support for QPSK is mandatory, though the support for 16-QAM is optional for the network and UE. 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) was newly introduced in Rel .5 with HSDPA. It is a so called higher order modulation which basically doubles the data rate in good radio conditions. Thus it increases the spectrum efciency of WCDMA.
Higher Throughput Rates

HDSPA supports peak throughput rates far beyond 2 Mbit/s when radio conditions are suitable and therefore it satises the demand for instantaneous high throughput of packet switched services e.g. streaming or interactive trafc class. Theoretically, under optimum condition (Code Rate of 1:1) the following maximum throughput can be achieved: (with 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) and 15 channelization codes simultaneously used) 960kbit/s x 15 = 14.4 Mbit/s
AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding)

AMC is a key feature of HSDPA allowing adjustment of modulation between QPSK and 16-QAM according to radio conditions and retransmission ratio. In addition a variable code rate is used to exibly adapt the data rate to the physical channel capacity depending on the UEs downlink C/I..
Hybrid ARQ
HARQ functionality combines retransmission with the original transmissions. There a two different ways for HARQ to operate. Either identical retransmission of the data block are sent or retransmission are not identical and differ in data and parity bits compared to the original transmission. The rst method is known as chase combining and, the latter as incremental redundancy . HARQ operates on an N-channel Stop and Wait principle.
Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeB

All Rel. 99 transport channels are terminated at the RNC, except BCH; hence the retransmission procedure for packet data is located in the serving RNC. In order to maximize throughput and reduce delays when retransmitting, additional intelligence is put into the NodeB. In this way, retransmission is controlled by the NodeB, leading to faster retransmission and therefore shorter delay for packet data services. A scheduler in NodeB evaluates for different users what the radio channel conditions are, how much data is pending for each user, how much time has passed since a particular user was last served, for which user retransmission are pending etc. From this input data the scheduler in NodeB may derive a decision how to assign resources to certain users.
8-8
Version 1 Rev 0
8-9
Version 1 Rev 0
QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation

The gure illustrates the I/Q Plane for QPSK and 16-QAM modulation technique.
QPSK
Each symbol corresponds to 2 consecutive input bits. The four symbols are represented by different phase shifts in the I/Q plane.
16QAM
Each symbol corresponds to four consecutive input bits. Thus the data rate can be doubled with 16-QAM compared to QPSK. The 16 symbols are represented in the I/Q plane by different phase shifts and amplitudes. In 16-QAM modulation the symbol value is determined by phase and amplitude. Compared to that, in QPSK the phase is only modulated and variation in amplitude have only minor inuence on the decision space in the I/Q diagram. However with 16-QAM the decision space is heavily inuenced by amplitude variations, thus higher constraints are put on the transmitter linearity. Note, a more accurate phase estimate is necessary with 16-QAM since constellation points have smaller differences in phase domain compared to QPSK. Note: The number of constellation points in the I/Q-diagram can be calculated with 2m, where m represents the number of bits or chips per modulation symbol. QPSK modulation has four constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 4 m = 2. 16-QAM modulation has 16 constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 16 m = 4
8-10
Version 1 Rev 0
8-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Maximum Throughput Rates

The formulas opposite consider the physical maximum throughput rates available in FDD mode of WCDMA according to releases and modulation. In Rel. 99 and Rel. 4 only QPSK is used whereas Rel. 5 allows also to user higher order modulation scheme 16-QAM. The standard chip rate is 3.84 Mchips/s across all releases. The slot duration is in all releases 0.67ms corresponding to 2560 chips. Note that the physical maximum chip rate achievable with 3.84 Mchips/s and QPSK modulation is: 2 chips/symbol x 3.84 Mchips/s = 7.68 Mchips/s
UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel. 4

Downlink: In the downlink, the DPDCH and DPCCH are time multiplexed onto I and Q plane so the DPDCH data rate also depends on the DPCCH data rate. The physical maximum bit rate (ignoring losses due to DPCCH) using spreading factor 4 is 5.76 Mbit/s. The downlink slot format # 16 allows for 1248 DPDCH bits/slot and per physical channel. The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 3 spreading codes @ sf4 is: 1248 bits/slot x 15 slots x (3 OVSFs) = 5.616 Mbit/s Uplink: In the uplink each channel DPDCH and DPCCH is assigned an orthogonal channelization code. As both physical channels are I/Q multiplexed, (i.e. separated onto I and Q phases), the maximum physical data rate has to be calculated with 1 bit/symbol. The uplink slot format # 6 allows for 640 bits/slot. The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 6 spreading codes @ sf4 is therefore: 5.76 Mbit/s.
HSDPA Rel. 5
In HSDPA the spreading factor for the user plane is xed to 16. Thus up to 15 physical channels can be allocated at maximum per UE. QPSK: The downlink slot format # 0 allows for 320 bits/slot and per physical channel. This results in 960 bits/ 2 ms subframe. The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 7.2 Mbit/s. 16-QAM The downlink slot format #1 allows for 640 bits/slot and per physical channel. This results in 1920 bits/ 2 ms subframe. The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 14.4 Mbit/s.
8-12
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel 4

Downlink
2 bits/symbol x [3.84 Mcps / (4 chips/symbol)] x (3 OVSF's) = 5.76 Mbits/S
Uplink
HSDPA Rel. 5
QPSK
16-QAM
8-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Important Changes for HSDPA

HSDPA involves signicant changes in the UTRAN providing a high exibility to react to changing air-interface conditions or variable user QoS.
New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPA

The TTI (Transmission Time Interval) in HSDPA has been reduced to 2 ms in order to be faster in retransmitting erroneous data blocks compared to the minimum TTI of 10 ms in UTRA-FDD. Another advantage of the shorter TTI in HSDPA is that NodeB can adapt literally every data block to fast changing radio conditions by the means of AMC. Thus it is possible to counteract fading on the air-interface by adjusting modulation and coding every 2 ms.
New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPA

New channels are introduced for HSDPA: HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, HS-DPCCH and HS-DSCH.
No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading Factor

With HSDPA, two of the most fundamental features of WCDMA, fast power control and variable spreading factor are disabled and replaced by AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding). Note: AMC uses multicode operation (the UE can use more than one channelization code in parallel) in order to increase the data rate for a certain user and adapts the code rate to the air-interface quality. By these means AMC is able to improve the user throughput or at least keep it constant even the downlink channel quality deteriorates between subsequent transmissions.
New UE Capabilities / Categories

The HSDPA feature is optional for both UE and network in Rel. 5. The UE indicates its HSDPA support and its HS-DSCH physical layer category within the radio access capability parameter.. The physical layer category denes among other parameters the maximum number of channelization codes the UE supports in parallel for multicode operation. A UE may support up to 5, 10 or 15 channelization codes in parallel.
New MAC-hs in NodeB and UE

The implementation of Medium Access Control (MAC-hs) in NodeB and UE is a pre-requisite for allowing the NodeB to schedule transmissions and retransmission, to maintain the HSDPA specic channels and to operate with AMC and Hybrid ARQ.
Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol Procedure

NBAP procedures need to support HSDPA capability and HSDPA related parameters. The increased bandwidth needs to be supported by the frame protocol. Among other parameters the frame protocol needs to cater for HSDPA ow control information, priority queue handling and UE capability information.
8-14
Version 1 Rev 0
8-15
Version 1 Rev 0
New Channels with HSDPA

The support of HSDPA is based on several new physical channels and one new transport channel.
Transport Channel:
HS-DSCH (High Speed Downlink Shared Channel) The HS-DSCH is the actual transport resource carrying the packet data of the user applications. As it also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms, it allows for short round trip delay in the operation between NodeB and UE. The 2 ms TTI is short when compared to 10, 20, 40 or 80 ms TTIs supported by Rel. 99 and Rel. 4 transport channels. HS-DSCH describes the physical layer processing by MAC-hs of a HSDPA transport block. Dynamic part: TB size = TBS size {1 to 200 000 bits with 8 bit granularity}; modulation scheme {QPSK, 16-QAM}; redundancy / constellation version {1 8}. Static part: TTI {2 ms for FDD}; type of channel coding {turbo coding}; mother code rate {1/3}, CRC size {24 bits} No semi-static attributes are dened for HS-DSCH.
Physical Channels
High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) The HS-SCCH has a xed spreading factor of value 128 and is congured only in the downlink direction. It also adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms. In theory, up to 127 HS-SCCHs can be congured in a cell. However, the UE is required only to be able to listen to up to four HS-SCCH in parallel. The HS-SCCH allows the efcient sharing of one or more HS-PDSCHs among different users. Nevertheless every UE needs to be informed on the DCCH via RRC messages about the specic HS-SCCH-set that it shall monitor in order to receive data via the HS-PDSCHs. High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH) The HS-PDSCH has a xed spreading factor of value 16. Thus, it provides for multicode operation using up to 15 channelization codes in parallel. Of course the UE must support the use of up to 15 channelization codes which depends on its category. The HS-PDSCH adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms. Uplink Dedicated Control Channel Associated with HS-DSCH Transmission (Uplink HS-DPCCH). The HS-DPCCH has a xed spreading factor of value 256 and is only congured in uplink direction. The HS-DPCCH also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms. Its purpose is to provide feedback information about the downlink receive quality and whether the packet data received by the UE are error-free or need to be retransmitted. Thus the NodeB is quickly notied of unsuccessful transmissions and/or changing radio conditions in downlink direction.
8-16
Version 1 Rev 0

Transport Channels
Physical Channels
8-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Future Enhancements of HSDPA

UMTS UTRA FDD aims to support a variety of multiple antenna transmission techniques in order to enhance coverage, system throughput and spectral efciency of HSDPA. A major aim of using multiple antenna transmission in macro-cellular environments is to increase the coverage ratio at medium and higher data rates, lets say 2 Mbit/s and beyond. In a typical deployment, two to four or more transmit antennas might be used per sector.
Beamforming
Beamforming makes use of adaptive antennas and can therefore provide a better C/I to UEs in the downlink. At the same time beamforming allows re-use of scarce downlink channelization codes as the individual UEs are separated in space and possibly through different downlink scrambling codes, thus making use of secondary scrambling codes. The signals toward different UEs from the same cell are typically transmitted under the same primary scrambling code and separated by means of orthogonal channelization codes. However, some of the beams may be transmitted under a secondary scrambling code with its associated channelization code tree, thereby increasing the resources in the cell. Note that the loss of the reduced orthogonality between primary and secondary scrambling code can be partly mitigated in the case of beamforming by splitting the cell into multiple scrambling code regions, so the spatial isolation between beams using different scrambling codes helps to compensate the lack of orthogonality.
Transmit Diversity
The downlink capacity could be improved by using receive antenna diversity in the UE. However for small and cheap mobiles it is not feasible to use two antennas and receiver chains. Therefore, the WCDMA standard already supports the use of base station transmit diversity in Rel. 99. There are two modes: open loop (TSTD and STTD) and closed loop mode (mode1 with phase adjustment only and mode 2 with phase and amplitude adjustment). The open loop mode simply transmits the coded information from two antennas, but on the diversity antenna the bits are time reversed and complex conjugated. The STTD method provides two kinds of diversity. The physical separation of the antennas provides space diversity and the time difference derived from a bit-reversing process provides for time diversity, thus the decoding in the receiver becomes more reliable. The closed loop mode can only be applied to the downlink channel, if there is an associated uplink channel. Thus this mode can only be used with dedicated channels (DPCH, PDSCH or HS-PDSCH with an associated uplink DPCCH).
MIMO
With MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) at the transmitter, x independent data streams are transmitted out of the x antennas on the same frequency band. At the receiver, each antenna receives all of the transmitted sub-streams superimposed, not separately. If multipath scattering is sufcient, these x data streams have different spatial signatures to each of the e.g. p receive antennas and they are separable, the signals arrive with different phases. When a transmitter has x antennas and the receiver has p antennas, the link speed increases linearly with min (x,p) given the same power and bandwidth budget.
8-18
Version 1 Rev 0
8-19
Version 1 Rev 0
8-20
Pub-Date
HSUPA Overview
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 9
HSUPA Overview
9-1
Version 1 Rev 0
HSUPA Overview
9-2
Pub-Date
Chapter Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter Objectives
Describe Describe Describe Describe the the the the key technologies used in HSUPA RAN architecture impacts HSUPA transport and physical channels different TTIs available for HSUPA
9-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction
Introduction
After the rst release of HSDPA in 3GPP R5 in mid 2002 work started on the High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA) and over the course of the next 3 years the concept materialized into the specications and was realized in 3GPP R6.
HSUPA vs R99 DCH

HSUPA is not a standalone feature, but uses the basic features of R99 to operate. Cell selection, randon access and basic mobility features etc are used and remain unchanged with HSUPA operation. The change occurs in the way the user data is delivered from the UE to the NodeB on the uplink. HSUPA provides a exible path beyond the 384 kbps uplink which is the realistic maximum before HSUPA. A similar technology to that of HSDPA is being used by introducing fast uplink HARQ, NodeB based uplink scheduling and easier multicode transmission than that of R99.
Key Technologies
The new uplink transport channel Enhanced DCH (E-DCH) brings some of the same features to the uplink as the HSDPA with its new transport channel HS-DSCH to the downlink. The E-DCH supports fast NodeB based scheduling,fast physical layer HARQ with incremental redundancy and at USR7 a shorter 2ms TTI. E-DCH is not a shared channel like HSDPA, but it is in fact a dedicated channel and can therefore support technologies like fast power control, variable SFand soft handovers. Uplink Scheduling The uplink scheduling mechanism is of central importance for HSUPA. The uplink scheduler is located in the Node B close to the air interface in a similar way as HSDPA. Task of the uplink scheduler is to control the uplink resources the UEs in the cell are using. The scheduler therefore grants maximum allowed transmit power ratios to each UE. This effectively limits the transport block size the UE can select and thus the uplink data rate. The scheduling mechanism is based on absolute and relative grants. The absolute grants are used to initialize the scheduling process and provide absolute transmit power ratios to the UE, whereas the relative grants are used for incremental up- or downgrades of the allowed transmit power. Note that one UE has to evaluate scheduling commands possibly from different radio links. This is due to the fact that uplink macro diversity is used in HSUPA. Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) The HARQ protocol is a retransmission protocol improving robustness against link adaptation errors. The Node B can request retransmissions of erroneously received data packets and will send for each packet either an Acknowledgement (ACK) or a Negative Acknowledgement (NACK) to the UE. Furthermore, the Node B can do soft combining, i.e. combine the retransmissions with the original transmissions in the receiver. Due to uplink macro diversity, one UE has to evaluate ACK/NACK information for the same packet possibly from different radio links. Reduction of Transmission Time Interval To accelerate packet scheduling and reduce latency, HSUPA allows for a reduced TTI of 2 ms corresponding to 3 timeslots. A WCDMA radio frame of 10 ms therefore consists of 5 subframes. Unlike HSDPA, however, the support of this 2 ms TTI in the UE is not mandatory. Instead, it is a UE capability. It is congured at call setup whether 2 ms TTI or 10 ms TTI is to be used for HSUPA transmission.
9-4
Introduction
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction
20 Users Per Cell 1.44 Mbps Per User
USR 6
60 Users Per Cell 5.76 Mbps Per User
USR 7
Iub
Iu
CN
RNC
NodeB
Variable SF HARQ BTS Based Scheduling Fast Power Control Soft Handover TTI Length of 2 (USR7) and 10ms
9-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Impact on Radio Access Network Architecture

Both the uplink scheduling and the HARQ protocol are located in the Node B, in order to move processing closer to air interface and be able to react faster on the radio link situation. Macro diversity is exploited for HSUPA, i.e. the uplink data packets can be received by more than 1 cell. There is one serving cell controlling the serving radio link assigned to the UE. The serving cell is having full control of the scheduling process and is providing the absolute grant to the UE. The serving radio link set is a set of cells contains at least the serving cell and possibly additional radio links from the same Node B. The UE can receive and combine one relative grant from the serving radio link set. There can also be additional non-serving radio links at other Node Bs. The UE can have zero, one or several non-serving radio links and receive one relative grant from each of them. Different Node Bs will deliver correctly received data packets to the RNC. Therefore some selective combining functionality is needed in the RNC to sort out duplicates.
CN
UTRAN
Radio Network Controller (RNC) Selective Combining
Node B (of serving radio link set): Scheduling: absolute/relative grants; HARQ: Soft-combining, generation of ACK/NACK
Node B (of non-serving radio link set): Scheduling: absolute/relative grants; HARQ: Soft-combining, generation of ACK/NACK
HSUPA Protocol Architecture

The HSUPA related functionalities in Node B and RNC are also reected in the protocol architecture as shown in the slide opposite (Serving and Controlling RNC are the same). New protocol entities are highlighted by shading). Node B contains a new MAC entity called MAC-e, and the RNC contains a new MAC entity called MAC-es. Both MAC-e and MAC-es entities terminate within the MAC layer of the UE.
9-6
Version 1 Rev 0
9-7
Version 1 Rev 0
HSUPA Channels
HSUPA Channels
As said before, HSUPA is a new uplink transport channel, E-DCH, which supports enhanced features to those of the uplink transport channels of R99. Uplink transport channel processing for E-DCH is similar to the processing of the uplink DCH with two exceptions. There can be only one E-DCH transport channel in the UE, unlike DCHs that are multiplexed together to a Single Coded Composite Transport Channel (CCTrCH) of DCH type. Nevertheless, the MAC layer can multiplex multiple parallel services to the single E-DCH. The other signicant difference is HARQ support for the E-DCH which is provided in the transport channel processing chain. After transport channel processing, the E-DCH maps to one or multiple parallel new dedicated physical data channels E-DPDCHs for physical layer transmission. This is completely parallel to uplink DCH processing chain and physical channels, so both E-DCH and DCH can coexist in the same UE with the restriction that the maximum DCH data rate is 64 kbps when the E-DCH is congured. Using E-DPDCH transmissions a simultaneous and parallel control channel is sent a separate code channel E-DPCCH. This E-DPCCH transmits all the necessary information about the E-DPDCH that is needed in order to know how to receive the data channel. In the downlink, 3 new channels are introduced for control purposes: E-AGCH: E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel carrying absolute grants; E-RGCH: E-DCH Relative Grant Channel carrying relative grants; E-HICH: E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel carrying ACK/NACK. E-AGCH is only transmitted from the serving cell. E-RGCH and E-HICH are transmitted from radio links that are part of the serving radio link set and from non-serving radio links. Note that HSUPA channels are added on top of uplink / downlink dedicated channels. Each UE therefore additionally carries an uplink and downlink Dedicated Physical Channel (DPCH). In the downlink, a Fractional Dedicated Channel (F-DPCH) can be used alternatively. The F-DPCH has been introduced in 3GPP release 6 in order to optimize the downlink channelization code usage. With this concept, several UEs can share one downlink channelization code of SF 256. For this purpose, the F-DPCH uses a new slot format only containing the Transmit Power Control (TPC) bits. Unlike the regular downlink DPCH slot formats, no pilot or data elds are present. By assigning a UE specic timing offset, it is possible to multiplex up to 10 UEs onto one channelization code for FDPCH. The F-DPCH is available in USR7.
9-8
HSUPA Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
HSUPA Channels
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel Absolute grants
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel Relative grants
E-DCH Relative Grant Channel Relative grants
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel ACK/NACK Node B with non-serving E-DCH radio link
E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel ACK/NACK Node B with serving EDCH radio link set
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel Uplink data
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel Uplink data
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel Uplink RSN, E-TFCI, Happy Bit
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel Uplink RSN, E-TFCI, Happy Bit
9-9
Version 1 Rev 0
E-DCH Transport Channel Processing

Transport channel processing is the functionality that transforms the transport blocks delivered by the MAC layer to bits transmitted on physical channels. The diagram below shows the overview of DCH and E-DCH transport channel processing from the MAC layer to the physical channels.
A single E-DCH transport channel processing chain always gets one transport block to process for transmission in one TTI, because for the DCH a set of transport blocks for each congured DCH will be delivered to the processing chain. In the slide opposite the differences between the elements of transport channel processing chains for the E-DCH and DCH are illustrated: CRC attachment for the E-DCH always attaches a 24-bit CRC to the transport block received fromthe MAC layer. In comparison, the CRC length for the DCH is congurable and can be 0, 8, 12, 16, or 24 bits. Code block segmentation for the E-DCH splits its input into equal size code blocks so that the length of the block does not exceed 5114 bits. For the DCH the same block rst concatenates the transport block set to a single block of data before splitting. Also the size of the maximum code block with the DCH depends on the coding in use (5114 for turbo-coding and 504 for convolutional coding). Channel coding for the E-DCH is always turbo-coding with a code rate of 1/3. DCH channel coding may be either convolutional coding with code rates 1/2 or 1/3 or turbocoding with a code rate of 1/3. Physical layer HARQ funtionality/rate matching for the E-DCH matches the channel codes output bits to the available physical channel bits and produces the different redundancy versions needed for incremental redundancy HARQ. Physical channel segmentation for the E-DCH distributes the channel bits among the multiple E-DPDCHs if more than one E-DPDCH is needed. The functionality is also the same in the corresponding block in the DCH processing chain. Interleaving and physical channel mapping for the E-DCH, as well as for the DCH, interleaves the bits in the radio frame and maps the bits to be transmitted to their nal positions in the physical channel.
9-10
Version 1 Rev 0
9-11
Version 1 Rev 0
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Data Channel (E-DPDCH)

The E-DPDCH has a very similar structure to the DPDCH of R99 with a few exceptions. They both support OVSFs to adjust the number of channel bits to the amount of data actually being transmitted. They both could go beyond the data rate that one physical data channel can support by transmitting multiple channels in parallel. They both use BPSK modulation and follow the same fast power control loop. The main difference are; the E-DPDCH supports fast physical layer level HARQ and fast Node B based scheduling. However, these are not really properties of the physical data channel as such, but the HARQ is visible in the transport channel processing chain and the scheduling is visible in the MAC layer. The biggest difference for E-DPDCH is the support of a SF of 2, which allows delivering twice as many channel bits per code than the minimum spreading factor of 4 that the DPDCH supports. The maximum possible data rate of 5.76 Mbps is achieved by allocating 2*SF2 and 2*SF4. The same result could be achieved by using 6 SF4 codes with DPDCH, but the power efciency of the UE would be reduced in comparison to using SF2. An E-DCH transport block with user data is mapped onto one sub-frame of 2 ms in case a TTI of 2 ms has been congured, or onto one radio frame of 10 ms in case a TTI of 10 ms has been congured. The amount of data bits that can be carried within one timeslot depends on the selected slot format. The slot format determines the Spreading Factor (SF) and therefore the amount of bits per slot. The slot format is shown in the table below.
The E-DPDCH is time aligned with the uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH).
9-12
Version 1 Rev 0
9-13
Version 1 Rev 0
E-DCH Dedicated Physical Control Channel (E-DPCCH)

The E-DPCCH is a new uplink physical channel used for transmitting out-of-band information about E-DPDCH transmission from the mobile to the base station. The E-DPCCH has only one possible slot format, which uses a spreading factor of 256 with a channelization code of 1 and is capable of delivering 30 channel bits in a 2-ms sub-frame. It is designed to deliver 10 bits of information for each E-DPDCH TTI transmitted. The E-DPCCH uses the same (30, 10) second-order ReedMuller coding as used for TFCI coding in the DPCCH. This means that the 10 information bits result in 30 bits to be transmitted in the physical channel. This number of bits can be carried by the E-DPCCH in 2 ms sub frames. If the TTI length of the E-DPDCH is 10 ms, then the 30-bit E-DPCCH sub-frame is repeated ve times allowing reduced power level. With this procedure the same E-DPCCH structure can be employed regardless of the TTI used for E-DPDCH transmission. The E-DPCCH frame structure is illustrated opposite. The 10 information bits on the E-DPCCH consist of three different segments:: The Retransmission Sequence Number (RSN) the retransmission sequence number of 2 bits informing the HARQ sequence number of the transport block currently being sent on E-DPDCHs. The initial transmission of a transport block is sent with RSN = 0, the rst retransmission with RSN = 1, the second retransmission with RSN = 2, and all subsequent transmissions with RSN = 3.; An E-DCH Transport Format Combination Indicator (E-TFCI) 7 bits indicating the transport format being transmitted simultaneously on E-DPDCHs. In essence, the E-TFCI tells the receiver the transport block size coded on the E-DPDCH. From this information the receiver can derive how many E-DPDCHs are transmitted in parallel and what spreading factor is used; Happy bit as inferred from the name is 1 bit only. It indicates whether the UE is content with the current data rate (or relative power allowed to be used for E-DPDCHs) or whether it could use higher power allocation. The E-DPCCH is time aligned with the uplink DPCCH. All channels transmitted in uplink (E-DPDCH, E-DPCCH, HS-DPCCH, DPCCH, possibly DPDCH) are IQ multiplexed.
9-14
Version 1 Rev 0
Retransmission Sequence Number (RSN) 2 bits E-DCH Transport Format Indicator (E-TFCI) 7 bits Happy Bit - 1 bit
9-15
Version 1 Rev 0
E-DCH HARQ Indicator Channel (E-HICH)

The E-HICH is a new downlink physical channel used for transmitting positive and negative acknowledgements for uplink packet transmission. If the Node B received the transmitted E-DPDCH TTI correctly it will respond with a positive Acknowledgement (ACK) and if it received the TTI incorrectly it will respond with a Negative Acknowledgement (NACK). E-HICH information is BPSK-modulated with on/off keying and the modulation depends on which cell is transmitting the E-HICH. If the E-HICH is coming from the radio link set contained in the serving E-DCH radio link (transmitted from the base station that has the serving E-DCH cell), then both ACKs and NACKs are transmitted. The E-HICHs transmitted by Node Bs that do not contain the serving E-DCH cell only transmit ACKs. If such a cell does not receive the E-DPDCH TTI correctly, then it does nothing. The UE will continue retransmitting until at least one cell responds with an ACK. The purpose of this arrangement is to save downlink transmission power. The assumption behind the different modulations is that those Node Bs that do not have the serving E-DCH cell are typically the ones that do not have the best connection to the UE and are more likely not to receive the E-DPDCH TTI correctly and have a signicantly larger portion of NACKs than ACKs to be transmitted. In this way only the ACKs actually consume downlink capacity. As for the serving E-DCH radio link set the assumption is that typically more ACKs than NACKs are transmitted. When both ACK and NACK actually result in BPSK bit transmission (+1 and 1, respectively) the peak power required to transmit a reliable ACK is smaller when the receiver needs to separate +1 from 1 than would be the case if it needed to separate +1 from 0 (as no transmission).
All the cells in the same Node B are assumed to receive uplink E-DPDCH transmission in cooperation and, thus, even if there are multiple cells in the Node B participating in a softer handover the TTI reception either succeeds or fails only once, not separately in all the cells. Due to this all E-HICHs transmitted from the Node B containing the serving E-DCH cell transmit both ACKs and NACKs, effectively enabling the UE to combine the radio links for more reliable ACK/NACK detection. E-HICH and E-RGCH channel structures are exactly the same and are shown opposite. Each delivers 1 bit of information in three slots. In the case of a 10-ms TTI the three slots are repeated four times resulting in an 8-ms-long message. The exception is the E-RGCH transmitted from cells not belonging to the serving E-DCH radio link set. That channel always regardless of the E-DCH TTI transmits a 10-ms-long message (i.e., the three slots are always repeated ve times). The E-HICH/E-RGCH basic building block is a 40-bit-long orthogonal sequence which allows the orthogonal multiplexing of 40 bits in one slot on a single spreading factor 128-code channel. The same E-HICH/E-RGCH bit is repeated three times over three slots, but uses a different signature in each of the three slots following a deterministic code hopping pattern. This is because different signature pairs have different isolations in a real radio environment and, thus, the effect is averaged this way. E-HICHs and E-RGCHs utilize 40-bit-long orthogonal sequences for multiplexing multiple E-HICHs and E-RGCHs (40 in total) to a single downlink code channel of spreading factor 128. One cell can use multiple channelization codes to exceed the limit of 40 signatures (e.g., 20 E-HICHs and 20 E-RGCHs in a code) with the constraint that the E-HICH and E-RGCH intended for the same UE must be transmitted with the same channelization code.
9-16
Version 1 Rev 0
9-17
Version 1 Rev 0
E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel (E-AGCH)

The E-AGCH is a downlink physical channel used for transmitting an absolute value of the Node B schedulers decision that lets the UE know the relative transmission power it is allowed to use for data channel transmission (E-DPDCH), thus effectively telling the UE the maximum transmission data rate it may use. The E-AGCH delivers 5 bits to the UE for the absolute grant value, indicating the exact power level the E-DPDCH may use in relation to the DPCCH. In addition, the E-AGCH carries a 1-bit indication for the absolute grant scope. With this bit the Node B scheduler can allow/disallow UE transmission in a particular HARQ process. This bit is only applicable for 2-ms TTI E-DCH operation. In addition to this the E-AGCH uses a primary and a secondary UE-id for identifying the intended receiver and delivering one additional bit of information. The E-AGCH uses a xed spreading factor of 256 and QPSK modulation. The absolute grant consists of a 5 bit grant value according to the table below and 1 bit indicating the scope of the grant. The scope of the absolute grant tells the UE whether the absolute grant is valid for a specic HARQ process or for all HARQ processes. The absolute grant is channel coded with convolutional coding of code rate 1/3. The resulting 60 bits are transmitted in a 2 ms sub-frame in case of 2 ms TTI, or repeated in all 5 sub-frames in case of 10 ms TTI. Absolute grant value is a 5-bit integer number ranging from 0 to 31 that has a specic mapping (as shown below) to the E-DPDCH/DPCCH power ratio the UE may use.
Absolute grant scope can be used to activate/de-activate a particular HARQ process (identied by the E-AGCH timing) or all HARQ processes. The absolute grant scope can only be used with a 2-ms E-DCH TTI. Primary/Secondary UE-id or primary/secondary E-RNTI is used to mask the CRC of the E-AGCH. Each UE may have up to two UE-ids which it checks from each E-AGCH and if it detects one or the other as matching the transmission it knows that the E-AGCH transmission was destined for it. The structure of an E-AGCH is very similar to an HS-SCCH for HSDPA. A 16-bit CRC is calculated over the 6 information bits and masked with either a primary or a secondary UE-id.With these ids the UE knows whether the E-AGCH transmission was meant for it or not. The package is then coded and rate-matched to t the three-slot-long (2-ms) SF 256 channel. If a 10-ms E-DCH TTI is used the three slots are repeated ve times to ll the whole radio frame. For both 2 ms and 10 ms TTI, the E-AGCH timing is 5120 chips offset from P-CCPCH frame timing.
9-18
Version 1 Rev 0
9-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Reason for having 2 ms amd 10 ms TTIs

While HSDPA only supports a single TTI (2 ms), with HSUPA there are two TTI lengths 2 and 10 ms that can be chosen. The motivation for the 2-ms length was the potential delay benet while 10 ms was needed for range purposes to ensure cell edge operation. A potential delay benet could be obtained if there are not too many retransmissions using a 2-ms TTI, as the delay between retransmissions is shorter compared with the 10- ms case. A problem occurs when approaching the cell edge where signalling using a 2-ms period starts to consume a lot of transmission power, especially at the Node B. The difference from HSDPA is that now potentially a much larger number of users are expected to be active simultaneously and, thus, aiming to also provide downlink signalling to such a large number of users using a 2-ms period would become impossible. With data rates below 2Mbps there are no major differences from the capacity point of view regardless of the TTI used. When going above 2 Mbps per user, then the block size using 10 ms would get too big and, thus, data rates above 2 Mbps are only provided using a 2-ms TTI. As with macro-cells, practical data rates in the uplink have limitations due to transmission power limitations. This means the 10-ms TTI is expected as the starting value for system deployment; this has also been reected in terminal capabilities (where a 2-ms TTI is optional for most categories).
9-20
Version 1 Rev 0

Area where only a 10ms TTI is acceptable E-DCH/HSDPA Serving Cell
l ntro Co H C E-D A DP /HS H DC H /DC CH D E
NodeB
Area where both a 2ms and a 10ms TTI is acceptable
9-21
Version 1 Rev 0
9-22
Pub-Date
UMTS Terrestrial Interface Protocols
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 10
10-1
Version 1 Rev 0
10-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the General Protocol Model for UMTS. Describe the Interface specic protocol structure for the following interfaces: luCS luPS lub lu r
10-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction to UMTS Terrestrial Interfaces

Within the UTRAN there are a number of four terrestrial interfaces that are implemented by existing transmission techniques. The four, namely IuCS, IuPS, Iub and Iur are discussed in this chapter. The different transmission techniques that can be employed for each interface denes the protocol stack that is used. The slide opposite shows the different options for each interface currently. However it should be noted that the complete IP RAN will be available in the near future to give all the interfaces the IP option. The air interface and its protocol stack is covered in other parts of the manual.
10-4
Version 1 Rev 0

Uu
IuCS Iub NodeB

E1 ATM SDH ATM E1 IP Uu FE IP SDH ATM IP RAN
MSCu
RNC Iub NodeB IuPS SGSN
10-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction to UMTS Protocols

As has been outlined in previous chapters, one of the underlying principles in the design and development of UMTS is to prepare a universal infrastructure able to carry both existing and future services. All design work should be such that technological and evolution changes in one part of the network should have no (or at least minimal impact) on other network components or services. From a protocol perspective, this is acheived by conning , as far as is reasonably practicable, protocol functions and services within one or several physical domains. To this end, the 3G protocol architecture can be divided into two strata. Access Stratum Non-Access Stratum
Access Stratum
The Access Stratum (AS) is a functional entity that encompasses radio protocols between the UE and the UTRAN and, terrestrial interface (Iu) protocols between the UTRAN and the Core Network (CN). These protocols all terminate within the UTRAN.
Non-Access Stratum
The Non-access Stratum (NAS) includes CN protocols that form a direct connection between the UE and the CN itself. The NAS is transparent to the UTRAN and thus these protocols do not terminate in the UTRAN. The NAS protocols encompass functions such as; Mobility Management (MM), Call Control (CC), Short Message Services (SMS) and Suplementary Services (SS) associated with the circuit switched CN and, GPRS Mobility Management (GMM), Session Managment (SM) and GPRS SMS assocoiated with the packet switched CN. The NAS tries to remain independent of the underlying radio technology. Thus the NAS protocols can remain unchanged regardless of the Radio Access Network (RAN) that carries them.
10-6
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction to UMTS Protocols UMTS Protocol Architecture

UE Core Network Protocols UTRAN Core Network Core Network Protocols
Non-Access Stratum
Access Stratum
Radio Protocols
Radio Protocols
Iu Protocols
Iu Protocols
Uu-Interface
Iu-Interface
10-7
Version 1 Rev 0
General Protocol Model

The protocols in the UTRAN are designed according to a set protocol model. The structure consists of Layers (Horizontal) and Planes (Vertical). All these entities are independent of each other and can be changed at any time. It is also important to note that these protocol stacks are not developed for specic entities e.g. RNC or Node-B etc, but rather for the interfaces between these different entities. Lets have a closer look at the Layers and Planes.
Horizontal Layers
The General protocol stack only consists of two layers, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. From the bottom, the Physical layer (Part of the Transport Network Layer) will provide the physical medium for transmission. Above the Physical layer is the Transport layer (Part of the Transport Network Layer) which contains the transport protocols. These protocols are not dened within the UMTS specications. The Transport Network Protocol proposed for UMTS is ATM. The top layer is called the Radio Network layer, this is the layer responsible for all UTRAN related tasks. The tasks performed on Radio Network Layer are transparent to Transport Network Layer.
Vertical Planes
Control Plane The Control plane only exists on L3 of the Horizontal planes and is responsible for all UMTS specic signalling. The protocols used for the control plane are the RANAP protocol for the Iu interface, the RNSAP protocol for the Iur interface and the NBAP protocol for the Iub interface. These are all termed Application protocols and will be used for tasks like setting up bearers to the UE. Operation & Maintenance actions will always set up the signalling Bearers for the Application protocol. User Plane This plane is being used for transfer of all kinds of information e.g. multimedia, e-mail, speech etc. The User Plane consists of the Data Stream that will be transported on the Data Bearer. Each data stream is identied and characterised by one or more frame protocols. Transport Network Control Plane This plane is used for all signalling that must be transferred in the Transport Layer and does not include any Radio Network Layer information. The protocol used for the Control Plane is called Access Link Control Application Protocol (ALCAP). This protocol will handle the setting up of Data Bearers for the User Plane of the Transport layer. The introduction of the ALCAP protocol made it possible for the Application Protocols to run with complete independence of the data bearing technology. It should be noted that we shall not use the ALCAP protocol in the setting up of the Signalling Bearers for the Application Protocols or for ALCAP. Transport Network User Plane Both the Signalling Bearer (for Application Protocol) in the Control Plane and the Data Bearer in the User Plane belong to the Transport Network Layer. The Data bearers in the Transport Network User Plane are directly controlled by the Transport Network Control Plane during real time operations. The control of the Signalling Bearer(s) for Application Protocol are considered Operations and Maintenance functions.
10-8
Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Network Layer Control Plane Application Protocol User Plane Data Stream(s)
Transport Network User Plane Transport Network Layer Signalling Bearer(s)
Transport Network Control Plane ALCAP(S)
Transport Network User Plane
Signalling Bearer(s)
Data Bearer(s)
Physical Layer
10-9
Version 1 Rev 0
IU-CS Interface Protocols Overview

The IuCS interface is the logical interface between the RNC and the Circuit Switched Core Network. The diagram opposite shows the IuCS protocol stack, which consists of the following planes: Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A) Transport Network Layer Control plane (section B) Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C) As the upper layer protocol are the applications of the lower layer protocol, the bottom-up conguration principle should be followed for the conguration of section A, section B and section C. Therefore, the IuCS interface should be considered in the following sequence: All their planes share the physical layer (recommended to be provided using STM-1 bearers) and the ATM layer, which have common characteristics. In the radio network and transport network control planes, an SAAL NNI layer is used to provide signalling bearers. An SS7 MTP-3 layer provides the signalling transport for section A and section B. An SS7 SCCP layer provides the connection oriented signalling mechanism for section A The signalling application in section A is RANAP. The signalling application in section B, is Q.AAL2. The user plane bearer of section C, is provided by an AAL2 path. NOTE On the Iu-CS, a single SAAL NNI link can share the transport of both RANAP and ALCAP signalling.
10-10
Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Network Layer Control Plane RANAP User plane Iu UP
Transport Network Layer
User Plane
Control Plane
Q.AAL2
User Plane
A
SCCP MTP3-B SAAL NNI
Q.2630.1 Q.2150.1
MTP3-B SAAL NNI
C
AAL2 PATH
ATM Physical Layer
10-11
Version 1 Rev 0
IU-PS Interface Protocols Overview

The IuPS interface is the logical interface between the RNC and the Packet Switched Core Network. The diagram opposite shows the IuPS protocol stack, which consists of the following planes: Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A) Transport Network Layer Control plane (section B) Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C) As the upper layer protocol are the applications of the lower layer protocol, the bottom-up conguration principle should be followed for the conguration of section A, section B and section C. Therefore, the IuCS interface should be considered in the following sequence: All their planes share the physical layer (recommended to be provided using STM-1 bearers) and the ATM layer, which have common characteristics. In the radio network and transport network control planes, an SAAL NNI layer is used to provide signalling bearers. An SS7 MTP-3 layer provides the signalling transport for section A and section B. An SS7 SCCP layer provides the connection oriented signalling mechanism for section A The signalling application in section A is RANAP. Tthe user plane bearer in section C, is provided by an IPoA path leading to SGSN.
10-12
Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Network Layer Control Plane RANAP User plane Iu UP
User Plane
Control Plane
User Plane
A
C
GTP-U UDP IP AAL Type 5
ATM Physical Layer
ATM Physical Layer
10-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Iub Interface (ATM) Protocols Overview

The Iub (ATM) interface is the logical interface between the RNC and Node B. The diagram opposite shows the Iub protocol stack, which consists of the following planes: Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A) Transport Network Layer Control plane (section B) Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C) As the upper layer protocol are the applications of the lower layer protocol, the bottom-up conguration principle should be followed for the conguration of section A, section B and section C. Therefore, the Iub interface should be considered in the following sequence: All their planes share the physical layer (recommended to be provided using E1 links) and the ATM layer, which have common characteristics. In the radio network and Transport network control planes, an SAAL UNI layer is used to provide signalling bearers. The signalling application in section A is NBAP, which in turn comprises two different signalling port types, namely, Iub ports Node B Control Port (NCP) and Communication Control Port(s) (CCP)). The signalling application in section B is Q.AAL2. Add the user plane data bearer in section C is provided by an AAL2 path.
10-14
Version 1 Rev 0
10-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Iub Interface (IP) Protocols Overview

The Iub (IP) interface is the logical interface between the RNC and Node B. The diagram opposite shows the Iub protocol stack, which consists of the following planes: Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A) carrying Radio Network Layer Control Plane. Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C) carrying Radio Network Layer User Plane. The concepts of the IP transport protocols on the Iub interface are described below. Data Link Layer The data link layer protocols related to IP transport. The protocols consist of Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) and Multipoint Protocol (MP). Internet Protocol (IP) The IP provides a connectionless service between networks. It denes the rules and details for data communication. It is used along with the TCP to provide guaranteed data transfer. Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) The SCTP is mainly used for reliably transmitting datagrams through an unreliable network. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) UDP does not guarantee reliability or ordering. Datagrams may arrive out of order, appear duplicated, or go missing without notice. Avoiding the overhead of checking whether every packet actually arrived makes UDP faster and more efcient for applications that do not need guaranteed delivery.
10-16
Version 1 Rev 0
10-17
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM/IP Dual Protocol Stack

The development of data services and the introduction of HSDPA and HSUPA are posing higher and higher requirements for Iub bandwidth. The transmission of ATM over E1 is quite expensive and the efciency of data services per bit is getting lower. In this situation, operators need low-cost Iub transmission solutions. A good solution to Iub transmission is IP transport because of its lower cost and multiple access modes. Operators who have existing ATM-based networks hope to protect their current investment and reduce the impact of IP transport on the existing services. In hybrid ATM&IP transport mode, data streams over two different paths reach the same NodeB: one over ATM (for realtime data streams) and the other over IP (for non-realtime data streams).
10-18
Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Network Layer Control Plane
DCH FP
User Plane
RACH FP
HSDSCH FP
FACH FP
PCH FP
NBAP
Transport Network User Plane Transport Network Layer
Transport Network Control Plane ALCAP
Transport Network User Plane
SAAL AAL5 ATM
SCTP IP
Data Link Layer
SAAL AAL5 ATM Physical Layer AAL2 ATM
UDP IP
Data Link Layer
10-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Iur Interface Protocols Overview

The Iur interface is the logical interface between two RNC's. The diagram opposite shows the Iur protocol stack, which consists of the following planes: Transport Network Layer User Plane (section A) Transport Network Layer Control plane (section B) Transport Network Layer User Plane (section C) As the upper layer protocol are the applications of the lower layer protocol, the bottom-up conguration principle should be followed for the conguration of section A, section B and section C. Therefore, the IuCS interface should be considered in the following sequence: All their planes share the physical layer (recommended to be provided using STM-1 bearers) and the ATM layer, which have common characteristics. In the radio network and transport network control planes, an SAAL NNI layer is used to provide signalling bearers. An SS7 MTP-3 layer provides the signalling transport for section A and section B. An SS7 SCCP layer provides the connection oriented signalling mechanism for section A The signalling application in section A is RNSAP. The signalling application in section B, is Q.AAL2. The user plane bearer of section C, is provided by an AAL2 path.
10-20
Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Network Layer Control Plane RNSAP User plane Iu UP
User Plane
Control Plane
Q.AAL2
User Plane
A
Q.2630.1 Q.2150.1
MTP3-B SAAL NNI
C
AAL2 PATH
ATM Physical Layer
10-21
Version 1 Rev 0
10-22
Pub-Date
UMTS Terrestrial Physical and Data Link Layer
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 11
11-1
Version 1 Rev 0
11-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: State the transport mechanisms used for the UMTS transport network. Describe the basic principles of ATM. Describe the use of PDH and SDH bearers for UMTS.
11-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Terrestrial Physical/Data Link Layer Overview

One very important aspect that is sometimes overlooked is the transport medium required between the different entities. In the case of UMTS the Network Operator will run into problems if the wrong links are utilised. Speed of transfer and cost will be two of the major determining factors when planning the UMTS network. Other issues that need to be addressed are the types of converting equipment used between the different types of terrestrial interfaces. In the following pages a closer look will be taken at these aspects. It should also be mentioned that as data rates increase the use of E1/T1 systems become more difcult. ATM was preferred transport mechanism on the CN. Voice and IP over ATM is conducted using ATM adaptation layers. Recently there has been a move towards using IP as the main transport mechanism, rstly on the Iub and then in later releases on the Iu.
11-4
Version 1 Rev 0

Uu
IuCS Iub NodeB

E1 ATM SDH ATM E1 IP Uu FE IP SDH ATM IP RAN
MSCu
RNC Iub NodeB IuPS SGSN
11-5
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Principles
ATM Principles
ATM is used to transfer different types of information with different rates over one or more common links with a high bit rate. This properties makes ATM an extremely useful system when it comes to wideband or broadband data transfer. ATM is a cell-switching and multiplexing technology that combines the benets of circuit switching (guaranteed capacity and constant transmission delay) with those of packet switching (exibility and efciency for intermittent trafc). It provides scalable bandwidth from a few Mbps to many Gbps. Because of its asynchronous nature, ATM is more efcient than synchronous technologies, such as Time-Division Multiplexing (TDM). With TDM, each user is assigned to a time slot, and no other station can send in that time slot. If a station has much data to send, it can send only when its time slot comes up, even if all other time slots are empty. However, if a station has nothing to transmit when its time slot comes up, the time slot is sent empty and is wasted. Because ATM is asynchronous, time slots are available on demand with information identifying the source of the transmission contained in the header of each ATM cell.
11-6
ATM Principles
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Principles
Fixed Bit Stream Variable Bit Stream
Discontinues Bit Stream
11-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Concepts of ATM Protocol

ATM protocol reference model consists of three planes: control plane, user plane, and management plane, and three function layers: physical layer, ATM layer, and ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL). Plane User plane Control plane Management plane Function Transfers user data such as protocol data and voice data Transfers signaling control data such as connection setup signaling and connection release signaling Transfers the OM data of the network. The management plane is divided into layer management part and plane management part that manage the data at each layer and the inter-layer data respectively.
The physical layer is provided by E1 or optical SDH. The ATM physical layer has four functions: Cells are converted into a bitstream, the transmission and receipt of bits on the physical medium are controlled, ATM cell boundaries are tracked, and cells are packaged into the appropriate types of frames for the physical medium. For example, cells are packaged differently for SONET than for other media types.
11-8
Version 1 Rev 0

Management Plane Control Plane Higher Layer User Plane
Plane Management Layer Management
ATM Adaptation Layer
ATM Layer
Physical Layer
11-9
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Layer
ATM Layer
ATM switching is a fast packet switching technology. In ATM switching, each packet that consists of 53 bytes is called a cell. Based on the physical layer, the ATM layer communicates with the peer layer through ATM cells.
Structure of an ATM Cell

One ATM cell consists of 48-byte payload and 5-byte header. This part describes the structure of the cell header. Type of ATM Cell Header Cell headers are categorized into User to Network Interface (UNI) cell header and Network to Network Interface (NNI) cell header: UNI cell headers apply to communications between ATM users and ATM network nodes, for example, between a NodeB and an RNC. NNI cell headers apply to communications between two ATM network nodes, for example, between an RNC and a CN. Format of an ATM Cell As shown in the slide opposite, an ATM cell header consists of Generic Flow Control (GFC), Virtual Channel Identier (VCI), Virtual Path Identier (VPI), Payload Type (PT), Cell Loss Priority (CLP), and Header Error Control (HEC). This is expanded below: The GFC eld is occasionally used only by UNI cells. It is there to provide local functions, such as identifying multiple stations that share a single ATM interface. The GFC eld is typically not used and is set to a default value. VPI and VCI: One VCI occupies 16 bits, one VPI of a UNI cell 8 bits, and one VPI of an NNI cell 12 bits. VPI and VCI are valid only on the link level. The PT eld occupies 3 bits. The rst bit indicates whether the cell contains user data or control data. If the cell contains user data, the second bit indicates congestion, and the third bit indicates whether the cell is the last in a series of cells that represent a single AAL5 frame. CLP: When the trafc is heavy, CLP determines the cells to be discarded (CLP = 1) and the cells not to be discarded (CLP = 0). The HEC eld protects the information of the cell header and delimits cells.
11-10
ATM Layer
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Layer
11-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Virtual Channels and Paths

On a physical level ATM connects via the specication of Virtual Paths (VPs) and Virtual Channels (VCs). A Virtual Channel will be located inside a Virtual Path. A Virtual Channel Identier (VCI) will identify the Virtual Channel and the Virtual Path Identier (VPI) will identify the Virtual Path (VP). In total we could have up to 256 addresses for a VP User to Network Interface (UNI) and 4096 for a VP Network to Network Interface (NNI). When VCIs are used, up to 216 channels per path can be addressed.
Use of Virtual Channels and Paths

A virtual channel provides an end-to-end connection, referred to as a Virtual Channel Connection. This connection in turn may consist of a number of VC and VP components. These components are illustrated opposite and are dened as follows: Virtual Channel Link A virtual channel link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutive ATM entities where a VCI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, between an ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches. Virtual Channel Connection A virtual channel connection is a concatenation of virtual channel connections. Virtual Path Link A virtual path link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutive ATM entities where a VPI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, between an ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches. Virtual Path Connection A virtual path connection is a concatenation of virtual path connections.
11-12
Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Path (VP)
ATM Path
Virtual Channel (VC)
Each VP within the physical layer has a different VPI value Each VC within a VP has a different VCI value
Use of Virtual Channels and Paths
Virtual Channel Connection Endpoints Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Channel Link Virtual Channel Link
ATM END SYSTEM
VP Switch
VC Switch VC Switch - VCI and VPI values change
ATM END SYSTEM
Virtual Path Link
Virtual Path Link
Virtual Path Connection Virtual Path Connection Endpoints
11-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching

When addressing is carried out on VP level only a VP address would be needed since all the VCs are inside the VP. Therefore we would only switch on VP level like illustrated in the diagram. If however VCs need to be switched a VP Switch combined with a VC Switch would be needed. The switching in ATM could get complicated at times therefore special tools have been developed to help with this aspect.
11-14
Version 1 Rev 0

VC Switch
Endpoint of VPC
VP Switch
VP Switch
Representation of VP Switching
Representation of VC and VP Switching
11-15
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL)

This part describes the functions and services of ATM adaptation layer, and the service functions of the SAAL and Q.AAL2.
Functions of the ATM Adaptation Layer

The ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) is right above the ATM layer. The AAL adapts higher layer applications to the ATM layer. For various types of service, the AAL performs the adaptation in different ways. It segments data from the upper layer into Service Date Units SDUs. Each SDU has 48 bytes. The AAL reassembles and restores the SDUs from the ATM layer, and then transfers them to the upper layer. To increase the ATM switching rate, the AAL performs all QoS related functions such as cell loss handling, misdelivery, delay, and variation.
Types of Services at the ATM Adaptation Layer

Different services have different requirements for the timing of, the bit rates of, and the connection mode for the source and the sink. According to these requirements, ITU-T classies services into four categories: A, B, C, and D and denes them as AAL1, AAL2, AAL3/4, and AAL5 respectively. AAL1 AAL1, a connection-oriented service, is suitable for handling Constant Bit Rate (CBR) sources , such as voice and videoconferencing. ATM transports CBR trafc using circuit-emulation services. AAL1 requires timing synchronization between the source and the destination. For this reason, AAL1 depends on a medium, such as SONET, that supports clocking. AAL2 Another trafc type has timing requirements like CBR but tends to be bursty in nature. This is called Variable Bit Rate (VBR) trafc. This typically includes services characterized as packetized voice or video that do not have a constant data transmission speed but that do have requirements similar to constant bit rate services. AAL2 is suitable for VBR trafc. The AAL2 process uses 44 bytes of the cell payload for user data and reserves 4 bytes of the payload to support the AAL2 processes. VBR trafc is characterized as either real-time (VBR-RT) or as non-real-time (VBR-NRT). AAL2 supports both types of VBR trafc. AAL3/4 AAL3/4 supports both connection-oriented and connectionless data. It was designed for network service providers and is closely aligned with Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS). AAL3/4 is used to transmit SMDS packets over an ATM network. AAL5 AAL5 is the primary AAL for data and supports both connection-oriented and connectionless data. It is used to transfer most non-SMDS data, such as classical IP over ATM and LAN Emulation (LANE). AAL5 also is known as the Simple and Efcient Adaptation Layer (SEAL).
11-16
Version 1 Rev 0

Class A Timing Relation Required Class B Class C Class D
Not Required
Bit Rate
Constant
Variable Connection Orientated
Available
Unspecified Connection Less
Connection Rate Emulation of Circuits CPCM AAL 1
Examples
Variable Bit Rate Video
Connection Orientated Data Transmission
Connection Less Data Transmission
Service Type to be used
AAL 2
AAL 3/4 or AAL 5
11-17
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Service Characteristics

Below is the description of ATM services, which are used for conguration of the ATM layer, including CBR, RTVBR, NRTVBR and UBR. Constant Bit Rate (CBR): A service that does not implement error check, ow control or other processing. Variable Bit Rate (VBR): This service is sub-classied into realtime transmission (RT-VBR) and non-realtime transmission (NRT-VBR). RT-VBR is used to describe a service featuring variable data streams and strict realtime requirement, (e.g. interactive compressed video such as video conference). NRT-VBR is used on the communication occasions requiring timing transmission. In such cases, some delays and variations, e.g., those in E-mail transmission, can be accepted by the application. Unspecied Bit Rate (UBR): This is a service that does not make any commitment or feedback to congestion. It is suitable for transmitting IP datagrams. In case of congestion, UBR cells will be discarded. However, neither relevant feedback nor the request for slowing down the transmission speed will be returned to the sender. The RNC5000 also supports UBR+, which guarantees a the minimum cell rate.
11-18
Version 1 Rev 0

Service characteristic Guaranteed bandwidth Y CBR Y RT-VBR Y NRT-VBR N UBR
Applicable to realtime communication
Applicable to burst communication
Feedback on congestion
11-19
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM QoS
ATM QoS
ATM supports QoS guarantees comprising trafc contract, trafc shaping, and trafc policing. A trafc contract species an envelope that describes the intended data ow. This envelope species values for peak bandwidth, average sustained bandwidth, and burst size, among others. When an ATM end system connects to an ATM network, it enters a contract with the network, based on QoS parameters. Trafc shaping is the use of queues to constrain data bursts, limit peak data rate, and smooth jitters so that trafc will t within the promised envelope. ATM devices are responsible for adhering to the contract by means of trafc shaping. ATM switches can use trafc policing to enforce the contract. The switch can measure the actual trafc ow and compare it against the agreed-upon trafc envelope. If the switch nds that trafc is outside of the agreed-upon parameters, it can set the Cell Loss Priority (CLP) bit of the offending cells. Setting the CLP bit makes the cell discard eligible, which means that any switch handling the cell is allowed to drop the cell during periods of congestion.
11-20
ATM QoS
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM QoS
Parameter Peak cell rate Sustainable cell rate Minimum cell rate Cell delay variation tolerance Abbreviations PCR SCR MCR Meaning Max. cell transmission rate (cell/s) Long-term average cell transmission rate (cell/s) Minimum cell transmission rate
CDVT
Max. tolerable cell jitter (0.1s) Indicating which cells can be discarded (CLP=1), and which cells had better not be discarded (CLP=0) when congestion occurs to the network Tagging the cells with CLP=0
Cell loss priority
CLP
Tag
TAGGING
11-21
Version 1 Rev 0
E1/T1 Architecture
E1/T1 Architecture
Logical Links
We have seen some of the mediums over which the data is transmitted, now let us consider the format of the data that is carried over these mediums. In GSM all the data is in digital form, and the path that the data takes is called a logical link. The format of the data is dependent on where in the system the data is and what sort of data needs to be transferred.
E1
In the European GSM system the basic building block of data that gets carried around the network is based around the multiplexed 2.048 Mbit/s frame. This frame contains 32 channels of 64 Kbit/s. 30 are used for user information. Channel 0 is reserved for timing and synchronisation and channel 16 is used for signalling. E1 also species the sampling rate, frequency bandwidth, bits per sample, time slots per frame, output bit rate, encoding law and the dedicated signalling and synchronisation channels.
T1
T1 is the American version of E1. There are signicant differences in the make up of the TDM frame. T1 uses 24 time slots per frame, with 24 PCM channels per frame. The output bit rate is 1.544 Mbit/s and the signalling used in the frame is only used once every 6th frame, instead of every frame in E1.
11-22
E1/T1 Architecture
Version 1 Rev 0
E1/T1 Architecture
E1 Frequency Range Sample Rate Bits per Sample Time Slots per Frame Output Bit Rate Encoding Law Signalling Capabilities 300 - 3400Hz 8000Hz 8 32 2.048 Mbps A LAW TS0 Sync TS16 Signalling T1/DS1 Frequency Sampling Rate Bits per Sample Bits per Frame PCM Channels per Frame Output Bit Rate Encoding Law Signalling Capabilities 300 - 3400Hz 8000Hz 8 193 24 1.544 Mbps Law 1st bit in frame - Sync 1 bit in timeslots 6 and 12
11-23
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping

The ATM cell is mapped into bits 9 to 128 and bits 137 to 256 (i.e. time slots 1 to 15 and time slots 17 to 31) of the 2048 kbit/s frame as specied in ITU-T Recommendation G.704[2] and as shown in the Figure opposite. The ATM cell octet structure shall be aligned with the octet structure of the frame. There shall be no relationship between the beginning of an ATM cell and the beginning of an 2048 kbit/s transmission frame. Since the frame payload capacity (30 octets) is not an integer multiple of cell length (53 octets), ATM cells will cross the E1 frame boundary.
11-24
Version 1 Rev 0

TS0 Synch ATM Mapping Field 15 Octets TS16 Sig ATM Mapping Field 15 Octets
125 s E1 frames - 256 bits per frame
11-25
Version 1 Rev 0
E1 Link Multiplexing
The standard E1 and T1 streams can be further multiplexed to put more channels over one transmission path.
11-26
Version 1 Rev 0
E1 Link Multiplexing E1 Series Hierarchies

E1 2.048 Mb/s E2 8.448 Mb/s E3 34.368 Mb/s E4 139.264 Mb/s E5 564.992 Mb/s
30 TCH x4 120 TCH x4 480 TCH x4 1,920 TCH 7,680 TCH x4
11-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a methodology which provides a modular bandwidth, for user access to ATM networks and for connection between ATM network elements, at rates between the traditional order multiplex level. An example is to achieve rates between the DS1/E1 and DS3/E3 levels in the asynchronous digital hierarchies. DS2/E2 physical links are not necessarily readily available throughout a given network. Therefore the introduction of ATM Inverse Multiplexers provides an effective method of combining the transport bandwidths of multiple links (e.g., DS1/E1 links) grouped to collectively provide higher intermediate rates. The ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. The gure opposite provides a simple illustration of the ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique in one direction. The same technique applies in the opposite direction. IMA groups terminate at each end of the IMA virtual link. In the transmit direction, the ATM cell stream received from the ATM layer is distributed on a cell by cell basis, across the multiple links within the IMA group. At the far-end, the receiving IMA unit recombines the cells from each link, on a cell by cell basis, recreating the original ATM cell stream. The aggregate cell stream is then passed to the ATM layer. The IMA interface periodically transmits special cells that contain information that permit reconstruction of the ATM cell stream at the receiving end of the IMA virtual link. The receiver end reconstructs the ATM cell stream after accounting for the link differential delays, smoothing CDV introduced by the control cells, etc. These cells, dened as IMA Control Protocol (ICP) cells, provide the denition of an IMA frame. The transmitter must align the transmission of IMA frames on all links. This allows the receiver to adjust for differential link delays among the constituent physical links. Based on this required behavior, the receiver can detect the differential delays by measuring the arrival times of the IMA frames on each link. At the transmitting end, the cells are transmitted continuously. If there are no ATM layer cells to be sent between ICP cells within an IMA frame, then the IMA transmitter sends ller cells to maintain a continuous stream of cells at the physical layer. The insertion of Filler cells provides cell rate decoupling at the IMA sublayer. The Filler cells should be discarded by the IMA receiver.
11-28
Version 1 Rev 0
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Inverse Multiplexing and De-multiplexing of ATM cells
IMA Group PHY Physical Link #0 IMA Group PHY
PHY
Single ATM CellStream from ATM Layer
Physical Link #1
PHY
Original ATM Cell Stream to ATM Layer
PHY
Physical Link #2
PHY
Tx direction: cells distributed across links in round robin sequence Rx direction: cells recombined into single ATM stream
IMA Frames
IMA Frame 2
ATM ATM ATM F ICP2 F
IMA Frame 1
F ATM F ICP1 ATM
IMA Frame 0
F ATM F ICP0 Link 0
M-1 F
1 F
0 F
M-1 ATM
M-1
1 F
0 F Link 1
ICP2 ATM
ICP1 ATM ATM ATM ATM
ICP0 ATM
ATM ATM ICP2
ATM
ATM ICP1 ATM ATM
ATM ICP0 ATM
Link 2
Time
ICP1 ICP Cell in Frame # 1
Filler Cell
ATM ATM Layer Cell
11-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

With the advent of fully digital and synchronous networks the CCITT dened a new multiplexing hierarchy called Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). In the USA is called Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) with the two major differences being terminology and the basic line rates used (SONET - 51.84 Mbps). SDH uses a basic transmission rate of 155.52 Mbps (abbreviated to 155 Mbps) and multiples of 4n. This basic rate is known as a Synchronous Transport Module level 1 (STM-1), higher rates are STM-4 and STM-16. As with PDH, the signal is repetitive frames with a repeat period of 125s. Any of the PDH rates can be multiplexed into the STM-1. The main advantages of SDH are: It allows direct access to tributary signals without demultiplexing the composite signal. It supports advance operations, administration and maintenance by dedicating channels for this purpose. The network can therefore be recongured under software control from remote terminals. Overhead bytes have been preserved for growth to support services and technologies of the future.
11-30
Version 1 Rev 0

SDH Bit Rates Synchronous Transport Module STM - 1 STM - 4 STM - 16 STM - N Transmission Rate 155.52 Mbps 622.08 Mbps 2,488.32 Mbps N x 155.52 Mbps
11-31
Version 1 Rev 0
SDH Drop and Insert
SDH Drop and Insert

SDH overcomes the limitations of plesiochronous networks, and will allow transmission networks to evolve to meet the demands of emerging broadband services.
Network Simplication
Synchronous transmission equipment eliminates the multiplexer mountain, leading to lower equipment and maintenance costs, and improved service provisioning. The diagram shows how 2Mbps channels can be dropped and inserted from a Synchronous Transfer Module, Type 1 (STM-1) by means of remote commands at a network management station. The exibility of SDH transmission is attractive to carriers because it offers the potential of generating new revenues.
Survivability
SDH includes overheads for end-to-end monitoring and maintenance of transmission equipment; the network management station can immediately identify the failure of links and equipment. Furthermore, as shown in the diagram, an SDH network can be constructed with a self-healing ring architecture that automatically reroutes trafc until the faulty segment is repaired; there will be no disruption of service to the end user, allowing carriers to guarantee service levels.
Software Control
SDH also includes overheads for management channels; these are used for performance monitoring, equipment conguration, resource management, network security, inventory management, network planning and network design. Since all of these management operations can be performed remotely, SDH offers the possibility of centralised network management and provisioning, with associated cost savings.
Bandwidth on Demand
The exibility of SDH allows carriers to allocate network capacity dynamically in that users will be able to subscribe at very short notice to large bandwidth services e.g. video-conferencing. This feature opens up the possibility of providing new services e.g. high-speed LAN interconnection and High Denition TV.
11-32
SDH Drop and Insert
Version 1 Rev 0
SDH Drop and Insert

SDH Drop and Insert
155Mbps alternate routing using ring topology
SDH Mux
2Mbps interface
Management of 2Mbps traffic
SDH Mux
2Mbps interface
12
63
155Mbps
155Mb/s
SDH Mux 155Mbps SDH Mux

2Mbps interface 2Mbps interface
11-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Principles of SDH
Principles of SDH
Although a full description of SDH is beyond the scope of this course, this section will cover the main principles. The diagram shows the SDH multiplex structure, indicating how an STM is formed from various PDH trafc rates. The following terms are used in the diagram, and further explained below: C - Container VC - Virtual Container TU - Tributary Units TUG - Tributary Unit Group AU - Administrative Unit AUG - Administrative Unit Group STM - Synchronous Transfer Module
The following table lists the container size sufces used when referring to equivalent PDH trafc rates within SDH signals: Container Sufx 0 11 12 21 22 31 32 4 Bit rate kbps 64 1,554 2,048 6,312 8,448 34,368 44,736 139,264
11-34
Principles of SDH
Version 1 Rev 0
Principles of SDH
SDH Mult iplex Struc ture
x1 STM-N AUG AU-4 VC-4 x3 x3 TUG -3 x7 AU-3 VC-3 C-3 45 Mbit/ s 34 Mbit/ s C-4 140 M bit/s
x1
TU3
VC-3
x7 TUG -2
x1 x3
TU2
VC-2
C-2
6 Mbit/ s
x4
TU12
VC-1 2
C-1 2
2 Mbit/ s
TU11
VC-1 1
C-1 1
1.5 M bit/s
11-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Typical UMTS ATM Transport Network

The diagram opposite shows a typical implementation of an ATM transport network to support the UMTS interfaces. The UMTS nodes as shown are connected to a single SDH ring, whereas there may actually be several rings involved depending on the network providers conguration and may include PDH interfaces as well. Node Bs use E1 physical interfaces and in the case where multiple E1s are used IMA is utilised by the Node B. The ATM Mux shown in the gure is expected to provide E1 (VC-12) to STM-1 (VC-4) mapping and vice versa in addition to providing IMA and reverse IMA capability. For a large number of Node Bs, the transport network will have to provide a signicant number of E1 interfaces. The ATM switch will be utilised for VP and VC switching and will be expected to provide aggregation of logical interfaces to physical interfaces via VP and VC switching. The ATM network is also expected to be congurable to limit the throughput of a given physical interface. For example, the RNC STM-1 physical interfaces need to be limited to a bandwidth of 100Mbps due to the hardware limitations.
Daisy Chaining
From USR 2.0 it will be possible to congure Node Bs in a daisy chain. All types of daisy chain are supported with the exception of closed loop. Up to 3 Node Bs (4 including hub node B) can be daisy chained.
Circuit Emulation
From USR 2.0 the node B has the ability to terminate an ATM AAL1 connection and generate a circuit data stream for use by another piece of network equipment connected to the Node B. Using circuit emulation, the E1 connections are routed rst through the UMTS base station where it uses its ATM data, and converts the ATM AAL1 data to circuit data. The resulting circuit data is sent out another E1 connection to the attached network equipment. This is likely to be a BTS as operators move from GSM to UMTS.
ATM Protection Switch

From USR 2.0 this feature provides higher availability radio network system, especially improved availability, when it is used in addition to a lower layer protection (e.g. SDH). This is done by providing 1:1 redundancy for important Permanent Virtual Circuits(PVCs), these are NCP PVC, ALCAP PVC, NodeB OM PVC, it is set by conguration. The system switches from the primary PVCs to the secondary ones automatically under the following conditions: Detection of signal failure of the primary PVCs Detection of signal degradation of the primary PVCs OAM command from operator Others scenarios specied in I.630 not covered in this course. To determine that a PVC is not functioning properly, the equipment collects PM statistics on quality of the PVC (lost packets, buffer overow, etc), in order to indicate to the OAM that a switch to the secondary PVC is needed.
11-36
Version 1 Rev 0

Ethernet (Option under investigation) STM-1
RNC
OMC
STM-1 Ethernet
ATM Switch
MSCu
RNC
STM-1
SDH Ring (STM-1/STM-4/STM-16)

Node B Node B
E1, IMA E1, IMA
ATM Switch ATM Mux

STM-1 E1, IMA STM-1
SGSN
E1, IMA
Node B
Node B Node B
BTS
RNC
Circuit Emulation
11-37
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction to IP RAN
With the IP transport technology, the IP RAN feature enables IP transport on the Iub interface. The IP RAN feature is implemented to: Provide enough transmission bandwidth for high speed data services such as HSDPA Greatly reduce OPEX for transport and operation and maintenance Provide more exible networking for the operator to reduce network deployment costs The IP RAN feature yields the following benets: Fully utilizing rich IP network resources. Mainstream data communication networks are based on IP transport. They have multiple access modes and large-scale deployment. The IP RAN feature enables the operator to fully utilize the existing IP network resources for Iub networking. Economical IP network construction. While facing the competition from the ATM network, the more economical IP network is preferred by a number of vendors. Following the trend in network migration to protect the operators investment. The IP transport technology is taking the lead in the data communication eld, and will dominate this eld in the future. The IP RAN can be congured in three different ways: TDM network Data network Hybrid transport network
TDM Network
In TDM networking mode, the RNC and NodeBs support IP over PPP over E1, which can be based on PDH/SDH or Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). Benets: ensures security and QoS. Line clock signals can be extracted. Restrictions: relatively high costs of E1 leasing
11-38
Version 1 Rev 0
NodeB
RNC
TDM Networking
NodeB
IP over PPP over E1
11-39
Version 1 Rev 0
Data Network
The data network can be any of the following three types: Layer 2 network, for example, metropolitan area Ethernet Layer 3 network MSTP network The data network can be accessed through FE or E1. A common IP network has the following benets and restrictions: Benets: good availability and relatively low costs of leasing Restrictions: low security without QoS assurance. The requirements for realtime services cannot be satised. An IP network with assured QoS or a private network has the following benets and restrictions: Benets: high security and assured QoS Restrictions: relatively high costs.
11-40
Version 1 Rev 0
NodeB
Router Router
Router
Router
RNC
Data Networking
NodeB
IP accessed via FE or E1
11-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Hybrid Transport Network
Hybrid transport enables services of different QoSs to be transported in different paths: The speech service with high QoS requirements is carried on the private network such as PDH and SDH Data services with low QoS requirements are carried on the data network such as Ethernet. The hybrid transport network has the following benets and restrictions: Benets: exible to meet different requirements Restrictions: complicated management. The relation between the transmission on the Iub interface and the transmission technologies is as follows: Control plane on the Iub interface: To reduce signaling delay and connection time, data on the control plane for the Iub interface is carried on the private network.
User plane on the Iub interface: Realtime services are carried by private networks whereas non-realtime services are carried by Ethernet.
The IP hybrid transport technology for the Iub interface has the following characteristics: The two paths from the RNC to the NodeB can connect to two transport networks with different QoS requirements either: Through different ports, or Through the same port that connects to the external data equipment according to Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)
When the bandwidth of the low QoS network is restricted, low QoS services can be carried on the high QoS network. When the bandwidth of the high QoS network is limited, the RNC reduces the rate of the low QoS services that are carried on high QoS network, or the RNC rejects the access of high QoS services if no low QoS services are carried on the high QoS network. The mapping between types of services and transmission modes is congurable. The default mapping is as follows: The interactive service and the background service in the PS domain has low QoS requirements. The two types of services are carried on the high QoS network only when the bandwidth of the low QoS network is restricted. Other services have high QoS requirements such as Iub data on the control plane, RRC signaling, CS services, common channel data of cells, PS conversational service, and PS streaming service.
11-42
Version 1 Rev 0
TDM Networking High QoS
NodeB
Router Router
Router
Router
RNC
Data Networking
NodeB
Low QoS
11-43
Version 1 Rev 0
IP Transport Protocols on the Iub Interface

This part describes concepts of IP transport protocols on the Iub interface and includes: Concepts of Data Link Layer Protocols Internet Protocol (IP) Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) Point-tp-Point Protocol (PPP) Multilink Protocol (MP)
Concepts of Data Link Layer Protocols

This part describes the data link layer protocols related to IP transport. The protocols consists of PPP and MP. Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) The PPP is used on the data link layer. The PPP provides standard methods for encapsulating the multi-protocol datagrams on point-to-point links. These datagrams include IP, Internetwork Packet Exchange (IPX), and Apple Talk. As shown in the diagram opposite, the PPP consists of the following three parts: Link Control Protocol (LCP): used to congure, test, suspend, or remove a data link. Network Control Protocol (NCP): used to congure parameters at the network layer for communications between the equipment. The NCP in this part refers to Network control Protocol, which is different from NodeB Control Port (NCP). Extended protocols, such as MP: used to combine multiple physical links into a logical link to provide a relatively high bandwidth and to enable quick data transfer. Motorola RNC uses the MP protocol through the addition of Multi Link PPP (MLPPP) data. Multilayer Protocol (MP) With the wide application of PPP, MP comes into being as the extended protocol of the PPP. The MP provides relatively large bandwidth to efciently transport the data. In addition, the MP dynamically allocates the link resources to effectively save the valuable resources. The MP protocol can exibly arrange multiple independent physical links between point-to-point systems. It provides a virtual link for the whole system, and the bandwidth of the virtual link is the sum of bandwidths of the N (N 1) physical links. Along the development of network technologies, bandwidth is signicantly increased. In this sense, MP is less applied in practice.
11-44
Version 1 Rev 0

IP IPX Other Protocols
Network Layer
IPCP
IPXCP
Other Control Protocols
Network Control Protocol PPP Authentication and other options Link Control Protocol Data Link Layer
Synchronous or Asynchronous Physical Media
Physical Layer
11-45
Version 1 Rev 0

Internet Protocol (IP)
The IP provides a connectionless service between networks. It denes the rules and details for data communication. It is used along with the TCP to provide guaranteed data transfer. IPv4 and IPv6 The current and most popular network layer protocol of the TCP/IP is IPv4 that was launched in 1981. IPv4 will be gradually replaced by IPv6 that was launched in 1995. Principles for IP Address Planning When using TCP/IP to communicate, each communication entity needs an IP address. In the application of the RAN, adhere to the following principles when planning the IP addresses: IP addresses and subnet masks must be valid. Ensure that the network number cannot be all-zeros and that the host number cannot be all-zeros or all-ones. The IP addresses of classes A, B, and C are valid, but those of classes D and E are invalid. Do not set the IP address to a loopback address of 127.X.X.X. IP Address Structure In the IP network, the IP address should be assigned to the hosts. If you connect a computer to the Internet, you need to apply for an IP address from the Internet Service Provider (ISP). The length of the IP address is 32 bits. The IP address consists of the following two parts: Network number (net-id): The rst bits are called class segments (class bits) that is used to identify the class of an IP address. Host number (host-id): identies different hosts in the same network. IP addresses are categorized into ve classes, as shown in the diagram opposite. You can identify an IP address class by its rst bits. The IP addresses of classes A, B, and C are most commonly used. IP addresses of class D are used for multicasting. IP addresses of class E are reserved.
11-46
Version 1 Rev 0

IP Address Range Note that some IP addresses are reserved for special purposes. The table below describes the classied IP addressing. Network Type A Address Range 0.0.0.0 127.255.255.255 Available Range 1.0.0.0 126.0.0.0 Description An all-zero host number means that the IP address is the network address for network routing. An all-one host number means that the IP address is used to broadcast messages to all the hosts on the network. When the DHCP is used, the local host can take 0.0.0.0 as the temporary IP address but never as the valid destination address. The IP address with network number of 0 represents the current network that can be referenced by other computers without knowing its network number. All the IP addresses in the 127.X.X.X format are reserved for loopback testing. The packets sent to this address are not sent to lines. The packets are handled internally as input packets. An all-zero host number means that the IP address is the network address for network routing. An all-one host number means that the IP address is used to broadcast messages to all the hosts on the network. An all-zero host number means that the IP address is the network address for network routing. An all-one host number means that the IP address is used to broadcast messages to all the hosts on the network.
128.0.0.0 191.255.255.255
128.0.0.0 191.254.0.0
192.0.0.0 223.255.255.255
192.0.0.0 223.255.254 .0
D E
224.0.0.0 239.255.255.255 240.0.0.0 255.255.2 55.255
None None
IP addresses of class D is used for multicasting. Reserved. The IP address of 255.255.255.255 is used for broadcasting in the LAN.
11-47
Version 1 Rev 0

SCTP
The Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP) is mainly used for reliably transmitting datagrams through unreliable network. Compared with the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP), the SCTP has the following advantages: Supporting the transmission of datagrams that are not delimitated by the upper layer Having better real-time performance Having higher security Avoiding the blocking of line headers Supporting the multi-homing function
The SCTP is more suitable than the TCP for the signaling transmission of higher requirements for real-time performance, security and reliability. Therefore, it has a promising prospect for applications. SCTP Endpoint The SCTP endpoint is the logical transmitter or receiver of SCTP packets. The SCTP endpoint on a multi-homing host can be either a group of valid destination transport addresses for data transmission to the peer host, or a group of valid originating transport addresses for transmitting SCTP packets. All the transport addresses used by an SCTP endpoint must use the same port number but can use multiple IP addresses. The transport address used by an SCTP endpoint at a time must be unique. A transport address is dened by the network layer address, transport layer protocols, and port number. When the SCTP protocol works on the IP transport layer, the transport address is dened by the IP address and SCTP port number. Then, the SCTP protocol acts as the transport layer protocol. SCTP Association SCTP association is the mapping between two SCTP endpoints. It involves two SCTP endpoints and protocol status data. The protocol status data includes verication tag and transport sequence number. SCTP association is uniquely identied by the transport address of the SCTP endpoint that uses the SCTP association. There is a maximum of one SCTP association between two SCTP endpoints. The SCTP message consists of the common header and the chunks the diagram on the next page shows the SCTP message structure. Multiple chunks can be bundled and transmitted in one datagrams to save bandwidth.
11-48
Version 1 Rev 0
11-49
Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and Layer 2/3 Switching
This allows packet forwarding decisions to be made using the data link layer (Ethernet etc). Layer 2 Switching Fundamentally a layer 2 device is a switch with physical ports. The main benet of Layer 2 switching is to make efcient use of network bandwidth. The rst switches in fact sent trafc arriving on all input ports to all the output ports without any processing. As the networks become more complex it can be that, two or more ports on the same switch are connected to the same LAN. This means that packets arriving at the switch leave on multiple ports onto the same LAN, hence duplicate packets are created which will lead to congestion in the network. Layer 2 switching eliminates looping trafc by dening a Spanning Tree and uses a Spanning Tree Protocol to congure the spanning tree. The Spanning Tree Protocol identies ports that are connected to the same LAN and congures the switch to send any given packet out only on one port that is connected to a given LAN. However the Spanning Tree Protocol keeps a track of these secondary ports and allows trafc to be passed if the primary port goes OOS for any reason. Layer 3 Switching A layer 2 device is a switch that communicates using frames at layer 1 over physical ports. Whereas a Layer 3 device is a router that communicates with packets. and a packet is encapsulated inside of a frame. A router has interfaces for connection into the network medium i.e. Ethernet. The Ethernet frame contains a source layer 2 MAC address and a destination layer 2 MAC address. The IP packet contains a source layer 3 IP address and a destination layer 3 IP address. The router maintains a routing table of network paths it has discovered. The router will examine the layer 3 IP destination address of the packet. It will examine the routing table and determine if a path exists. VLANs VLAN processing is an extension to the concept of Layer 2 switching. The VLAN adds a four byte tag eld between the data link layer header (i.e. Ethernet) and the network layer (i.e. IP). This tag contains among other things a VLAN Identier (VID) and associated user priority eld. VLAN switches look for this tag and make a switching decision based on the tag information that determines which port(s) to send the incoming packet out on. The VLAN protocol denes three types of trafc: Untagged Priority Tagged VLAN Tagged. Untagged packets are packets without any VLAN tag. Priority tagged packets are packets with a VLAN tag, but a VID of zero (the NULL VID) and a valid priority eld within the VLAN tag. VLAN tagged packets contain a VLAN tag with a valid VID eld (non-zero). VLAN-aware switches must be able to classify and forward packets of all three types in order to work with legacy equipment as well as other VLAN-aware equipment. Incoming packets may be untagged, priority tagged, or VLAN tagged. Depending on how the switch is congured, an untagged packet may leave priority-or- VLAN-tagged. Incoming VLAN tagged packets may leave untagged or even tagged with a different VID. There are also multiple ways of conguring what constitutes a VLAN. The VLAN specications dene a port-based approach where each port is a member of a particular VLAN. All trafc coming or going on this port would be a member of the congured VLAN. There is also a MAC-based approach to VLAN processing where membership on a VLAN is dened by the source MAC address of a remote host.
11-50
Version 1 Rev 0

Ethernet VLAN V18 VPN Ethernet VLAN V18
R NodeB
RNC
11-51
Version 1 Rev 0
11-52
Pub-Date
Annexe A
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 12
Annexe A
12-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Annexe A
12-2
Pub-Date
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe selected UMTS Signalling Flow procedures.
12-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Paging for a UE in Idle Mode

This example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC Idle Mode. The UE may be paged for a CS or PS service. Since the UE is in RRC Idle Mode, the location is only known at CN level and therefore paging is distributed over a dened geographical area (e.g. LA). NOTE: The example below illustrates scenario where LA spans across 2 RNCs. 1. The CN initiates the paging of a UE over a LA spanning two RNCs (i.e. RNC1 and RNC2) via a RANAP message called the Paging message. Parameters Sent: CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity, Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause. 2. 3. Paging of UE performed by cell1 using Paging Type 1 message. Paging of UE performed by cell2 using Paging Type 1 message. The UE detects page message from RNC1 (as example) and the procedure for NAS signalling connection establishment follows. NAS message transfer can now be performed. This procedure described for RRC idle mode, applies also to the RRC connected mode in the case of CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states.
12-4
Version 1 Rev 0

UE Node B 1.1 Node B 2.1 RNC 1 RNC 2 CN
1. Paging RANAP RANAP
RANAP
1. Paging
RANAP
2.PCCH: Paging Type 1 3.PCCH: Paging Type 1
12-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode

This will occur in case the position of the UE is already known; a mobility management session will be active at this stage. Two possible solutions exists: The UTRAN co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection. The UE co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection. The following example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC Connected Mode (CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH states) when the UTRAN co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection using DCCH. 1. CN initiates the paging of a UE via RANAP message Paging Request Message. Parameters used: CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity, Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause. 2. SRNC sends RRC message Paging Type 2.
12-6
Version 1 Rev 0

UE Serving RNC CN
RANAP
1. Paging
RANAP
RRC
2. DCCH Paging Type 2
RRC
12-7
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Connection Establishment

The following example shows establishment of a RRC connection in Dedicated Transport Channel (DCH) state. The following sequence are identied: 1. The UE initiates set-up of an RRC connection by sending RRC message Connection Request on CCCH. Parameters used: Initial UE Identity, Establishment cause, Initial UE Capability. 2. The SRNC decides to use a DCH for this RRC connection, allocates RNTI and radio resources for the RRC connection. When a DCH is to be set-up, NBAP message Radio Link Setup Request is sent to Node B. Parameters used: Cell id, Transport Format Set, Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, UL scrambling code(FDD only), Time Slots (TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information. 3. Node B allocates resources, starts PHY reception, and responses with NBAP message, Radio Link Setup Response. Parameters used: Signalling link termination, Transport layer addressing information (AAL2 address, AAL2 Binding Identity) for the Iub Data Transport Bearer. 4. SRNC initiates set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. This request contains the AAL2 Binding Identity to bind the Iub Data Transport Bearer to the DCH. The request for set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer is acknowledged by Node B. 5./6. The Node B and SRNC establish synchronism for the Iub and Iur Data Transport Bearer by means of exchange of the appropriate DCH Frame Protocol frames Downlink Synchronisation and Uplink Synchronisation. Then Node B starts DL transmission. 7. Message RRC Connection Setup is sent on CCCH from SRNC to UE. Parameters: Initial UE Identity, RNTI, Capability update Requirement, Transport Format Set, Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, DL scrambling code (FDD only), Time Slots (TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information. 8. Message RRC Connection Setup Complete is sent on DCCH from UE to SRNC. Parameters: Integrity information, ciphering information.
12-8
Version 1 Rev 0

UE
RRC
Node B Serving RNS

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request
Serving RNC
RRC
Allocate RNTI Select L1 and L2 parameters
NBAP
Start Rx
2. Radio Link Setup Request
NBAP
NBAP
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP
4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup
DCH DCH
Start Rx
5. Downlink Synchronisation 6. Uplink Synchronisation
DCH DCH
RRC RRC
7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup 8. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete
RRC RRC
12-9
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC DCH Release
RRC DCH Release

This example shows RRC Connection release of a dedicated channel, in the case of macrodiversity on two Nodes Bs; the rst one connected to the Serving RNC, the second one to the Drift RNC. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. The CN initiates the release of a dedicated Channel by sending the message Iu Release Command to the SRNC. Parameters used: Cause. The SRNC conrms the release by sending an Iu Release Complete message to the CN. Parameters used: Data volume Report (if data volume reporting to PS is required). The SRNC initiates release of Iu Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. Message RRC Connection Release from SRNC to UE to initiate the RRC connection release. Parameters: Cause. Message RRC Connection Release Complete from UE to SRNC to conrm the RRC connection release. The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Node B (SRNC). The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Drift RNC. The Drift RNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Node B (Drift RNC). The Node B (SRNC) conrms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion Response to the SRNC.
10. The Node B (Drift RNC) conrms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion Response to the Drift RNC. 11. The Drift RNC conrms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion Response to the SRNC. 12. The Node B (SRNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. 13. The Node B (Drift RNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. 14. The Drift RNC initiates release of Iur Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.
12-10
RRC DCH Release
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC DCH Release

UE Node B
Drift RNS
Node B
Serving RNS
Drift RNC
Serving RNC
RANAP
CN
1. Iu Release RANAP Complete 2. Iu Release RANAP RANAP Complete 3. ALCAP Iu Bearer Release
RRC RRC
4. RRC connection Release 5. RRC Connection Release Complete 6. Radio Link Deletion
RRC RRC NBAP
NBAP
RNSAP NBAP
8. Radio Link Deletion
7. Radio Link RNSAP Deletion
NBAP NBAP
NBAP NBAP
9. Radio Link Deletion Response
10. Radio Link Deletion Response
NBAP RNSAP
11. Radio Link Deletion RNSAP Response
12. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release 13. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release ALCAP Iur Bearer Release
12-11
Version 1 Rev 0
RA Update
RA Update
This example shows location registration when changing Routing Area including change of 3G SGSN when the UE is in MM idle state towards the 3G SGSN. The illustrated transfer of MM signalling to/from the UE uses an established RRC connection. This RRC connection can have been established beforehand due to ongoing inter-working between UE and 3G-MSC/VLR or be established only for this location registration procedure towards the 3G-SGSN. For each indicated MM message sent in this case to/from UE, the CN discriminator indicates 3G-SGSN. The following procedure will take place to perform the RA update: 1. The RRC connection is established, if not already done. The UE sends the initial message Routing Area Update Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI, etc.) to the new 3G-SGSN. The old P-TMSI and the old RAI are assigned data in UMTS. The SRNS transfers the message to the 3G-SGSN. The sending of this message to 3G-SGSN will also imply establishment of a signalling connection between SRNS and 3G-SGSN for the concerned UE. The UTRAN shall add the RAC and the LAC of the cell where the message was received before passing the message to the SGSN. The new 3G-SGSN send an SGSN Context Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI) to the old 3G-SGSN to get the IMSI for the UE. (The old RAI received from UE is used to derive the old 3G-SGSN identity/address.) The old 3G-SGSN responds with SGSN Context Response (e.g. IMSI, PDP context information and Authentication triplets). Security functions may be executed. The new 3G-SGSN informs the HLR of the change of 3G-SGSN by sending Update GPRS Location (IMSI, SGSN number, SGSN address) to the HLR. The HLR cancels the context in the old 3G-SGSN by sending Cancel Location (IMSI). The old 3G-SGSN removes the context and acknowledges with Cancel Location Ack. The HLR sends Insert Subscriber Data (IMSI, subscription data) to the new 3G-SGSN. The new 3G-SGSN acknowledges with Insert Subscriber Data Ack. The HLR acknowledges the Update GPRS Location by sending Update GPRS Location Acknowledge to the new 3G-SGSN. The new 3G-SGSN validates the UEs presence in the new RA. If due to regional, national or international restrictions the UE is not allowed to attach in the RA or if subscription checking fails, then the new 3G-SGSN rejects the Routing Area Update Request with an appropriate cause. If all checks are successful, then the new 3G-SGSN responds to the UE with Routing Area Update Accept (new P-TMSI, new RAI, etc.). The UE acknowledges the new P-TMSI with Routing Area Update Complete.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10. When the location registration procedure is nished, the 3G-SGSN may release the signalling connection towards the SRNS for the concerned UE. The SRNS will then release the RRC connection if there is no signalling connection between 3G-MSC/VLR and SRNS for the UE.
12-12
RA Update
Version 1 Rev 0
RA Update
UE SRNS New 3G_SGSN HLR Old 3G_SGSN
1. RRC connection establishment 1. RRC update required (old RAI, old P-TMSI) 2. SGSN Context Required (old P-TMSI, old RAI) 2. SGSN Context Resp. (IMSI, Auth.triplets) 3. Security Functions 4. Update GPRS Location 5. Cancel Location 5. Cancel Location Ack 6. Insert Subscriber Data 6. Insert Subscriber Data Ack 7. Update GPRS Location Ack 8. RA upd Accept (new RAI, new P-TMSI 9. RA update complete 10. Release 10. RRC connection release
12-13
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
SRNC Relocation
This example shows SRNS relocation when the source RNC and target RNC are connected to different 3G-MSC. The procedure is as follows: 1. The UTRAN makes the decision to perform the Serving RNC relocation procedure, including the decision of onto which RNC (Target RNC) the Serving RNC functionality is to be relocated. The source SRNC sends SRNC Relocation required messages to the MSC. This message includes parameters such as target RNC identier and an information eld that shall be passed transparently to the target RNC. Upon reception of SRNC Relocation required message the Anchor MSC prepares itself for the switch and determines from the received information that the SRNC relocation will (in this case) involve another MSC. The Anchor MSC will then send a Prepare SRNC Relocation Request to the applicable non-anchor MSC, including the information received from the Source RNC. The non-anchor MSC will send a SRNC Relocation Request message to the target RNC. This message includes information for building up the SRNC context, transparently sent from Source RNC (UE ID, No of connected CN nodes, UE capability information), and directives for setting up Iu user plane transport bearers. When Iu user plane transport bearers have been established, and target RNC has completed its preparation phase, SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 message is sent to the non-anchor MSC. The Prepare SRNC Relocation Response that is sent from non-anchor MSC to Anchor MSC will contain the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 received" command from the target RNC. When the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1" command has been received in the Anchor MSC, the user plane transport bearers has been allocated between the target RNC and Anchor MSC and the Anchor MSC is ready for the SRNC move. Then the Anchor MSC indicates the completion of preparation phase at the CN side for the SRNC relocation by sending the SRNC relocation proceeding 2 message to the Source RNC. When the source RNC has received the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 2" message, the source RNC sends a SRNC Relocation Commit message to the target RNC. The target RNC executes switch for all bearers at the earliest suitable time instance. Immediately after a successful switch at RNC, the target RNC (=SRNC) sends "SRNC Relocation Complete" message to the non-anchor MSC. This message is included by the non-anchor MSC in the "Complete SRNC relocation message" that is sent to the anchor MSC. Upon reception of this message, the Anchor-MSC switches from the old Iu transport bearers to the new ones. After a successful switch at the Anchor MSC, a release indication is sent towards the Source RNC. This will imply release of all UTRAN resources that were related to this UE. When the target RNC is acting as SRNC, it will send New MM System Information to the UE indicating e.g. relevant Routing Area and Location Area. Additional RRC information may then also be sent to the UE, e.g. new RNTI identity.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8. 9.
12-14
SRNC Relocation
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
UE
Source RNC Target RNC
1. SRNC Relocation Required 2. Prepare SRNC Relocation 3. SRNC Relocation Request 3. SRNC Relocation Proceeding 4. Prepare SRNC response 5. SRNC Reloc Proceed 2 (a) 6. SRNC Reloc Commit 7. SRNC Reloc Complete 9. New MM System Info 7. Complete SRNC Reloc 8. Release
Anchor MSC
HLR
Non-anchor MSC
(b)
10. Routing Area Update
12-15
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
12-16
Pub-Date
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
12-16
Pub-Date
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
12-16
Pub-Date
Glossary
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 13
Glossary
13-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Glossary
13-2
Pub-Date
Glossary of technical terms
Version 1 Rev 0

This Glossary of technical terms contains standard Motorola acronyms, abbreviations and numbers used throughout the documentation set.
A Interface - AUTO
3GPP 8-PSK A Interface Third Generation Partnership Project 8 Symbol Phase Shift Keying Interface between MSC and BSS. The interface is based on the use of one or more E1/T1 digital links. The channels on these links can be used for trafc or signalling. Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND and Ki. A single algorithm performing the function of A3 and A8. Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that produces ciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc. Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc using RAND and Ki. Anonymous Access ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (for real-time services) ( ITU-T I.363.2) ATM-Adaptation Layer 5 (non-real time) ( ITU-T I.363.5) Acknowledgement Request Bit ( used in LLC-protocol Logical Link Control) See Access Burst. Interface between a remote BSC and BTS. Motorola offers a GSM standard and a unique Motorola Abis interface. The Motorola interface reduces the amount of message trafc and thus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS. Asynchronous Balanced Mode Answer Bid Ratio. The ABR is the ratio of successful calls to total number of calls. As a measure of effective calls, it reects the performance of the total network AC-DC Power Supply module. Alternating Current. In electricity, AC occurs when charge carriers in a conductor or semiconductor periodically reverse their direction of movement. Household utility current in most countries is AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz (complete cycles per second). The RF current in antennas and transmission lines is another example of AC. An AC waveform can be sinusoidal, square, or sawtooth-shaped. Some AC waveforms are irregular or complicated. Square or sawtooth waves are produced by certain types of electronic oscillators, and by a low-end UPS when it is operating from its battery. Access Class (C0 to C15). Application Context. Automatic Congestion Control. A method by which congested switches automatically communicate their congestion level to other switches. (3GTS 22.011)
A3 A38 A5 A8 AA AAL-2 AAL-5 A-Bit AB Abis interface
ABM ABR
ac-dc PSM ac
AC AC ACC
13-3
Version 1 Rev 0

Access Burst ACCH ACK, Ack ACM The Access Burst is used by the MS to access the BTS. It carries RACH uplink from the MS to the BTS to start a call. Associated Control CHannel. Control information associated with TCH or DCCH. ACKnowledgement. Accumulated Call meter. The ACM is a function contained within the SIM. It accumulates the total units (in the home currency) for both the current call and all preceding calls. For security reasons, the SIM only allows the value of the ACM to be incremented, not decremented. Resetting of the ACM is only possible after entering PIN2. Address Complete Message. AC Power Interface Module. Used in M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS equipment. AC Power Supply Module. Used in M-Cell6 BTS equipment. Association Control Service Element. The ACSE is one of the three Application Service Elements (ASE) which reside in the application layer of the OSI protocol and act as an interface to the lower layer protocols. It is used by applications to create a title for identication. See also ASI and ROSE. Antenna Combining Unit. Analogue to Digital (converter). See ADC. ADministration Centre. Analogue to Digital Converter. A device that converts a signal that is a function of a continuous variable into a representative number sequence carrying equivalent information. Advanced Data Communications Control Protocol. A bit-oriented data-link-layer (DL) protocol used to provide point-to-point and point-to-multipoint transmission of data frames that contain error-control information. Note: ADCCP closely resembles high-level data link control (HDLC). Asynchronous Disconnected Mode ADMinistration processor. ADMINistration. Abbreviated Dialling Number. Abbreviated dialling is a telephone service feature that (a) permits the user to dial fewer digits to access a network than are required under the nominal numbering plan, and (b) is limited to a subscriber-selected set of frequently dialled numbers. Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. Differential pulse-code modulation (DPCM) in which the prediction algorithm is adjusted in accordance with specic characteristics of the input signal. Application Entity. The system-independent application activities that are made available as application services to the application agent.
ACM ACPIM AC PSM ACSE
ACU A/D ADC ADC
ADCCP
ADM ADM ADMIN ADN
ADPCM
AE
13-4
Version 1 Rev 0

AEC AEF AET Acoustic Echo Control. In a system, the reduction of the power level of an echo or the elimination of an echo. Additional Elementary Functions. Active Events Table. Alarms and events are sent to the Events Log in the GUI. Different operators will have different subscription lists. All alarms and events are sent to the AET before they are re-routed to different subscription lists. Automatic Frequency Control. A device or circuit that maintains the frequency of an oscillator within the specied limits with respect to a reference frequency. Absolute Frame Number. Automatic Gain Control. A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specied manner as a function of a specied parameter, such as received signal level. Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to assign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH. Authentication Header ( RFC 2402) Action indicator. Acquisition Indicator Articial Intelligence. A branch of computer science whose goal is to develop electronic devices that can operate with some of the characteristics of human intelligence. Among these properties are logical deduction and inference, creativity, the ability to make decisions based on past experience or insufcient or conicting information, and the ability to understand natural language. Alarm Interface Board. Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) A class of processor. The radio link between the BTS and the MS. See Application Layer. Access Link Control Application Part ( ITU-T Q.2630.1 / Q.2630.2) Acknowledged Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC) Amplitude Modulation. Modulation in which the amplitude of a carrier wave is varied in accordance with some characteristic of the modulating signal. Automatic Message Accounting (processor). A service feature that automatically records data regarding user-dialled calls. Acknowledged Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type) Adaptive Multi-Rate. The capability of operating at gross bit-rates of 11.4 kbit/s (half-rate) and 22.8 kbit/s (full-rate) over the air interface. Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A message broadcast to all MSs in a cell.
AFC
AFN AGC
AGCH AH Ai AI AI
AIB AICH AIO Air interface AL ALCAP AM AM
AMA AMD AMR
AM/MP
13-5
Version 1 Rev 0

ANSI American National Standards Institute. ANSI is the primary organisation for fostering the development of technology standards in the United States. ANSI works with industry groups and is the U.S. member of ISO and the IEC. Long established computer standards from ANSI include ASCII and SCSI. A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RF and vice versa. In GSM systems, transmits and receives RF signals between the BTS and MS. Advice of Charge. Advice of Charge Charging supplementary service. Advice of Charge Information supplementary service. Automatic Output Control. Application Process. CPCH Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Access Point Name ( Reference to a GGSN) See OSI RM. The Application Layer is the highest of seven hierarchical layers. It interfaces directly to, and performs common application services for, the application processes. It also issues requests to the Presentation Layer. The common application services provide semantic conversion between associated application processes. Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. The GSM available frequency is divided in two bands. Each band is divided into 200kHz slots called ARFCN. Each ARFCN is shared between 8 mobiles, each using it in turn. Each mobile uses the ARFCN for one TS (Timeslot) and then waits for its turn to come around again. A mobile has use of the ARFCN once per the TDMA frame. The combination of a TS number and ARFCN is called a physical channel. Automatic Repeat-reQuest. Error control for data transmission in which the receiver detects transmission errors in a message and automatically requests a retransmission from the transmitter. Address Resolution Protocol. A Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that dynamically binds a Network Layer (NL) IP address to a Data Link Layer (DL) physical hardware address, e.g., Ethernet address.(RFC 826) Application Server Access Stratum ( UMTS) Access Service Class Association Control Service Element. An ASE which provides an AP with the means to establish and control an association with an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentation layer (OMC).
Antenna
AoC AoCC AoCI AOC AP AP-AICH API APN Application Layer
ARFCN
ARQ
ARP
AS AS ASC ASCE
13-6
Version 1 Rev 0

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a standard developed by ANSI to dene how computers write and read characters. It is the most common format for text les in computers and on the Internet. In an ASCII le, alphabetic, numeric, and special characters are represented with a 7-binary digit binary number. 128 possible characters are dened. UNIX and DOS-based operating systems (except for Windows NT) use ASCII for text les. Windows NT uses a newer code, Unicode. IBMs System 390 servers use a proprietary 8-bit code called extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. Conversion programs allow different operating systems to change a le from one code to another. Application Service Element (OMC). A coherent set of integrated functions to help accomplish application communication, e.g., within an application entity (AE). Application Specic Entity (TCAP). Application Server - Incoming Leg Control Model Abstract Syntax Notation One. A formal notation used for describing data transmitted by telecommunications protocols, regardless of language implementation and physical representation of these data, whatever the application, whether complex or very simple.( ITU-T X.680 / X.681) Application Server - Outgoing Leg Control Model Alarm and Status Panel. Answer Seizure Ratio. The percentage of calls that are completed successfully. All Trunks Busy. An equipment condition in which all trunks (paths) in a given trunk group are busy. Attention-Command The interface between XCDR and BSC. Antenna Transceiver Interface. Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing and switching method utilising xed-length cells of 53 octets to support multiple types of trafc. ( ITU-T I.361) ATTach. Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Ensures the quality of telephone lines by means of a series of tests. ATTS can be initiated by either an operator command or by a command le, which can be activated at a predetermined time. Access Unit. Authentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides the functionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested by the system. Often a part of the HLR. AUThentication. AUTOmatic mode.
ASE
ASE AS-ILCM ASN.1
AS-OLCM ASP ASR ATB AT-Command Ater ATI ATM
ATT (ag) ATTS
AU AUC
AUT(H) AUTO
13-7
Version 1 Rev 0

B Interface - Byte
B Interface BA BAIC BAOC Baud Interface between MSC and VLR. BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in a cell for BCCH transmission. Barring of All Incoming Calls supplementary service. Barring of All Outgoing Calls supplementary service. The unit in which the information carrying capacity or signalling rate of a communication channel is measured. One baud is one symbol (state transition or level-transition) per second. This coincides with bits per second only for two-level modulation with no framing or stop bits Battery Backup Board. Base Band Hopping. Method of frequency hopping in which each transceiver at the base station is tuned to a different frequency, and the signal is switched to a different transceiver for each burst. Base station Colour Code. The BCC and the NCC are part of the BSIC. The BCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111. See also NCC and BSIC. Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used to broadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell or sector basis. Binary Coded Decimal. The representation of a decimal digit by a unique arrangement of no fewer than four binary digits. Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digital control circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites this is a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is located in the BTS cabinet. Bearer channel. Used in ISDN services to carry 64kbit/s of data, when used at full capacity. Broadcast Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) Bearer Capability Information Element. Specic GSM parameters in the Setup message are mapped into a BCIE for signalling to the network and within the PLMN. The BCIE is used to request a bearer service (BS) from the network. Bearer Control Tunneling Protocol ( ITU-T Q.1990) Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS which provides the base control function at a BTS site. The term no longer applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU). Base Controller Unit Power. Backward Error Correction BEGin Message ( TCAP) Bit Error Probability.
BBBX BBH
BCC
BCCH
BCD BCF
B channel BCH BCIE
BCTP BCU
BCUP BEC BEG BEP
13-8
Version 1 Rev 0

BER Bit Error Rate. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over some stipulated period. The BER is usually expressed as a coefcient and a power of 10; for example, 25 erroneous bits out of 100,000 bits transmitted would be 25 out of 105 or 25 x 10-5. Business Exchange Services. Bad Frame Indication. An indication of unsuccessfully decoded speech frames. See FER. Border Gateway Breakout Gateway Control Function Busy Hour. In a communications system, the sliding 60-minute period during which occurs the maximum total trafc load in a given 24-hour period. Busy Hour Call Attempt. A statistic based on call attempts that a switch processes during a BH. See also BH. Barring of all Incoming call supplementary service. Backward Indicator Bit Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits. See also T43. Bearer Independent Call Control ( ITU-T Q.1902.1 Q.1902.6) Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the Home PLMN Country supplementary service. See Reciprocal neighbour.. Balanced-line Interconnect Module. From BINary. An area in a data array used to store information. Also, a name for a directory that contain les stored in binary format. BootLoad. Also known as download. For example, databases and software can be downloaded to the NEs from the BSS. Block Error Rate BiLLiNG. Binary digit. A character used to represent one of the two states or digits (0 or 1) in the numeration system with a radix of two. Also, a unit of storage capacity. Bits per second (bps). A measure of data transmission speed. The number of binary characters (1s or 0s) transmitted in one second. For example, an eight-bit parallel transmission link which transfers one character (eight bits) per second is operating at 8 bps. A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which a parity check procedure is applied for error control purposes. Full rate trafc channel. See also Full Rate. Broadcast / Multicast Control ( 3GTS 25.324)
BES BFI BG BGCF BH
BHCA BI BIB BIB
BICC BIC-Roam Bi-directional neighbour BIM Bin
BL BLER BLLNG bit
bit/s
block Bm BMC
13-9
Version 1 Rev 0

BN BPF Bit Number. Number which identies the position of a particular bit period within a timeslot. Bandpass Filter. A lter that ideally passes all frequencies between two non-zero nite limits and bars all frequencies not within the limits. BCU Power Supply Module. Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN multipurpose user interface allowing simultaneous voice and data services provided over two clear 64 kb/s channels (B channels) and one clear 16 kb/s channel (D channel). The interface is also referred to as 2B+D. Base Station. See BSS. Basic Service (group). Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service that provides the capability for the transmission of signals between user-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used to support a bearer service may be identical to that used to support other types of telecommunication service. Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMN which has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. The BSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS) but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs (see BCF, BCU, and BSU). Maximum Countdown Value to be used by the mobile station ( Countdown Procedure) Basic Service Group. Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. Each cell has a BSIC. It is a local colour code that allows a mobile station to distinguish between different neighbouring base stations. The BSIC is an octet, consisting of three bits for the Network Colour Code (NCC) and three bits for the Base station Colour Code (BCC). The remaining two bits are unused. See also NCC and BCC. BSIC of an adjacent cell. Base Site control Processor (at BSC). Backward Sequence Number. A eld in a signal unit (SU) that contains the forward sequence number (FSN) of a correctly received signal unit being acknowledged in the signal unit that is being returned to the sender. See also FSN and SU. Base Station System. The system of base station equipment (Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by the MSC through a single interface as dened by the GSM 08 series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible for communicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipment of a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more base stations. If an internal interface is implemented according to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then the BSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs.
BPSM BRI
BS BS BS
BSC
BS_CV_MAX BSG BSIC
BSIC-NCELL BSP BSN
BSS
13-10
Version 1 Rev 0

BSSAP BSS Application Part (part of SS7) . Protocol for LAPD or LAPB signalling links on the A-interface. Comprises DTAP and BSSMAP messages. Supports message communication between the MSC and BSS. Base Station System GPRS Protocol Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which houses one or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at a remote transcoder (RXCDR). Base Station System Management Application Part (part of SS7). Call processing protocol for A-interface messages exchanged between the MSC and BSS. The BSS interprets these messages. BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7). Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digital control modules for the BTS (part of BTS cabinet) or BSC (part of BSSC cabinet). British Telecom. Bus Terminator. In order to avoid signal reections on the bus, each bus segment has to be terminated at its physical beginning and at its end with the characteristic impedance. Bus Terminator Card. Base Transceiver Function. Base Transceiver Processor (at BTS). One of the six basic task groups within the GPROC. Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSM PLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. The BTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs). A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physical content of a timeslot. BSSGP Virtual Connection Identier A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit. Generally consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. A byte is usually the smallest addressable unit of information in a data store or memory.
BSSGP BSSC
BSSMAP
BSSOMAP BSU
BT BT
BTC BTF BTP BTS
Burst BVCI Byte
C - CW
C/R-Bit C/T-Field C C Interface C7 CA CA CAB Command / Response Bit logical Channel / Transport channel identication Field Conditional. Interface between MSC and HLR/AUC. See SS7. Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to a particular cell. Central Authority. Software process that controls the BSS. Cabinet.
13-11
Version 1 Rev 0

CADM Country ADMinistration. The Motorola procedure used within DataGen to create new country and network les in the DataGen database. Channel Assignment Indicator Charge Advice Information. Cell Analysis Tool. The CAT is part of the Motorola Cell Optimization product. It is intended for engineering staff and OMC administrators. CAT provides information about GSM network cell performance. Cell Balancer. The CB process balances the cells congured for GPRS across PRPs. In the event of a PRP outage, this process sends message(s) indicating that GPRS service is unavailable to the appropriate CRM(s) for the cells that could not be moved to an INS (IN Service) PRP. Cell Broadcast. See CBSMS. Circuit Breaker. Cell Broadcast Agent. Cell Broadcast Centre. The call processing centre for CBSMS messages. Cell Broadcast CHannel. The channel which is used to broadcast messages to all MSs in a specic cell. Combining Bandpass Filter. Cell Broadcast Link. A bi-directional data link which allows communications between the BSS and the CBC. Circuit Breaker Module. Cell Broadcast Message Identier. Cell Broadcast Service. See CBSMS. Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. CBSMS allows a number of unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all MSs within a particular region. The content may include information such as local trafc conditions, the weather, the phone number of the local taxi company, etc. The messages are sent from a CBC via a BSC to a BTS and from there on a special cell broadcast channel to the MSs. The CBC is considered as a node outside the PLMN and can be connected to several BSCs. However, a BSC is only connected to one CBC. Clock Bus. Connection Conrm. Part of SCCP network connectivity. Country Code. A one to three digit number which specically identies a country of the world that an international call is being routed to (e.g., 1 = North America, 44 = United Kingdom). Call Control. CC functions, such as number translations and routeing, matrix path control, and allocation of outgoing trunks are performed by the MSC.
CAI CAI CAT
CB
CB CB CBA CBC CBCH CBF CBL CBM CBMI CBS CBSMS
CBUS CC CC
CC
13-12
Version 1 Rev 0

CCB Cavity Combining Block, a three way RF combiner. There are two types of CCB, CCB (Output) and CCB (Extension). These, with up to two CCB Control cards, may comprise the TATI. The second card may be used for redundancy. Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber supplementary service. Common Control CHannels. A class of GSM control channels used to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH, and RACH. Group of MSs in idle mode. Common Control Physical Channel (see also P-CCPCH and S-CCPCH) Common Channel Distributor. Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor. Conditional Call Forwarding. See CFC. Control CHannel. Control channels are channels which carry system management messages. Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSM Recommendations). Comit Consultatif International Tlgraphique et Tlphonique. This term has been superseded. See ITU-TSS. Current Call Meter. Capability/Conguration Parameter. Control Channel Protocol Entity. Hundred call-seconds. A single call lasting one hundred seconds is one CCS. Also, a measure of trafc load obtained by multiplying the number of calls per hour by the average holding time per call expressed in seconds, and dividing by 100. Often used in practice to mean hundred call seconds per hour with per hour" implied; as such, it is a measure of trafc intensity. See also erlang. Coded Composite Transport Channel (UMTS) Channel Codec Unit. The CCU performs the following functions: Channel coding functions, including FEC and interleaving, Radio channel measurement functions, including received quality level, received signal level, and information related to timing advance measurements. Circuit. Collision Detection / Channel Assignment Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Control Driver Board. Common Desktop Environment. Part of the SUN software (crontab - cron job le). Collision Detection Indicator
CCBS CCCH
CCCH_GROUP CCPCH CCD CCDSP CCF CCH CCH CCITT CCM CCP CCPE CCS
CCTrCH CCU
Cct CD/CA-ICH CDB CDE CDI
13-13
Version 1 Rev 0

CDMA Code-Division Multiple Access. CDMA is a digital cellular technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques. Unlike competing systems, such as GSM, that use TDM, CDMA does not assign a specic frequency to each user. Instead, every channel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversations are encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence. Call Detail Record. A record of voice or data SVCs, which includes calling and called numbers, local and remote node names, data and timestamp, elapsed time, and call failure class elds. This is the information needed to bill the customer for calls and facility usage data for calls. Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Chargeable DURation. Control Equalizer Board (BTS). Called station identier. Central Equipment Identity Register. By GSM denition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At an omni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell is synonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systems where cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below) End of charge point. The time at which the calling, or called, party stops charging by the termination of the call or by an equivalent procedure invoked by the network or by failure of the radio path. Confrence des administrations Europennes des Postes et Telecommunications. Circuit Error Rate Monitor. Identies when discontinuity is detected in a circuit. An alarm is generated and sent to the OMC-R when the error count exceeds an operator specied threshold. The alarm identies the RCI or CIC and the path where the error is detected. Conversion Facility. Call Forwarding. A feature available to the mobile telephone user whereby, after initiation of the feature by an authorised subscriber, calls dialled to the mobile telephone of an authorised subscriber will automatically be routed to the desired number. See also CFC and CFU. Control Function. CF performs the SGSN mobility management functions and OA&M functions for the GSN module. Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Busy supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for phone busy situations. Call Forwarding Conditional supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for busy, no reply, or not reachable situations. See also CFB, CFNRc, and CFNRy. Conguration Fault Management RSS process.
CDR
CD-ROM CDUR CEB CED CEIR Cell
CEND
CEPT CERM
CF CF
CF CFB
CFC
CFM
13-14
Version 1 Rev 0

CFNRc Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Not Reachable supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for not reachable situations. Call Forwarding on No Reply supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for no reply situations. Call Forwarding Unconditional supplementary service. Service automatically redirects all incoming calls. Charging Gateway. Charging Gateway Function. A means of one-way transmission. A dened sequence of periods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a dened frequency band in an FDMA system; a dened sequence of periods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol ( RFC 1334) Coaxial Interconnect Module. See Full Rate and Half Rate. These are the channel modes that are currently used. CHarging Point. Card Holder Verication information. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. The CKSN is a number which is associated with the ciphering key, Kc. It is used to ensure authentication consistency between the MS and the VLR. Cell Identity. A block of code which identies a cell within a location area. CUG Index. Carrier to Interference ratio. Circuit Identity Code. The unique identier of the terrestrial portion of a circuit path. A CIC is either a 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s connection depending on whether a site has local or remote transcoding. A CIC with local transcoding occupies a complete E1/T1 timeslot. A 16 kbit/s CIC, at a site with remote transcoding, occupies a sub-channel of an E1/T1 timeslot. Call Instance Code ( BICC) Channel Identity ( ATM) Classless Inter-Domain Routing ( RFC 1519) Cell Individual Offset ( 3GTS 25.331) Carrier to Interference Ratio. Indicates the received signal power level relative to the interference power level. Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. Calling Line Identity. The identity of the caller. See also CLIP and CLIR. Calling Line Identication Presentation supplementary service. Allows the called party to identify the caller. See also CLIR.
CFNRy CFU CG CGF Channel
CHAP CIM Channel Mode CHP CHV CKSN
CI CI C/I CIC
CIC CID CIDR CIO CIR, C/I Ciphertext CKSN CLI CLIP
13-15
Version 1 Rev 0

CLIR Calling Line Identication Restriction supplementary service. Allows the caller to withhold their identity from the called party. See also CLIP. Clock. Clock Extender half size board. The bre optic link that distributes GCLK to boards in system (part of the BSS, etc). ConnectionLess Manager. Coordinates global control over the BSS by handling of all connectionless messages (that is, messages that are not directly concerned with a connected call). This includes such messages as global resets, load limiting and circuit blocking. CLeaR. Conguration Management. Conguration management allows the operator to perform network conguration tasks, and to maintain all details of the network conguration at the OMC. Connection Management. See CLM. Connectionless Manager. See CLM. CoMmanD. Channel Mode Modify. Message sent to an MS to request a channel mode change. When it has received the CMM message, the MS changes the mode to the indicated channel and replies with a Channel Mode Modify Acknowledge message indicating the new channel mode. Common Management Information Protocol. Protocol used for communication over the OML. Common Management Information Service Element. An ASE which provides a means to transfer management information via CMIP messages with another NE over an association established by ASCE using ROSE (OMC). Cellular Manual Revision. Documentation updates. CalliNg tone. Coder/Decoder. A speech coding unit that converts speech into a digital format for radio broadcast, and vice versa. Manufacturers name for a type of multiplexer and packet switch commonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R. A cell whose cell boundary follows the boundary of a co-located neighbour cell. The coincident cell has a different frequency type, but the same BSIC, as that of the neighbour cell. COnnected Line Identity. Identity of the connected line. See also COLP and COLR. Placed together; two or more items together in the same place. An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signals from another cell. COnnected Line Identication Presentation supplementary service. Allows the calling party to identify the line identity of the connected party. See also COLR.
CLK CLKX CLM
CLR CM
CM CM CMD CMM
CMIP CMISE
CMR CNG Codec CODEX Coincident Cell
COLI Collocated Colour Code COLP
13-16
Version 1 Rev 0

COLR COnnected Line Identication Restriction supplementary service. Allows the connected party to withhold its line identity from the calling party. See also COLP. Code Object Manager (software). COMplete. Combiner. The purpose of a combiner in the BSS is to combine transmitter outputs from the RCUs onto an antenna. COMMunications. Communications Hub. Provides Ethernet switching and IP routeing for the GSN complex local networking and GSN complex E1 interfaces to the public data network. Communications Link. See also 2 Mbit/s link. See cPCI. CONtinue Message ( TCAP) CONFerence circuit. Circuit used for multi-party conference calls. CONFIGuration Control Program. Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all the service it is requesting. CONNect ACKnowledgement. Part of the synchronization process. After a connection has been established, the CONNACK message indicates that trafc channels are available. Call Processing. The CP process in the BTS controls the MS to BSS to MS signalling link, MS originated and terminated calls and inter-BSS and inter-BTS handovers. Common Packet Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) FDD only Compact Peripheral Component Interconnect. A set of standards that dene a common card cage, power supplies, and processor boards.
COM COM COMB COMM, Comms CommHub
CommsLink Compact PCI CON CONF CONFIG Congestion CONNACK
CP
CPCH cPCI
CPCS CPGM CPICH CPS CPU
Common Part Convergence Sublayer CCCH Paging Manager. The CPGM processes the paging messages sent from the SGSN to the BSC/BTS. Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see also P-CPICH and S-CPICH) Code and Puncturing Scheme. Central Processing Unit. The portion of a computer that controls the interpretation and execution of instructions. Also, the portion of a digital communications switch that executes programmed instructions, performs arithmetic and logical operations on signals, and controls input/output functions. Command/Response eld bit. Carriage Return (RETURN).
C/R CR
13-17
Version 1 Rev 0

CR Connection Request (Part of SCCP network connectivity). An SCCP Connection Request message is sent from the BSS to the MSC to establish a connection. See also CREF. Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). An error-detection scheme that (a) uses parity bits generated by polynomial encoding of digital signals, (b) appends those parity bits to the digital signal, and (c) uses decoding algorithms that detect errors in the received digital signal. Call RE-establishment procedure. Procedure for re-establishing a call in the event of a radio link failure. Connection REFused (Part of SCCP network connectivity). In a number of operating circumstances, a CREF message may be sent from the MSC to the BSS in response to a Connection Request (CR). Cell Resource Manager. The CRM allocates and activates timeslots and subchannels on the available carriers. Cell Resource Machine. Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speed modem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used to interwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32, or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards. Controlling RNC Motorola Controlled Roll Out Group. A CRO consists of a customer site implementation of a new product, software release, or combination of products/releases. Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal). Coding Scheme Circuit Switched. GPRS Coding Scheme-1 (9.05 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-2 (13.4 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-3 (15.6 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-4 (21.4 kbit/s per TCH). Call Session Control Function ( SIP) Circuit Switched Data Code Storage Facility Processor (at BSC and BTS). A GPROC device which facilitates the propagating of new software instances with reduced system down time. See also IP. CPCH Status Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC. Circuit Switched Public Data Network. A publicly available communications network using circuit switched digital data circuits. Call Transfer supplementary service. Channel Tester.
CRC
CRE CREF
CRM CRM CRM-LS/HS
CNRC CRO
CRT CS CS CS-1 CS-2 CS-3 CS-4 CSCF CSD CSFP
CSICH CSP CSPDN
CT CT
13-18
Version 1 Rev 0

CT CTCH CTP Channel Type. Common Trafc Channel (Logical) PTM Call Trace Product (Tool). The CTP is designed to help operators of GSM900 and DCS1800 communication networks tune and optimize their systems. CTP allows Call Trace data to be analysed and decoded. Control Terminal Port. Common Technical Regulation. Clear to Send. A handshake signal used with communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to a transmitter from a receiver) that transmission may proceed. Generated in response to a request to send signal. See also RTS. Compact Transceiver Unit (M-Cellhorizon radio). Closed User Group supplementary service. A CUG is used to control who can receive and/or place calls, by creating a unique group. When a CUG is congured for an interface, only those subscribers that are members of the same CUG can receive/place calls. The total value for an entire statistical interval. Countdown Value Code Word Call Waiting supplementary service. A subscriber feature which allows an individual mobile telephone user currently engaged in a call to be alerted that another caller is trying to reach him. The user has a predetermined period of time in which to terminate the existing conversation and respond to the second call. Congestion window
CTP CTR CTS
CTU CUG
Cumulative value CV CW CW
cwnd
D Interface - DYNET
D Interface D/A DAB DAC DACS DAK DAN DAS DAT Interface between VLR and HLR. Digital to Analogue (converter). See DAC. Distribution Alarm Board (in BTS6 cabinet). Digital to Analogue Converter. A device that converts an input number sequence into a function of a continuous variable. Digital Access Cross-connect System. A data concentrator and organizer for Tl / El based systems. Downlink Acknowledgement Digital ANnouncer (for recorded announcements on MSC). Data Acquisition System. Digital Audio Tape. Audio-recording and playback medium/format that maintains a signal quality equal to that of the CD-ROM medium/format. Sysgen Builder System. A Motorola ofine BSS binary object conguration tool.
DataGen
13-19
Version 1 Rev 0

Data Link Layer See OSI RM. This layer responds to service requests from the Network Layer and issues service requests to the Physical Layer. It provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data between network entities and to detect and possibly correct errors that may occur in the Physical Layer. Decibel. A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two numeric quantities. See also dBm. DataBase. Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst). DataBase Administration/Database Administrator. A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt. DataBase Management System. Direct Current. DC is the unidirectional ow or movement of electric charge carriers, usually electrons. The intensity of the current can vary with time, but the general direction of movement stays the same at all times. As an adjective, the term DC is used in reference to voltage whose polarity never reverses. Diversity Control Board (part of DRCU). Dedicated Control CHannel. A class of GSM control channels used to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH, FACCH, and SACCH. Data Carrier Detect signal. Hardware signal dened by the RS-232-C specication that indicates that a device such as a modem is on-line and ready for transmission. Data Circuit terminating Equipment. The DCE performs functions such as signal conversion and coding, at the network end of the line between the DTE and the line. Also, The RS232 conguration designated for computers. DCE equipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a straight cable, but to other DCE equipment only with a null modem cable. Data Communications Function. Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro). Dedicated CHannel (Transport) Data channel. Used in ISDN to perform call signalling and connection setup functions. In some circumstances, the channel can also be used to carry user data. Data Communications Network. A DCN connects Network Elements with internal mediation functions or mediation devices to the Operations Systems. DC Power Supply Module. Digital Cellular System at 1800 MHz. A cellular phone network using digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, but operating on frequencies of 1710 - 1785 MHz (receive) and 1805 - 1880 MHz (transmit). Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro). The DDF is an integrated combiner, lter and duplexer.
dB DB DB DBA dBm DBMS dc
DCB DCCH
DCD
DCE
DCF DCF DCH D channel
DCN
DC PSM DCS1800
DDF
13-20
Version 1 Rev 0

DDS DDS DDS DataGen Data Store. Store area for DataGen input and output les. Data Drive Storage. Direct Digital Synthesis. A technology for generating highly accurate and frequency-agile (rapidly changeable frequency over a wide range), low-distortion output waveforms. Diversity Equalizer Board. Data Encryption Standard DETach. Decision Feedback Equalizer. A receiver component/function. The DFE results in a very sharp Bit Error Rate (BER) threshold by using error feedback. Data Gathering Tool. The DGT collects all the relevant data relating to a specied problem and copies it to tape or le, together with a problem description. The le or tape is then sent to Motorola for analysis. Dynamic Host Conguration Protocol ( RFC 2131) Digital Host Processor. A hard GPROC based device located at Horizonmicro2 BTS sites. It represents the MCU of a slave Horizonmicro2 FRU. The MCU that the DHP represents is responsible for providing DRI and carrier support. Drum Intercept Announcer. 4 Bit Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro). Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro). DISConnect. Discontinuous. Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase. Device Interface Routine. Software routine used in the BSS. Data Link (layer). See Data Link Layer. See Downlink. Data Link Connection Identier. In frame-relay transmission systems, 13-bit eld that denes the destination address of a packet. The address is local on a link-by-link basis. Data Link Discriminator. Diversity Low Noise Block. Destination Local Reference DownLink Segmentator. The DLS segments LLC frames into RLC data blocks to be transmitted over the air interface. Data Link Service Process. Handles messages for an OMP and a shelf GPROC. Digital Link Signalling Processor. Control channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service).
DEQB DES DET DFE
DGT
DHCP DHP
DIA Digit DINO E1/HDSL DINO T1 DISC Discon DIQ DIR DL DL DLCI
DLD DLNB DLR DLS DLSP DLSP Dm
13-21
Version 1 Rev 0

DMA DMA Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; an immediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA). Direct Memory Access. Transfer of data from a peripheral device, such as a hard disk drive, into memory without that data passing through the microprocessor. DMA transfers data into memory at high speeds with no processor overhead. Digital Mobile Radio. Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas networked EMX family). Directory Number. Data Network Identier Code. In the CCITT International X.121 format, the rst four digits indicate the international data number, the next three digits are the data country code, and the nal digit is the network code. Domain Name Service. A service that translates from logical domain or equipment names to IP addresses. Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MS receives). Dial/Dialled Pulse. A dc pulse produced by an end instrument that interrupts a steady current at a sequence and rate determined by the selected digit and the operating characteristics of the instrument. Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) destination point of the message. Digital Processing and Control board. Dedicated Physical Control Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Dedicated Physical Channel (UMTS / Term to combine DPDCH and DPCCH) Dedicated Physical Data Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Pulse-code modulation (PCM) in which an analog signal is sampled and the difference between the actual value of each sample and its predicted value, derived from the previous sample or samples, is quantied and converted, by encoding, to a digital signal. Note: There are several variations of differential pulse-code modulation. Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABX interface). Dual Path Preselector. BTS module. Dual Port Random Access Memory. Data PROCessor. Digital Power Supply Module. Dynamic Random Access Memory. A type of semiconductor memory in which the information is stored in capacitors on a integrated circuit.
DMR DMX DN DNIC
DNS Downlink DP
DPC
DPC DPCCH DPCH DPDCH DPCM
DPNSS DPP DPR, DPRAM DPROC DPSM DRAM
13-22
Version 1 Rev 0

DRC Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocol conversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits. Part of IWF. Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply. Part of the BSS. Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding and encryption/decryption for radio channels. Part of BSS. Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extra memory. DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU. Part of the BSS. Drift Radio Network Controller Discontinuous reception (mechanism). A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically and automatically switching the MS receiver on and off. Digital transmission System 1 (or Digital Signal level 1). Term used to refer to the 1.44 Mbit/s (U.S.) or 2.108 Mbit/s (Europe) digital signal carried on a T1 facility. German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface). Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) Data Switching Exchange. Digital Speech Interpolation. A compression technique that relies on the pauses between speech bursts to provide additional compression. DSI enables users to gain an additional 2:1 compression on the average on their line. Digital Switching Network 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1/T1. Digital Signal Processor. A specialized, programmable computer processing unit that is able to perform high-speed mathematical processing. Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. N-ISDN user network interface signalling. Diversity Signal Strength Indication. Direct Transfer Application Part (Part of SS7). Call processing protocol for A-Interface messages exchanged directly between the MSC and the mobile unit without interpretation by the BSS. Dedicated Trafc Channel (UMTS Logical Channel) Data Terminal Equipment. An end instrument that converts user information into signals for transmission or reconverts the received signals into user information. Also, the RS232 conguration designated for terminals. DTE equipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable, but to other DTE equipment only with a null modem. Digital Trunk Frame. A frame or electronic rack of digital trunk interface equipment. DaTa form 1 (Part of SCCP network connectivity).
DRCU DRI DRIM DRIX DRNC DRX, DRx
DS-1
DS-2 DSCH DSE DSI
DSN DSO DSP
DSS1 DSSI DTAP
DTCH DTE
DTF DT1
13-23
Version 1 Rev 0

DTI DTM DTMF Digital Trunk Interface. Dual Transer Mode. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. Multifrequency signalling in which specied combinations of two voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used. The sounds a push button tone telephone makes when it dials a number. Data Terminal Ready signal. Method of ow control (RS232 Interface). A modem interface control signal sent from the DTE to the modem, usually to indicate to the modem that the DTE is ready to transmit data. Dual Transceiver Module. (Radio used in Horizonmicro (M-Cellarena) and Horizonmacro (M-Cellarenamacro)). Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism). A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducing interference by automatically switching the transmitter off when no speech or data are to be sent. A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is a dened sequence that carries no useful information. A dummy burst lls a timeslot with an RF signal when no information is to be delivered to a channel. DYnamic NETwork. Used to specify BTSs sharing dynamic resources.
DTR
DTRX DTX, DTx
Dummy burst
DYNET
E - EXEC
E E1 See Erlang. Also known as CEPT1. The 2.048 Mbit/s rate used by European CEPT carrier to transmit 30 64 kbit/s digital channels for voice or data calls, plus a 64 kbit/s signalling channel and a 64 kbit/s channel for framing and maintenance. Interface between MSC and MSC. External Alarm. See EAS. Typical external alarms are: Door open, High humidity, Low humidity, Fire, Intruder. External Alarm System. The EAS is responsible for the monitoring of all customer-dened environmental alarms at a site. The customer denes the alarm string and the severity of the alarms based on the individual requirements of the site. Indications are provided when the alarms are set or cleared. Energy per Bit/Noise oor, where Eb is the signal energy per bit and No is the noise energy per hertz of noise bandwidth. Elementary Basic Service Group. Echo Canceller. Performs echo suppression for all voice circuits. If cancellation does not take place, the PLMN subscriber hears the voice signal as an echo, due to the total round-trip delay introduced by the GSM system (typically 180 ms). Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels (EC).
E Interface EA EAS
Eb/No EBCG EC
ECB
13-24
Version 1 Rev 0

ECID ECM Ec/No ECSD ECT The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division. Error Correction Mode. A facsimile mode, in which the sending machine will attempt to send a partial page up to four times. Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density. Enhanced Circuit Switched Data ( HSCSD + EDGE) Event Counting Tool. The ECT provides information about the number and type of events and alarms generated throughout the network. It extracts data from the event log les for specied dates, allowing the user to generate reports on individual network elements, groups of elements, or the whole network. Explicit Call Transfer supplementary service. ECT enables a user to connect two other parties with which he is engaged in a telephone call and leave the connection himself. Enhanced Data-rates for Global Evolution. Electric Echo Loss. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. An EEPROM is a special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM, EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. Enhanced GPRS. Extended GSM900. EGSM900 provides the BSS with a further range of frequencies for MS and BSS transmit. EGSM MSs can use the extended frequency band as well as the primary band, while non-EGSM MSs cannot use the extended frequency band. A GSM900 cell can contain both GSM900 and EGSM900 carrier hardware. EGSM operates on the frequency range, 880 - 915 MHz (receive) and 925 - 960 MHz (transmit). Events Interface. Part of the OMC-R GUI. Electronic Industries Alliance. Equipment Identity Register. The EIR contains a centralized database for validating the IMEI. The register consists of lists of IMEIs organised as follows: White List - IMEIs which are known to have been assigned to valid MS equipment. Black List - IMEIs which have been reported stolen or which are to be denied service for some other reason. Grey List - IMEIs which have problems (for example, faulty software). These are not, however, sufciently signicant to warrant a black listing. Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. The arithmetic product of the power supplied to an antenna and its gain. Equipment Identity Register Procedure. Echo Loss. Event Management. An OMC-R application. It provides a centralised facility for reporting network-wide generated events and alarms, and for monitoring the status of the Network.
ECT
EDGE EEL EEPROM
EGPRS EGSM900
EI EIA EIR
EIRP EIRP EL EM
13-25
Version 1 Rev 0

EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility. The ability of systems, equipment, and devices that utilize the electromagnetic spectrum to operate in their intended operational environments without suffering unacceptable degradation or causing unintentional degradation because of electromagnetic radiation or response. Electro Motive Force. The rate at which energy is drawn from a source that produces a ow of electricity in a circuit; expressed in volts. Electro Magnetic Interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service. This service has two parts: precedence and pre-emption. Precedence involves assigning a priority level to a call in combination with fast call set-up. Pre-emption involves the seizing of resources, which are in use by a call of a lower precedence, by a higher level precedence call in the absence of idle resources. Pre-emption can also involve the disconnection of an on-going call of lower precedence to accept an incoming call of higher precedence. Electrical Man Machine Interface. Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas MSC family). Fr. - all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme); En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system to another ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the same time as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending. A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all the digits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the next system. All the digits are then sent as a group. END Message ( TCAP) Enhanced One-Phase End of Tape. EGPRS Packet Channel Request. Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM is a type of memory that retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible to re-program the memory. Enhanced Power Supply Module. Used in +27 V positive earth cabinets. Static model against which the performance of the equalizer is tested to extremes. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and RA250. Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slots each with equalizing circuitry and a DSP. Equalizer Control Processor. Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor. The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is rendered essentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though the transmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary with frequency.
EMF
EMI
eMLPP
EMMI EMX en bloc
END EOP EOT EPCR EPROM
EPSM EQ50 EQB EQCP EQDSP Equalization
13-26
Version 1 Rev 0

Equalizer An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/or phase shift varies as a function of frequency. Used to provide equalization. International (dimensionless) unit of trafc intensity dened as the ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is available for occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 CCS. In the US this is also known as a trafc unit (TU). Ear Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset acoustic responses. Effective Radiated Power. The power supplied to an antenna multiplied by the antenna gain in a given direction. ERRor. Electronic Serial Number (North American Market) Encapsulating Security Payload ( RFC 2406) Electro-static Point. Connection point on the equipment for an anti-static wrist strap. Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMS programming interface language. Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended). A standard protocol (IEEE 802.3) for a 10 Mbit/s baseband local area network (LAN) bus using carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) as the access method, implemented at the Physical Layer in the OSI RM, establishing the physical characteristics of a CSMA/CD network. ETSI Technical Report. European Telecommunication Standard. European Telecommunications Standards Institute. End of Transmission. Executive Process.
Erlang
ERP ERP ERR ESN ESP ESP ESQL E-TACS Ethernet
ETR ETS ETSI ETX EXEC
F Interface - Full Rate

F Interface FA Interface between MSC and EIR. Fax Adaptor. Device which complements Group 3 facsimile apparatus in order to be able to communicate over a GSM PLMN. Full Allocation. Functional Area. Final Assembly Code. Fast Associated Control Channel. A GSM dedicated control channel which temporarily uses the TCH to perform high speed transmissions, and carries control information after a call is set up. See also SDCCH. Fast Associated Control Channel/Full rate. See also Full Rate.
FA FA FAC FACCH
FACCH/F
13-27
Version 1 Rev 0

FACCH/H FACH FB FBI FBI FBM Fast Associated Control Channel/Half rate. See also Half Rate. Forward Access Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) See Frequency correction burst. Feedback Information UMTS Final Block Indicator Flow control Buffer Management. FBM is a functional unit residing on the PRP. It controls buffer capacity for each cell and each mobile so that the incoming data from the SGSN matches the air throughput. Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop. A serial data transfer architecture. FC-AL is designed for mass storage devices and other peripheral devices that require very high bandwidth. Using optical bre to connect devices, FC-AL supports full-duplex data transfer rates of 100MBps. Frequency Correction CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel which carries information for frequency correction of the MS. Fault Collection Process. Part of the fault management process in the BTS. Frame Check Sequence. The extra characters added to a frame for error detection and correction. Frequency Division Duplex Fiber Distributed Data Interconnect (optical Layer 2) Frequency Division Multiplex. A multiplexing technique that uses different frequencies to combine multiple streams of data for transmission over a communications medium. FDM assigns a discrete carrier frequency to each data stream and then combines many modulated carrier frequencies for transmission.
FC-AL
FCCH
FCP FCS FDD FDDI FDM
FDMA
Frequency Division Multiple Access. The use of frequency division to provide multiple and simultaneous transmissions to a single transponder. Fixed Dialling Number. The xed dialling feature limits dialling from the MS to a pre-determined list maintained on the SIM card. It can be used to limit calling to certain areas, exchanges or full phone numbers. Fault Diagnostic Procedure. Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors by transmitting additional information with the original bit stream. If an error is detected, the additional information is used to recreate the original information.
FDN
FDP FEC
13-28
Version 1 Rev 0

FEP Front End Processor. An OMC-R device. The FEP is a driver that stores data in its own database about all of the sites in the system. All bursts from the sites are directed to the FEP. It can also interrogate the sites and collect its data either manually or automatically at pre-dened times. Frame Erasure Ratio. The ratio of successfully decoded good speech frames against unsuccessfully decoded bad frames. For Further Study. See Frequency Hopping. Frequency Hopping Indicator. Forward Indicator Bit. Used in SS7 - Message Transfer Part. The forward indicator bit and backward indicator bit together with the forward sequence number and backward sequence number are used in the basic error control method to perform the signal unit sequence control and acknowledgement functions. Memory logic device in which the information placed in the memory in a given order is retrieved in that order. Finite Impulse Response (lter type). Fill In Signal Unit Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign key indicates an index into another table. Fault Management (at OMC). Frequency Modulation. Modulation in which the instantaneous frequency of a sine wave carrier is caused to depart from the centre frequency by an amount proportional to the instantaneous value of the modulating signal. Fixed Mobile Convergence Fault Management Initiated Clear. An alarm type. If an FMIC alarm is received, the fault management software for the network item clears the alarm when the problem is solved. See also Intermittent and OIC. Fibre optic MUltipleXer module. Frame Number. Identies the position of a particular TDMA frame within a hyperframe. First Ofce Application. A full functional verication of new product(s) on a commercial system using accepted technology and approved test plans. Fibre Optic eXtender board. First Partial Bitmap See Full Rate. Frame Relay. An interface protocol for statistically multiplexed packet-switched data communications in which (a) variable-sized packets (frames) are used that completely enclose the user packets they transport, and (b) transmission rates are usually between 56 kb/s and 1.544 Mb/s (the T-1 rate).
FER FFS, FS FH FHI FIB
FIFO FIR FISU FK FM FM
FMC FMIC
FMUX FN FOA
FOX FPB FR FR
13-29
Version 1 Rev 0

Frame A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slots containing samples from all channels of a group, where the position of each sample is identied by reference to a frame alignment signal. Also, an information or signal structure which allows a receiver to identify uniquely an information channel. The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is synchronized with respect to that of the received signal to accomplish accurate data extraction. Frame Reject Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can be easily replaced in the eld with a few simple tools. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easily within an MS burst. The repeated switching of frequencies during radio transmission according to a specied algorithm. Frequency hopping improves capacity and quality in a highly loaded GSM network. Multipath fading immunity can be increased by using different frequencies and interference coming from neighbour cells transmitting the same or adjacent frequencies can be reduced. Frequency Synchronization. All BSS frequencies and timing signals are synchronized to a high stability reference oscillator in the BSS. This oscillator can free run or be synchronized to the recovered clock signal from a selected E1/T1 serial link. MSs lock to a reference contained in a synchronization burst transmitted from the BTS site. Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radio signal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. The FSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and the distance the radio signal has travelled from the point source. Forward Sequence Number. See FIB. File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE which provides a means to transfer information from le to le. (OMC). forwarded-to number. Fault Translation Process (in BTS). File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol which allows a user on one computer to transfer les to and from another computer over a TCP/IP network. Also the client program the user executes to transfer les (RFC 959). Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSM air interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier. See also HR - Half Rate.
Frame Alignment
FRMR FRU Frequency Correction
Frequency Hopping
FS
FSL
FSN FTAM ftn FTP FTP
Full Rate
13-30
Version 1 Rev 0

G Interface - GWY
G Interface Gateway MSC Interface between VLR and VLR. An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMN from another network or service. A gateway MSC is also an interrogating node for incoming PLMN calls. Gigabyte. 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 megabytes. Gigabit Interface Converter Converter for connection to the Gigabit Ethernet. Gb Link. Gb Manager. Generic Call Control Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Group Call Register. The register which holds information about VGCS or VBS calls. Generic DSP Processor board. Interchangeable with the XCDR board. GDP board congured for E1 link usage. GDP board congured for T1 link usage. GPRS Data Stream. GPRS Encryption Algorithm GSM EDGE Radio Access Network Gateway GPRS Support Node. The GGSN provides internet working with external packet-switched networks. Giga-Hertz (109). Group ID. A unique number used by the system to identify a users primary group. GPRS Initialization Process GSM Multiplexer Board (part of the BSC). GPRS Mobility Management. General Manual Revision. Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre. See Gateway MSC. Gateway MSC Server Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation technique used in GSM. GrouND. Grade of Service. A trafc statistic dened as the percentage of calls which have a Probability of Busy or Queueing Delay. An alternative criterion is a maximum time for a percentage of calls to wait in the busy queue before they are assigned a voice channel.
GB, Gbyte GBIC GBL GBM GCC GCLK GCR GDP GDP E1 GDP T1 GDS GEA GERAN GGSN GHz GID GIP GMB GMM GMR GMSC GMSC-S GMSK GND GOS
13-31
Version 1 Rev 0

GPA GPC G-PDU GPROC GSM PLMN Area. General Protocol Converter. T-PDU + GTP-Header Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68040 with 32 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68060 with 128 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). General Packet Radio Service. A GSM data transmission technique that does not set up a continuous channel from a portable terminal for the transmission and reception of data, but transmits and receives data in packets. It makes very efcient use of available radio spectrum, and users pay only for the volume of data sent and received. Global Positioning by Satellite. A system for determining position on the Earths surface by comparing radio signals from several satellites. Gb Router. GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reached by a xed subscriber, without the subscribers knowledge of the location of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served by several GSM PLMNs. GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessible by GSM MSs. GSM Systems Division. GPRS Signalling Link. Groupe Spcial Mobile (the committee). Global System for Mobile communications (the system). See PGSM. GSM Mobile Station. GSM Public Land Mobile Network. GSM Radio Frequency. GPRS Support Node. The combined functions provided by the SGSN and GGSN. A GSN Complex consists of an ISS Cluster, GGSN and SGSNs connected to a single CommHub. GSM Software Release. Global Title. A logical or virtual address used for routing SS7 messages using SCCP capabilities. To complete message routing, a GT must be translated to a SS7 point code and subsystem number.
GPROC2 {4354} GPROC3
GPRS
GPS
GR GSA
GSA GSD GSL GSM GSM GSM900 GSM MS GSM PLMN GSM RF GSN GSN Complex GSR GT
13-32
Version 1 Rev 0

GTE GTM GTP GTS Guard period GUI Generic Table Editor. The Motorola procedure which allows users to display and edit MCDF input les. Gb Transmit Manager. GPRS Tunneling Protocol GBRS TBF Scheduler Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MS transmission is attenuated. Graphical User Interface. A computer environment or program that displays, or facilitates the display of, on-screen options. These options are usually in the form of icons (pictorial symbols) or menus (lists of alphanumeric characters) by means of which users may enter commands. A computer used to display a GUI from an OMC-R GUI application which is being run on a GUI server. A computer used to serve the OMC-R GUI application process running locally (on its processor) to other computers (GUI clients or other MMI processors). GateWay Manager. GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.
GUI client GUI server
GWM GWY
H Interface - Hyperframe
H Interface H-M HAD, HAP Half Rate Interface between HLR and AUC. Human-Machine Terminals. HLR Authentication Distributor. Refers to a type of data channel that will double the current GSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier (see also FR - Full Rate). HANDOver. The action of switching a call in progress from one radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allows established calls to continue by switching them to another radio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area to another. Handovers may take place between the following GSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC. Hierarchical Cell Structure Hybrid Combining Unit. (Used in Horizonmacro). Part of the DDF, the HDU allows the outputs of three radios to be combined into a single antenna. High level Data Link Control. A link-level protocol used to facilitate reliable point-to-point transmission of a data packet. Note: A subset of HDLC, LAP-B, is the layer-two protocol for CCITT Recommendation X.25. High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line. HDSL is a data transmission mechanism which supports duplex high speed digital communication (at E1 rates) on one or more unshielded twisted pair lines.
HANDO, Handover
HCS HCU
HDLC
HDSL
13-33
Version 1 Rev 0

HLC High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry information dening the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice active on the terminal. Home Location Register. The LR where the current location and all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored. Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication ( RFC 2104) Heat Management System. The system that provides environmental control of the components inside the ExCell, TopCell and M-Cell cabinets. HandOver. See HANDO. Hand Portable Unit. A handset. Call hold supplementary service. Call hold allows the subscriber to place a call on hold in order to make another call. When the second call is completed, the subscriber can return to the rst call. Home PLMN. See Half Rate. HandSet. High Speed Circuit Switched Data High Speed Interface card. HLR Subscriber Management. Hopping Sequence Number. HSN is a index indicating the specic hopping sequence (pattern) used in a given cell. It ranges from 0 to 63. Hilly Terrain with the MS travelling at 100 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, TU50, RA250 and EQ50. HyperText Transfer Protocol ( RFC 2616) Home Units. The basic telecommunication unit as set by the HPLMN. This value is expressed in the currency of the home country. Hardware. A combiner device which requires no software control and is sufciently broadband to be able to cover the GSM transmitter frequency band. See also COMB. A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to 4-wire operation and vice versa. For example, every land-line telephone contains a hybrid to separate earpiece and mouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit that connects the phone to the exchange. 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of the frame structure.
HLR HMAC HMS
HO HPU HOLD
HPLMN HR HS HSCSD HSI/S HSM HSN
HT100
HTTP HU
HW Hybrid Combiner
Hybrid Transformer
Hyperframe
13-34
Version 1 Rev 0

I - IWU
I I+S IA Information frames. Part of RLP. Information + Supervisory Incoming Access supplementary service. An arrangement which allows a member of a CUG to receive calls from outside the CUG. International Alphanumeric 5 character set. Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. The IADU is the equivalent of the Receive Matrix used on BTSs that pre-date the M-Cell range. Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Initial Address Message. A message sent in the forward direction that contains (a) address information, (b) the signaling information required to route and connect a call to the called line, (c) service-class information, (d) information relating to user and network facilities, and (e) call-originator identity or call-receiver identity. Internal Alarm System. The IAS is responsible for monitoring all cabinet alarms at a BSS. Integrated Circuit. An electronic circuit that consists of many individual circuit elements, such as transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and other active and passive semiconductor devices, formed on a single chip of semiconducting material and mounted on a single piece of substrate material. Interlock Code. A code which uniquely identies a CUG within a network. Interlock Code of the preferential CUG. Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers Incoming Calls Barred. An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from receiving calls from other members of that group. Integrated Circuit(s) Card. Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see also PICH, AICH, CD/CA-ICH) In-Call Modication. Function which allows the service mode (speech, facsimile, data) to be changed during a call. Internet Control Message Protocol. An extension to the Internet Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages, test packets, and informational messages related to IP. The PING command, for example, uses ICMP to test an Internet connection( RFC 792). Interrogating Call Session Control Function ( SIP) IDentication/IDentity/IDentier. Integrated Digital Network. A network that uses both digital transmission and digital switching.
IA5 IADU
IANA IAM
IAS IC
IC IC(pref) ICANN ICB
ICC ICH ICM ICMP
I-CSCF ID, Id IDN
13-35
Version 1 Rev 0

IDS IDS IE IEC Interface Design Specication. Informix Dynamic Server. The OMC-R relational database management system. Information Element. The part of a message that contains conguration or signalling information. International Electrotechnical Commission. An international standards and conformity assessment body for electrical, electronic and related technologies. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A non-prot, technical professional association. Information Element Identier. The identier eld of the IE. Internet Engineering Task Force (www.ietf.org) Interim European Telecommunication Standard. Intermediate Frequency. A frequency to which a carrier frequency is shifted as an intermediate step in transmission or reception. Initial and Final Address Message. Internet Hosted Octet Stream Service Internet Key Exchange ( RFC 2409) Internet Key Management Protocol Incoming Leg Control Model InterModulation. The production, in a nonlinear element of a system, of frequencies corresponding to the sum and difference frequencies of the fundamentals and harmonics thereof that are transmitted through the element. Intelligent Monitor And Control System. International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronic serial number that uniquely identies the MS as a piece or assembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along with request for service. See also IMEISV. International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Software Version number. The IMEISV is a 16 digit decimal number composed of four elements:- a 6 digit Type Approval Code; - a 2 digit Final Assembly Code; - a 6 digit Serial Number; and - a 2 digit Software Version Number (SVN). The rst three elements comprise the IMEI. When the network requests the IMEI from the MS, the SVN (if present) is also sent towards the network. See also IMEI and SVN. IMMediate assignment message. IMMs are sent from the network to the MS to indicate that the MS must immediately start monitoring a specied channel. IP Multimedia Private Identity IP Multimedia Public Identity Internet Protocol Multimedia Core Network Subsystem ( Rel. 5 onwards)
IEEE IEI IETF I-ETS IF
IFAM IHOSS IKE IKMP ILCM IM
IMACS IMEI
IMEISV
IMM
IMPI IMPU IMS
13-36
Version 1 Rev 0

IMSI International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobile number (prior to ISDN) that uniquely identies the subscription. It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such as directory number(s) from the HLR. See also MSISDN. International Mobile Telecommunications for the year 2000 Intelligent Network. A network that allows functionality to be distributed exibly at a variety of nodes on and off the network and allows the architecture to be modied to control the services. Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR, to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC. IN Service. Intelligent Network Service. A service provided using the capabilities of an intelligent network. See also IN. Interference Algorithm. Intermittent alarms are transient and not usually associated with a serious fault condition. After the intermittent alarms are displayed in the Alarm window, the operator must handle and clear the alarm. The system will report every occurrence of an intermittent alarm unless it is throttled. See also FMIC and OIC. The general term used to describe the inter-operation of networks, services, supplementary services and so on. See also IWF. A recording period of time in which a statistic is pegged. The end of an interval. Input/Output. Intelligent Optimization Service. Tool for improving the network quality. The IOS generates reports based on performance data from the BTS and OMC-R. Input Offset Variable for I+S and UI-Frames ( for ciphering in GPRS) Initialisation Process. The IP is primarily responsible for bringing up the site from a reset, including code loading the site from a suitable code source. IP also provides the CSFP functionality, allowing two BSS code load version to be swapped very quickly, allowing the site to return to service as soon as possible. Internet Protocol. A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer communication networks. IP provides for transmitting blocks of data called datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identied by xed-length addresses. The internet protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks ( RFC 791). See also TCP and TCP/IP. IP Bearer Control Protocol ( ITU-T Q.1970)
IMT-2000 IN
IN INS INS InterAlg Intermittent
Interworking
Interval Interval expiry I/O IOS
IOV-I / IOV-UI IP
IP
IPBCP
13-37
Version 1 Rev 0

IPC Inter-Process Communication. Exchange of data between one process and another, either within the same computer or over a network. Internet Protocol Control Protocol ( RFC 1332) INtermodulation Products. Distortion. A type of spurious emission. Intellectual PRoperty. Integrated Power Supply Module (-48 V). Internetwork Packet EXchange A networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. Like UDP/IP, IPX is a datagram protocol used for connectionless communications. Higher-level protocols are used for additional error recovery services. Incremental Redundancy (Hybrid Type II ARQ) A communications system comprising a constellation of 66 low-earth-orbiting (LEO) satellites forming a mobile wireless system allowing subscribers to place and receive calls from any location in the world. The satellite constellation is connected to existing terrestrial telephone systems through a number of gateway ground-stations. Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol Indexed Sequential Access Method. A method for managing the way a computer accesses records and les stored on a hard disk. While storing data sequentially, ISAM provides direct access to specic records through an index. This combination results in quick data access regardless of whether records are being accessed sequentially or randomly. International Switching Centre. The ISC routes calls to/from other countries. Interference Signal Code Power ( 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102) Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network using common switches and digital transmission paths to establish connections for various services such as telephony, data telex, and facsimile. See also B channel and D channel. Motorola Information Systems group (formerly CODEX). International Organisation for Standardization. ISO is a world-wide federation of national standards bodies from some 130 countries, one from each country. Internet Service Provider An Interactive Structured Query Language client application for the database server. See also IDS. Integrated Support Server. The ISS resides on a Sun Netra t 1125 and performs the CGF, DNS, NTP, and NFS functions for the GSN. Integrated System Test.
IPCP IP, INP IPR IPSM IPX
IR Iridium
ISAKMP ISAM
ISC ISCP ISDN
ISG ISO
ISP ISQL ISS
IST
13-38
Version 1 Rev 0

ISUP ISDN User Part. An upper-layer application supported by signalling system No. 7 for connection set up and tear down ( ITU-T Q.761 Q.765). Inactivity Test (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Information Transfer Capability. A GSM Bearer Capability Element which is provided on the Dm channel to support Terminal adaptation function to Interworking control procedures. International Telecommunication Union. An intergovernmental organization through which public and private organizations develop telecommunications. It is responsible for adopting international treaties, regulations and standards governing telecommunications. International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardization Sector. The standardization functions were formerly performed by CCITT, a group within the ITU. Iub-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.427 / 25.435) Iu-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.415) Iur-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.424, 3GTS 25.425, 25.426, 25.435) InterWorking Function. A network functional entity which provides network interworking, service interworking, supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking. It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in a GSM PLMN. InterWorking MSC. MSC that is used to deliver data to/from SGSN. InterWorking Unit. Unit where the digital to analogue (and visa versa) conversion takes place within the digital GSM network.
IT ITC
ITU
ITU-T
Iub-FP Iu-FP Iur-FP IWF
IWMSC IWU
k - KW
k k K KAIO kb, kbit kbit/s, kbps kbyte Kc kHz Ki kilo (103). Windows size. Constraint length of the convolutional code. Kernel Asynchronous Input/Output. Part of the OMC-R relational database management system. kilo-bit. kilo-bits per second. kilobyte. 210 bytes = 1024 bytes Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls the operation of encipherment and decipherment. kilo-Hertz. Individual subscriber authentication Key. Part of the authentication process of the AUC.
13-39
Version 1 Rev 0

KIO KPI KSW KSWX kW A class of processor. Key Performance Indicator. Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connect calls. Part of the BSS. KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDM bus. Part of the BSS. kilo-Watt.
L1 - LV
L1 L2 L2ML Layer 1 (of a communications protocol). Layer 2 (of a communications protocol). Layer 2 Management Link. L2ML is used for transferring layer 2 management messages to TRX or BCF. One link per TRX and BCF. Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF that adapts a users known layer 2 protocol LAPB onto RLP for transmission between the MT and IWF. L2R Bit Orientated Protocol. L2R Character Orientated Protocol. Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol ( RFC 2661) Layer 3 (of a communications protocol). Link Adaptation. Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freely without updating the location register. An LA may comprise one or several base station areas. Location Area Code. The LAC is part of the LAI. It is an operator dened code identifying the location area. Location Area Identity. The information indicating the location area in which a cell is located. The LAI data on the SIM is continuously updated to reect the current location of the subscriber. Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a) lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specic user group, (c) has a specic topology, and (d) is not a public switched telecommunications network, but may be connected to one. LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LAN to/from other cabinets. Part of BSS, etc. Link Access Protocol Balanced. The balanced-mode, enhanced version of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks. Link Access Protocol D-channel (Data). A protocol that operates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture. LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entities across the frame relay network. The D-channel carries signalling information for circuit switching.
L2R
L2R BOP L2R COP L2TP L3 LA LA
LAC LAI
LAN
LANX LAPB LAPD
13-40
Version 1 Rev 0

LAPDm Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel. A link access procedure (layer 2) on the CCH for the digital mobile communications system. See OSI-RM and Physical Layer. See OSI-RM and Data Link Layer. See OSI-RM and Network Layer. See OSI-RM and Transport Layer. See OSI-RM and Session Layer. See OSI-RM and Presentation Layer. See OSI-RM and Application Layer. Inductor Capacitor. A type of lter. Link Control Function. LCF GPROC controls various links in and out of the BSC. Such links include MTL, XBL, OMF and RSL. See also LCP. Local Communications Network. A communication network within a TMN that supports data communication functions (DCFs) normally at specied reference points q1 and q2. LCNs range from the simple to the complex. LCN examples include point-to-point connections and networks based on star and bus topologies. Link Control Processor. An LCP is a GPROC or PCMCIA board device which supplies the LCF. Once the LCF has been equipped, and assuming GPROCs have been equipped, processors are allocated by the software. Location Services Local Exchange. Light Emitting Diode. A type of diode that emits light when current passes through it. Depending on the material used the colour can be visible or infrared. Line Feed. A code that moves the cursor on a display screen down one line. In the ASCII character set, a line feed has a decimal value of 10. On printers, a line feed advances the paper one line. Length Indicator. Delimits LLC PDUs within the RLC data block, when an LLC PDU boundary occurs in the block. Line Identity. The LI is made up of a number of information units: the subscribers national ISDN/MSISDN number; the country code; optionally, subaddress information. In a full ISDN environment, the line identity includes all of the address information necessary to unambiguously identify a subscriber. The calling line identity is the line identity of the calling party. The connected line identity is the line identity of the connected party. Logical Link Control. Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry information dening the lower layer characteristics of the terminal. Trafc channel with capacity lower than a Bm.
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 LC LCF
LCN
LCP
LCS LE LED
LF
LI LI
LLC LLC Lm
13-41
Version 1 Rev 0

LMP LAN Monitor Process. Each GPROC which is connected to a LAN has an LMP, which detects faults on the LAN. LAN alarms are generated by the GPROC. Least Mean Squares. Parameters determined by minimizing the sum of squares of the deviations. Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed up the search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRN allocation is done on a per cell basis. Local Maintenance Terminal. Diagnostic tool, typically an IBM compatible PC. Low Noise Amplier. An amplier with low noise characteristics. Last Number Dialled. An area in which a mobile station may move freely without updating the location register. A location area may comprise one or several base station areas. Linear Predictive Coding. A method of digitally encoding analog signals. It uses a single-level or multi-level sampling system in which the value of the signal at each sample time is predicted to be a linear function of the past values of the quantied signal. Link Protocol Discriminator Local PLMN. Link Quality Control. Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS location information is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers. Least Signicant Bit Link Stations Signalling Unit (Part of MTP transport system). Listener Side Tone Rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on how a listener will perceive the background noise picked up by the microphone. Long Term Average. The value required in a BTSs GCLK frequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock. Local Terminal Emulator. Long Term Predictive. Line Terminating Unit. Local Units. Location Update. A location update is initiated by the MS when it detects that it has entered a new location area. Length and Value.
LMS LMSI
LMT LNA LND Location area
LPC
LPD LPLMN LQC LR LSB LSSU LSTR
LTA LTE LTP LTU LU LU LV
13-42
Version 1 Rev 0

M - MUX
M M M3UA M-Cell M&TS Mandatory. Mega (106). MTP-3 User Adaptation Layer ( RFC 3332 / 3GPP 29.202 (Annex A)) Motorola Cell. Maintenance and TroubleShooting. Functional area of Network Management software which (1) collects and displays alarms, (2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3) activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC). Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to an MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence. Medium Access Control. MAC includes the functions related to the management of the common transmission resources. These include the packet data physical channels and their radio link connections. Two Medium Access Control modes are supported in GSR5, dynamic allocation and xed allocation. (UMTS 3GTS 25.321) (E)GPRS 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS 44.060) Mobile Allocation Channel Number. See also MA. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted away from buildings or above rooftop level. Mobile Additional Function. Mobile Access Hunting supplementary service. An automatic service which searches for the rst available mobile user out of a dened group. Mobile Allocation Index. Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time. MAINTenance. Mobile Allocation Index Offset. The offset of the mobile hopping sequence from the reference hopping sequence of the cell. Mobile Application Part (part of SS7 standard). The inter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs. Mobile Application Part Processor. Minimum Available Spreading Factor The value shall be the maximum of X or Y, which ever is bigger Megabyte. 220 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes. Megabits per second. Must Be Zero Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. The MCAP Bus is the inter-GPROC communications channel in a BSC. Each card cage in a BSC needs at least one GPROC designated as an MCAP Server.
MA MAC
MACN Macrocell MAF MAH
MAI MAIDT MAINT MAIO MAP MAPP MASF Max [X, Y] MB, Mbyte Mbit/s MBZ MCAP
13-43
Version 1 Rev 0

MCC MCDF MCI Mobile Country Code. The rst three digits of the IMSI, used to identify the country. Motorola Customer Data Format used by DataGen for simple data entry and retrieval. Malicious Call Identication supplementary service. This feature is supported by a malicious call trace function by printing the report at the terminating MSC when the mobile subscriber initiates a malicious call trace request. Modulation and Coding Scheme. Motorola Customer Support Centre. Main Control Unit for M-Cell2/6. Also referred to as the Micro Control Unit in software. Main Control Unit, with dual FMUX. (Used in M-Cellhorizon). Main Control Unit for M-Cellmicro sites (M-Cellm). Also referred to as the Micro Control Unit in software. The software subtype representation of the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) for the MCU-m. Mediation Device. The MD (which handles the Q3 interface) allows the OSI Processor to communicate between the Network Management Centre (NMC) and OMC-R for network conguration, events and alarms. mobile Management entity - Data Link layer. Message Digest Algorithm (MD-2, 4, 5 are dened) (MD-5 RFC 1321) Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00). Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSM PLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which does not contain subscriber related information. Services may be accessed while the equipment, capable of surface movement within the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts at unspecied points. Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). A function which possesses the capability to detect elementary anomalies and convey them to the supervision process. MultiFrame. In PCM systems, a set of consecutive frames in which the position of each frame can be identied by reference to a multiframe alignment signal. Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). See DTMF. MultiFunction block. Media Gateway Control Protocol ( ITU-T H.248 incl. Annex F H and IETF RFC 3015) Media Gateway Control Function Media Gateway Control Protocol ( RFC 2705) Management. Manager.
MCS MCSC MCU MCUF MCU-m MCUm MD
MDL MD-X ME ME
MEF
MF
MF MF MEGACO MGCF MGCP MGMT, mgmt MGR
13-44
Version 1 Rev 0

MGW MHS Media Gateway Message Handling System. The family of services and protocols that provides the functions for global electronic-mail transfer among local mail systems. Mobile Handling Service. Mega-Hertz (106). Maintenance Information. Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database. There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB. Mobile Interface Controller. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted below rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffraction and scattering around buildings, the main propagation is within street canyons. minute(s). Mobile Identity Number (North American Market) The value shall be the minimum of X or Y, which ever is smaller micro-second (10-6). Micro Base Control Unit. The BCU is the Macro/Microcell implementation of a BTS site controller. Management Information Tree. A le on the Motorola OMC-R. The MIT le effectively monitors data on every device and every parameter of each device that is in the current versions of software on the OMC-R. The data is stored as a text le on the OMC-R. The MIT le also contains the hierarchical relationships between the network devices. MAC Logical Channel Priority Man Machine. See MMI. Mobility Management. MM functions include authorization, location updating, IMSI attach/detach, periodic registration, ID condentiality, paging, handover, etc. Multimedia Call Control Mobile Management Entity. Middle Man Funnel process. Man Machine Interface. The method by which the user interfaces with the software to request a function or change parameters. The MMI may run on a terminal at the OMC, or an LMT. The MMI is used to display alarm reports, retrieve device status, take modules out of service and put modules into service. A machine congured to use the OMC-R software from an MMI server. MMI client/MMI server.
MHS MHz MI MIB MIC Microcell
min MIN Min [X, Y] s BCU MIT
MLP MM MM
MMCC MME MMF MMI
MMI client MMI processor
13-45
Version 1 Rev 0

MMI server A computer which has its own local copy of the OMC-R software. It can run the OMC-R software for MMI clients to mount. Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI. Multiple Serial Interface Link. (see also 2Mbit/s link) Mobile Network Code. The fourth, fth and optionally sixth digits of the IMSI, used to identify the network. Mobile Not Reachable for GPRS ag MaiNTenance. Motorola Signalling Link between the BSC and BTS. Mobile Originated. Mobile Originating Call Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a SMS from a mobile to a message handling system. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The message can be sent whether or not the MS is engaged in a call. Motorola OMAP. Memorandum of Understanding. Commercial term. An MoU usually sets out the broad parameters of an understanding as well as the general responsibilities and obligations of each party in a proposed venture. It has little legal signicance except to indicate the parties commitments and acts as an aid to interpreting the parties intentions. There are various types of MOUs: compliance MOUs help ensure that all Motorola units comply with applicable laws and regulations; intellectual property MOUs deal with copyright, trademark, and patent rights; and business arrangement MOUs relate to the terms and conditions of a product or service transfer. Multi Personal Computer (was part of the OMC). Multiparty Call Control (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive]. Master Processor MultiParTY (Multi ParTY) supplementary service. MPTY provides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have a multi-connection call, i.e. a simultaneous communication with more than one party. MultiPleXed. Micro Radio Control Unit. Multimedia Resource Function Controller Multimedia Resource Function Processor Mobile Roaming Number. Mouth Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset acoustic responses. Maximum Receive Unit ( PPP)
MML MMS MNC MNRG MNT Mobis MO MOC MO/PP
MOMAP MoU
MPC MPCC MPH MPROC MPTY
MPX MRC MRFC MRFP MRN MRP MRU
13-46
Version 1 Rev 0

MRW MS Move Receiving Window Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit. A subscriber handset, either mobile or portable, or other subscriber equipment, such as facsimile machines, etc. Most Signicant Bit Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre. The MSC handles the call set up procedures and controls the location registration and handover procedures for all except inter-BTS, inter-cell and intra-cell handovers. MSC controlled inter-BTS handovers can be set as an option at the switch. Mobile Station Class Mark. MSC-Server Mobile Station Control Unit. millisecond (.001 second). Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2 Mbit/s digital links. See 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2. Part of BSS. Mobile Station Identication Number. The part of the IMSI identifying the mobile station within its home network. Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobile number (see also IMSI). Uniquely denes the mobile station as an ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code (CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the Subscriber Number (SN). Maximum Segment Size ( TCP) Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by the MSC to service and track a visiting subscriber. Message Signal Unit (Part of MTP transport system). A signal unit containing a service information octet and a signalling information eld which is retransmitted by the signalling link control, if it is received in error. Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destined for an MS. Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates the radio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminal equipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission. MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1 is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface and MT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface. Mean Time Between Exceptions. Mean Time Between Failures. An indicator of expected system reliability calculated on a statistical basis from the known failure rates of various components of the system. MTBF is usually expressed in hours. Mobile Terminating Call Message Transfer Link. The MTL is the 64 kbit/s PCM timeslot that is used to convey the SS7 signalling information on the A interface between the MSC and the BSC.
MSB MSC
MSCM MSC-S MSCU msec MSI MSIN MSISDN
MSS MSRN MSU
MT MT (0, 1, 2)
MTBE MTBF
MTC MTL
13-47
Version 1 Rev 0

MTM MTP Mobile-To-Mobile (call). Message Transfer Part. The part of a common-channel signaling system that transfers signal messages and performs associated functions, such as error control and signaling link security ( ITU-T Q.701 Q.703). Message Transfer Part level 3 / broadband ( ITU-T Q.2210) Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a short message from a message handling system to a mobile. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The message can be received whether or not the MS is engaged in a call. Mean Time To Repair. The total corrective maintenance time divided by the total number of corrective maintenance actions during a given period of time. Maximum Transmit Unit ( IP) Two types of multiframe are dened in the system: a 26-frame multiframe with a period of 120 ms and a 51-frame multiframe with a period of 3060/13 ms. Mark Up. Multi User Mobile Station. Multiplexer. A device that combines multiple inputs into an aggregate signal to be transported via a single transmission channel.
MTP-3b MT/PP
MTTR
MTU Multiframe
MU MUMS MUX
NACK - nW
NACK, Nack NAS NAT N/W NB NBAP NBIN NBNS NC NCC No Acknowledgement Non-Access-Stratum ( UMTS) Network Address Translation ( RFC 1631) Network. Normal Burst (see Normal burst). NodeB Application Part ( 3GTS 25.433) A parameter in the frequency hopping sequence generation algorithm. NetBios Name Service Neighbour Cell Network Colour Code. The NCC and the BCC are part of the BSIC. The NCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111. It is the same as the PLMN Colour Code. See also NCC and BSIC. Neighbouring (of current serving) Cell. Notication CHannel. Part of the downlink element of the CCCH reserved for voice group and/or voice broad-cast calls and notication messages. Network Control Protocol ( PPP)
NCELL NCH
NCP
13-48
Version 1 Rev 0

NCRM ND Network Cell Reselection Manager. No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning the column contains unique values (used only with indexed columns). National Destination Code. Part of the MSISDN. An NDC is allocated to each GSM PLMN. Network Determined User Busy. An NDUB condition occurs when a call is about to be offered and the maximum number of total calls for the channel has been reached. In practice, the total number of calls could be three: one for the basic call, one for a held call and one for call waiting. Network Element (Network Entity). A piece of telecommunications equipment that provides support or services to the user. Network Element Function block. A functional block that communicates with a TMN for the purpose of being monitored, or controlled, or both. Norme Europennes de Telecommunications. An RF planning tool, NetPlan can import data from the OMC and use it to carry out a network frequency replan. See OSI RM. The Network Layer responds to service requests from the Transport Layer and issues service requests to the Data Link Layer. It provides the functional and procedural means of transferring variable length data sequences from a source to a destination via one or more networks while maintaining the quality of service requested by the Transport Layer. The Network Layer performs network routing, ow control, segmentation/desegmentation, and error control functions. Network Function. Network File System. A le system that is distributed over a computer network. Also, a le system, on a single computer, that contains the low-level networking les for an entire network. Network Health Analyst. The NHA is an optional feature. It detects problems by monitoring network statistics and events via the OMC-R. The NHA analyses the event history, statistics and network conguration data to try to determine the cause of the detected problems. Network Indicator Network Interface Board. Network Interface Card. A network interface device in the form of a circuit card that provides network access. Network Independent Clocking. Network Information Service. It allows centralised control of network information for example hostnames, IP addresses and passwords.
NDC NDUB
NE
NEF
NET NetPlan Network Layer
NF NFS
NHA
NI NIB NIC NIC NIS
13-49
Version 1 Rev 0

N-ISDN Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Services include basic rate interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rate interface (30B+D - Europe and 23B+D - North America or PRI). Supports narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps. Network Interface Unit. A device that performs interface functions, such as code conversion, protocol conversion, and buffering, required for communications to and from a network. Network Interface Unit, micro. M-Cellmicro MSI. See Network Layer. Network LinK processor(s). Newton metres. Network Management (manager). NM is all activities which control, monitor and record the use and the performance of resources of a telecommunications network in order to provide telecommunication services to customers/users at a certain level of quality. Network Management Application Service Element. Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSM TMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoring and control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linked to subordinate OMC nodes. National Mobile Station Identication number, or, National Mobile Subscriber Identity. The NMSI consists of the MNC and the MSIN. Nordic Mobile Telephone system. NMT produced the worlds rst automatic international mobile telephone system. No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the column must contain a value in all rows. A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot. Next Partial Bitmap Number Plan Identier. Network-Protocol Data Unit ( IP-Packet, X.25-Frame) Non Return to Zero. A code in which ones are represented by one signicant condition and zeros are represented by another, with no neutral or rest condition. Network Service Network Service Access Point. An NSAP is a registration made by an application which species its desired listening criteria. The registration is limited to a particular CPU and port number. Criteria can include: DNICs, national numbers, subaddress ranges, protocol-ids, and extended addresses. Network Service Access Point Identier Network Service Entity Network Service Provider. A national or regional company that owns or maintains a portion of the network and resells connectivity.
NIU
NIU-m NL NLK Nm NM
NMASE NMC
NMSI
NMT NN Normal burst NPB NPI N-PDU NRZ
NS NSAP
NSAPI NSE NSP
13-50
Version 1 Rev 0

NSS Network Status Summary. A feature of the OMC-R MMI, which provides different network maps giving visual indication of the network conguration and performance, and how the different network management functions are implemented by the OMC-R. Network Service Test(er). A PCU process that periodically tests all alive NS-VCs on a PICP board. Network Service - Virtual Circuit. Network Service Virtual Connection Group Network Service Virtual Link Network Termination. Network equipment that provides functions necessary for network operation of ISDN access protocols. Non Transparent. NTRAC Type Approvals Advisory Board. Committee engaged in harmonisation type approval of telecom terminals in Europe. Network Time Protocol. A protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. This protocol is capable of synchronizing distributed clocks within milliseconds over long time periods. # - The symbol used for number.2 Mbit/s link - As used in this manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire 2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCM channels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels.4GL - 4th Generation Language. Closer to human languages than typical high-level programming languages. most 4GLs are used to access databases. Network User Access. Network User Identication. National User Part. (part of SS7). NonVolatile. Non-Volatile Random Access Memory. Static random access memory which is made into non-volatile storage either by having a battery permanently connected, or, by saving its contents to EEPROM before turning the power off and reloading it when power is restored. Nano-Watt (10-9).
NST NS-VC NS-VCG NS-VL NT
NT NTAAB NTP
Numbers
NUA NUI NUP NV NVRAM
nW
O - Overlap
O OA Optional. Outgoing Access supplementary service. An arrangement which allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside the CUG. Operation, Administration, & Management.
OA&M
13-51
Version 1 Rev 0

OAMP O&M OASCU Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning. Operations and Maintenance. Off-Air-Call-Set-Up. The procedure in which a telecommunication connection is being established whilst the RF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied. Outgoing Calls Barred within the CUG supplementary service. An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from placing calls to other members of that group. 8 bit Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. High stability clock source used for frequency synchronization. Optional for operators to implement for their aim. % OverFlow. IDS shutdown state. IDS normal operating state. Operator Initiated Clear. An alarm type. OIC alarms must be cleared by the OMC-R operator after the fault condition that caused the alarm is resolved. See also FMIC and Intermittent. Outgoing Leg Control Model Off_Line MIB. A Motorola DataGen database, used to modify and carry out Radio Frequency planning on multiple BSS binary les. Overall Loudness Rating. Operations and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7 standard) (was OAMP). Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of the GSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control of the PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlled by the specic OMC. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Gateway Part. (Iridium) Operations and Maintenance Centre - GPRS Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Switch Part. Operations and Maintenance Function (at BSC). Operations and Maintenance Link. The OML provides communication between an OMC-R and a BSC or RXCDR for transferring network management (O&M) data. Operation and Maintenance Processor. Part of the BSC. Operation and Maintenance System (BSC-OMC). Operation and Maintenance SubSystem.
OCB
Octet OCXO OD OFL ofine online OIC
OLCM OLM
OLR OMAP OMC
OMC-G OMC-G OMC-R OMC-S OMF OML
OMP OMS OMSS
13-52
Version 1 Rev 0

OOS Out Of Service. Identies a physical state. The OOS state indicates the physical device is out of service. This state is reserved for physical communication links. Also, identies a telephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS device software to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service. Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) origination point of the message. One Pass With Advertising ( Term in RSVP) Olympus Radio Architecture Chipset. Operating System. The fundamental program running on a computer which controls all operations. Open Service Access Open Systems Interconnection. The logical structure for communications networks standardized by the ISO. The standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate and exchange information with any other OSI-compliant system. OSI Reference Model. An abstract description of the digital communications between application processes running in distinct systems. The model employs a hierarchical structure of seven layers. Each layer performs value-added service at the request of the adjacent higher layer and, in turn, requests more basic services from the adjacent lower layer:Layer 1 - Physical Layer, Layer 2 - Data Link Layer, Layer 3 - Network Layer, Layer 4 - Transport Layer, Layer 5 - Session Layer, Layer 6 Presentation Layer, Layer 7 - Application Layer. Operation Systems Function block. Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI used for the Motorola OMC-R MMI. Octet Stream Protocol Operator Services System. Observed Time Difference Of Arrival Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system to another as soon as they are received by the sending system. A system using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of a call before it starts to send the digits to the next system. This is the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a given call are sent at one time. See en bloc. Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor
OPC
OPWA ORAC OS OSA OSI
OSI RM
OSF OSF/MOTIF OSP OSS OTDOA Overlap
OVSF
PA - PXPDN
P1, P2, P3 P/F Bit PA PAB Puncturing Schemes 1, 2, and 3. Polling/Final - Bit Power Amplier. Power Alarm Board. Part of the BSS.
13-53
Version 1 Rev 0

PABX Private Automatic Branch eXchange. A private automatic telephone exchange that allows calls within the exchange and also calls to and from the public telephone network. Packet Associated Control Channel. A sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals, that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole. The process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet only, and upon completion of the transmission the channel is made available for the transfer of other trafc. Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. A hardware device that allows a data terminal that is not set up for packet switching to use a packet switching network. It assembles data into packets for transmission, and disassembles the packets on arrival. Packet Access Grant Channel ((E)GPRS) The procedure by which a GSM PLMN xed infrastructure attempts to reach an MS within its location area, before any other network-initiated procedure can take place. Password Authentication Protocol ( RFC 1334) CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network. Packet Broadcast Control Channel ((E)GPRS) Processor Bus. Private Branch eXchange. In the general use of the term, PBX is a synonym for PABX. However, a PBX operates with only a manual switchboard; a private automatic exchange (PAX) does not have a switchboard, a private automatic branch exchange (PABX) may or may not have a switchboard. Personal Computer. A general-purpose single-user microcomputer designed to be operated by one person at a time. PCU Central Authority. One pCA software process is located at every PCU. The CA is in control of the PCU. It is resident on the master DPROC (MPROC) only, and maintains a list of the status of every device and every software process at the site. Paging Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel) Packet Common Control Channel. Primary Common Control Physical Channel (UMTS / used as bearer for the BCH TrCH) Paging CHannel. A common access RF channel providing point-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Provides simultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area. Paging Channel Network.
PACCH Packet Packet Switching
PAD
PAGCH Paging
PAP PATH PBCCH PBUS PBX
PC
pCA
PCCH PCCCH P-CCPCH PCH
PCHN
13-54
Version 1 Rev 0

PCHN Physical Channel. The physical channel is the medium over which the information is carried. In the case of GSM radio communications this would be the Air Interface. Each RF carrier consists of eight physical channels (or timeslots) used for MS communications. In the case of a terrestrial interface the physical channel would be cable. See also Physical Layer. Packet Control Interface. Peripheral Component Interconnect. A standard for connecting peripherals to a personal computer, PCI is a 64-bit bus, though it is usually implemented as a 32-bit bus. Pulse Code Modulation. Modulation in which a signal is sampled, and the magnitude (with respect to a xed reference) of each sample is quantized and converted by coding to a digital signal. Provides undistorted transmission, even in the presence of noise. See also 2 Mbit/s link, which is the physical bearer of PCM. PCU Conguration Management. pCM is a GWM process. It distributes all database changes performed at the BSC to the PCU boards. Personal Communications Network. Any network supporting PCS, but in particular DCS1800. Physical Common Packet Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Primary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correction suitable for use on links with long transmission delays, such as satellite links. The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) term used to describe a set of digital cellular technologies being deployed in the U.S. PCS works over GSM, CDMA (also called IS-95), and North American TDMA (also called IS-136) air interfaces. Personal Communications Services System. In PCS, a collection of facilities that provides some combination of personal mobility, terminal mobility, and service prole management. Note: As used here, "facilities" includes hardware, software, and network components such as transmission facilities, switching facilities, signalling facilities, and databases. A cellular phone network using the higher frequency range allocated in countries such as the USA. It operates on the frequency range, 1850 - 1910 MHz (receive) and 1930 - 1990 MHz (transmit). Proxy Call Session Control Function ( SIP) Packet Control Unit. A BSS component that provides GPRS with packet scheduling over the air interface with the MS, and packet segmentization and packetization across the Frame Relay link with the SGSN. Picocell Control unit. Part of M-Cellaccess. Potential difference. Voltage.
PCI PCI
PCM
pCM
PCN PCPCH P-CPICH PCR
PCS
PCS System
PCS1900
P-CSCF PCU
PCU pd
13-55
Version 1 Rev 0

PD PD PDB PDCH PDCP PDF PDF PDN Protocol Discriminator eld. The rst octet of the packet header that identies the protocol used to transport the frame. Public Data. See PDN. Power Distribution Board. Packet Data Channel. PDCH carries a combination of PBCCH and PDTCH logical channels. Packet Data Convergence Protocol ( 3GTS 25.323) Policy Decision Function Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR). Public Data Network. A network established and operated by a telecommunications administration, or a recognized private operating agency, for the specic purpose of providing data transmission services for the public. Packet Data Protocol. Physical Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Packet Data Trafc Channel ((E)GPRS) Power Distribution Unit. The PDU consists consisting of the Alarm Interface Board (AIB) and the Power Distribution Board (PDB). Protected Data Unit. Protocol Data Unit. A term used in TCP/IP to refer to a unit of data, headers, and trailers at any layer in a network. Pan-European Digital Cellular network. The GSM network in Europe. A single incremental action modifying the value of a statistic. Also, A number indicating the use of a device or resource. Each time the device or resource is used the peg count is incremented. Packed Encoding Rules ( ITU-T X.691) Modifying a statistical value. Packet Flow Context PCU Fault Collection Process. See pFTP. PCU Fault Transaction Process. The pFTP resides on the PSP as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. All alarms at the PCU are reported to pFTP. All DPROCs and the MPROC have a local pFCP to handle Software Fault Management indications (SWFMs). The pFTP forwards alarms to the Agent at the BSC and generates messages to pCA for device transitions as needed, based on faults reported. Packet Flow Identier Primary GSM. PGSM operates on the standard GSM frequency range, 890 - 915 MHz (receive) and 935 - 960 MHz (transmit). Packet Handler. A packet handler assembles and disassembles packets. PHysical (layer). See Physical Layer.
PDP PDSCH PDTCH PDU
PDU PDU PEDC Peg
PER Pegging PFC pFCP pFTP
PFI PGSM PH PH
13-56
Version 1 Rev 0

PHI Physical Layer Packet Handler Interface. See OSI-RM. The Physical Layer is the lowest of seven hierarchical layers. It performs services requested by the Data Link Layer. The major functions and services of the layer are: (a) establishment and termination of a connection to a communications medium; (b) participation in the process of sharing communication resources among multiple users; and, (c) conversion between the representation of digital data in user equipment and the corresponding signals transmitted over a communications channel. Presentation Indicator. The PI forms part of the calling name information. Depending on database settings, the PI may prevent the called party from seeing the identity of the calling party. Packet Immediate Assignment. A cell site where the base station antenna is mounted within a building. Page Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Packet Interface Control Processor. A PCU hardware component, the PICP is a DPROC board used for network interfacing functions such as SGSN and BSC. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A statement made by the supplier of an implementation or system claimed to conform to a given specication, stating which capabilities have been implemented. Process IDentier/Process ID. PCM Interface Module (MSC). Personal Identication Number. A password, typically four digits entered through a telephone keypad. Problem Identication Number. Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarm interface, part of the BSS. The PIX board provides a means of wiring alarms external to the BSS, BSC, or BTS into the base equipment. Protocol Implementation eXtra information for Testing. A statement made by a supplier or implementor of an implementation under test (IUT) which contains information about the IUT and its testing environment which will enable a test laboratory to run an appropriate test suite against the IUT. Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is a not-null, non-duplicate index. See Presentation Layer. Unciphered data. Frequency planning tool.
PI
PIA Picocell PICH PICP
PICS
PID PIM PIN PIN PIX
PIXT or PIXIT
PK PL Plaintext PlaNET
13-57
Version 1 Rev 0

PLL Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in the BTS). PLL is a mechanism whereby timing information is transferred within a data stream and the receiver derives the signal element timing by locking its local clock source to the received timing information. Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communications network. Performance Management. An OMC application. PM enables the user to produce reports specic to the performance of the network. Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediate action is necessary. See also DMA. PCI Mezzanine Card. Packet Management Report. Pseudo MMS. Performance Management User Interface. PCM MUltipleXer. Permanent Nucleus group of the GSM committee. Packet Notication Channel ((E)GPRS) Prsentation des Normes Europennes. Presentation rules of European Standards. Point of Interconnection. A point at which the cellular network is connected to the PSTN. A cellular system may have multiple POIs. Post Ofce Protocol ( RFC 1939) Plain Old Telephone Service. Basic telephone service without special features such as call waiting, call forwarding, etc. Peak-to-peak. Point-to-Point. Parts per billion. PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) to PCI Bridge board. The PPB allows an MPROC to be linked to a separate bus. The PPB and MPROC are paired boards. Packet Paging Channel ((E)GPRS) Primitive Procedure Entity. Parts per million (x 10-6). Point-to-Point Protocol ( RFC 1661) PCPCH Resource Availability Physical Random Access Channel UMTS Packet Random Access Channel ((E)GPRS) Preferential CUG. A Pref CUG, which can be specied for each basic service group, is the nominated default CUG to be used when no explicit CUG index is received by the network.
PLMN PM
PMA PMC PMR PMS PM-UI PMUX PN PNCH PNE POI
POP POTS pp, p-p PP ppb PPB
PPCH PPE ppm PPP PRA PRACH Pref CUG
13-58
Version 1 Rev 0

Presentation Layer See OSI RM. The Presentation Layer responds to service requests from the Application Layer and issues service requests to the Session Layer. It relieves the Application Layer of concern regarding syntactical differences in data representation within the end-user systems. A cell which is already optimized in the network and has a co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary of the said cell. The primary cell has a preferred band equal to the frequency type of the coincident cell. Packet Resource Manager. The PRM is a PRP process. It performs all RLC/MAC functions and realises UL/DL power control and timing advance. Programmable Read Only Memory. A storage device that, after being written to once, becomes a read-only memory. Packet Resource Process(or). A PCU hardware component, the PRP is a DPROC board which manages the packet resources at the PCU and is the processor where all of the radio related processing occurs. GPRS channels are routed to PRPs which perform the RLC/MAC processing, air interface scheduling, and frame synchronization of the channels. Location probability. Location probability is a quality criterion for cell coverage. Due to shadowing and fading a cell edge is dened by adding margins so that the minimum service quality is fullled with a certain probability. Puncturing Scheme. Periodic Supervision of Accessibility. PSA is a fault management function. It periodically sends messages to BSSs requesting information on their current state. This veries whether the BSSs are operational or not. If a BSS fails to respond to a PSA request for its status, the OMC-R will generate an alarm for that BSS. Primary Synchronization Code Primary Synchronization Channel (physical) Power Spectral Density ( 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102) Phase Shift Keying Packet System Information. Presentation Services Access Point. PCU System Audit Process. pSAP is a GWM process. It periodically monitors the soft devices to maintain the reliability of the system. Power Supply Module. PCU Switch Manager. The pSM resides on the PSP as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. The pSM maintains data paths within the PCU and communicates with the BSC. PCU System Processor board. Part of GPRS. Packet Switched Public Data Network. See Packet Switching and PDN.
Primary Cell
PRM
PROM PRP
Ps
PS PSA
PSC P-SCH PSD PSK PSI PSAP pSAP
PSM pSM
PSP PSPDN
13-59
Version 1 Rev 0

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network. The domestic land line telecommunications network. It is usually accessed by telephones, key telephone systems, private branch exchange trunks, and data arrangements. Power Supply Unit. Pure Sine Wave. Protocol Type ( GTP or GTP) Packet Timing Advance Control Channel Packet Timing Advance Control Channel ((E)GPRS) Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Downlink Direction ((E)GPRS) Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Uplink Direction ((E)GPRS) Point to Multipoint Packet TMSI Public Telecommunications Operator. Point to Point Packet Timeslot Reconguration. Packet Uplink Assignment. Price per Unit Currency Table. The PUCT is the value of the Home unit in a currency chosen by the subscriber. The PUCT is stored in the SIM. The value of the PUCT can be set by the subscriber and may exceed the value published by the HPLMN. The PUCT value does not have any impact on the charges raised by the HPLMN. Permanent Virtual Circuit. Also, in ATM terminology, Permanent Virtual Connection. A virtual circuit that is permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit establishment and tear-down. See also SVC. Pass Word. Power. Private eXchange Public Data Network. See also PDN.
PSU PSW PT PTACH PTCCH PTCCH/D PTCCH/U PTM P-TMSI PTO PTP PTR PUA PUCT
PVC
PW PWR PXPDN
QA- Quiesent mode

QA Q (Interface) - Adapter. TMN interface adapter used to communicate with non-TMN compatible devices and objects. Used to connect MEs and SEs to TMN (GSM Rec. 12.00). Interface between NMC and GSM network. See QA. Q-Adapter Function. Quality Estimate Quad European Interface. Interfaces four 2 Mbit/s circuits to TDM switch highway. See MSI.
Q3 Q-adapter QAF QE QEI
13-60
Version 1 Rev 0

QIC QoS Queue Quarter Inch Cartridge (Data storage format). Quality Of Service. An alarm category which indicates that a failure is degrading service. Data structure in which data or messages are temporarily stored until they are retrieved by a software process. Also a series of calls waiting for service. See also FIFO. IDS intermediate state before shutdown.
Quiescent mode
R - RXU
R Value of reduction of the MS transmitted RF power relative to the maximum allowed output power of the highest power class of MS (A). RAndom mode request information eld. Radio Access. Routing Area. Rural Area with the MS travelling at 250 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and EQ50. Random Access Burst. Data sent on the RACH. Radio Access Bearer Routing Area Code Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to originate a call or respond to a page. Random Access CHannel. The RACH is used by the mobile station to request access to the network. See also RAB. Remote Authentication Dial In User Service ( RFC 2865) Routing Area Identication A term applied to the transmission of electromagnetically radiated information from one point to another, usually using air or vacuum as the transmission medium. An electromagnetic wave frequency intermediate between audio frequencies and infrared frequencies used in radio and television transmission. Random Access Memory. A read/write, nonsequential-access memory in which information can be stored, retrieved and modied. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., its contents are lost if power is removed). Radio Access Network Application Part ( 3GTS 25.413) RANDom number (used for authentication). The RAND is sent by the SGSN to the MS as part of the authentication process. Radio Access Technology Receive Antenna Transceiver Interface. Rate Adaptation. Receive Block Bitmap ( EGPRS)
RA RA RA RA250
RAB RAB RAC RACCH RACH RADIUS RAI Radio Frequency
RAM
RANAP RAND RAT RATI RAx RB
13-61
Version 1 Rev 0

RBB RBDS RBER Receive Block Bitmap ( GPRS) Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motorola diagnostic facility). Residual Bit Error Ratio. RBER is a ratio of the number of bits in error to the total number of bits received, within error detected speech frames dened as good. The measurement period over which the calculation is made is 480 ms. During this period, 24 speech frames are decoded and a ratio calculated. By referring to a lookup table, the ratio is then converted to an RBER Quality number between 0 and 7. Remote Base Transceiver Station. A BTS that is not co-located with the BSC that controls it. Radio Control Board. Part of the DRCU. Radio Channel Identier. The unique identier of the radio channel portion of the circuit path. Radio Channel Interface. The RCI changes the MS address used in the RSS (channel number) to the address used in Layer 3 in the BSC CP. Radio Control Processor. Radio Channel Unit. Part of the BSS. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply. Note: The RCU is now obsolete, see DRCU. Receiver. Requirements Database. Relational DataBase Management System (INFORMIX). The database management system for the OMC-R database. Restricted Digital Information. Radio Digital Interface System. Reference Distribution Module. The RDM provides a stable 3MHz reference signal to all transceivers. It is used for carrier and injection frequency synthesis. Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDNs form a unique identier, the distinguished name, for a particular network element. RECommendation. Used to describe adjacent cells; each being designated as a neighbour of the other. Also known as bi-directional and two-way neighbour. The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC in order to make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MS rst activates or moves into a new service area. REJect(ion). RELease. Residual Excited Linear Predictive. A form of speech coding. RELP coders are usually used to give good quality speech at bit rates in the region of 9.6 kbit/s.
RBTS RCB RCI RCI
RCP RCU
RCVR RDB RDBMS RDI RDIS RDM
RDN
REC, Rec Reciprocal neighbour
Registration
REJ REL RELP
13-62
Version 1 Rev 0

RELP-LTP Remotely Tuned Combiner RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate. See Full Rate. A combiner device which houses two processors (for paired-redundancy) and several tuneable cavities. See also COMB Resynchronize/resynchronization. REQuest. The minimum number of cells required in a pattern before channel frequencies are reused, to prevent interference. Varies between cell conguration type and channel type. The pattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimize interference between cells and sectors within the pattern area. A Motorola DataGen utility for producing an MMI script from a binary object database. See Radio Frequency. Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RF spectrum allocation with a dened bandwidth and centre frequency. Radio Front End (module). Receiver Front End (shelf). Receiver Front End Board. Part of DRCU II. Radio Frequency Interference. Radio Frequency Module. Reduced TDMA Frame Number. Reserved for Future Use. Railways-GSM Registered Jack 45. An eight-wire connector used commonly to connect computers onto a local-area networks (LAN), especially Ethernets. Reduced Instruction Set Computer. A type of microprocessor that recognizes a relatively limited number of instruction types, allowing it to operate at relatively higher speeds. Remote login. RL is a means by which the operator performs conguration management, fault management, and some performance management procedures at the NEs. The RL software manages the X.25 connection for remote login. The circuit is made by the OMC-R calling the NE. Release Complete. An SCCP message type used with RLSD to release a connection. Radio Link Control. Air interface transmission layer. The RLC function processes the transfer of PDUs from the LLC layer. (UMTS 3GTS 25.322) ((E)GPRS / 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS 44.060) RF Link Manager.
resync REQ Reuse Pattern
Revgen RF RFC, RFCH
RFE RFE RFEB RFI RFM RFN RFU R-GSM RJ45
RISC
RL
RLC RLC
RLM
13-63
Version 1 Rev 0

RLP Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer user data between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22. ( 3GTS 24.022) Receive Loudness Rating. See SLR. ReLeaSeD. An SCCP message type used with RLC to release a connection. Root Mean Square (value). The most common mathematical method of dening the effective voltage or current of an AC wave. For a sine wave, the rms value is 0.707 times the peak value. Remote Mobile Switching Unit. An RMSU is a line concentrator. It may be inserted between the MSC and some of the BSS sites served by the MSC to reduce the number of terrestrial signalling and trafc circuits required. Radio Network Controller Receive Not Ready Radio Network Subsystem Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence. Radio Network Subsystem Application Part ( 3GTS 25.423) Radio Network Temporary Identier Reliability, Operability, Availability, Maintainability. Situation where mobile station operates in a cellular system other than the one from which service is subscribed. Read Only Memory. Computer memory that allows fast access to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or modication of the data. ROM is inherently non-volatile storage - it retains its contents even when the power is switched off. Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries a message between devices over an association established by ASCE (a CCITT specication for O & M) (OMC). Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslot in the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviour of the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance. Regular Pulse Excited (codec). See RPE-LTP. Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSM digital speech coding scheme. GSM uses a simplied RPE codec, with long-term prediction, operating at 13 kbits/s to provide toll quality speech. Registered PLMN Recognised Private Operating Agency. Private telecommunications operator recognised by the appropriate telecommunications authority. Read Privilege Required. Part of the table structure of the OMC database schema. Access to the column is allowed only for privileged accounts.
RLR RLSD RMS
RMSU
RNC RNR RNS RNTABLE RNSAP RNTI ROAM Roaming ROM
ROSE
Roundtrip
RPE RPE-LTP
RPLMN RPOA
RPR
13-64
Version 1 Rev 0

RR Radio Resource management. Part of the GSM management layer. The functions provided by RR include paging, cipher mode set, frequency redenition, assignments, handover and measurement reports. Receive Ready. Relative Reserved Block Period Radio Resource Control ( 3GTS 25.331) Radio Resource State Machine. Translates messages through Call Processing (CP). Activates and deactivates radio channels as controlled by the CRM. Radio Resource Switch Manager. Recommended Standard 232. The interface between a terminal (DTE) and a modem (DCE) for the transfer of serial data. Standard serial interface. Received Signal Code Power ( 3GTS 25.215) Radio System Entity. Radio Signalling Link. RSL is used for signalling between the BSC and BTSs. The interface uses a 64 kbit/s timeslot with a LAPD protocol. Radio System Link Function. Radio System Link Processor. Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS). Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned from a transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strength between the MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink. Resource Reservation Protocol ( RFC 2205) Regional Subscription Zone Identity. The RSZI denes the regions in which roaming is allowed. The elements of the RSZI are:The Country Code (CC) which identies the country in which the GSM PLMN is located,The National Destination Code (NDC) which identies the GSM PLMN in that country,The Zone Code (ZC) which identies a regional subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely within that PLMN. Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. RTCs are used to ne-tune the cavities to the right frequency. A poorly tuned cavity can cause power destined for the antenna to be reversed. Remote Terminal Emulator. Radio Transceiver Function. RTF is the function that supports the air interface channel and the DRI/Transceiver pair. When equipping a DRI at a remote BTS, one or more RTFs must be equipped. Receive Transmit Functions. Retransmission Time Out Real Timer Protocol ( RFC 1889)
RR RRBP RRC RRSM
RRSM RS232
RSCP RSE RSL
RSLF RSLP RSS RSSI
RSVP RSZI
RTC
RTE RTF
RTF RTO RTP
13-65
Version 1 Rev 0

RTS Request to Send. A handshaking signal used with communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24 to indicate (from a transmitter to a receiver) that data is ready for transmission. See also CTS. RoundTrip Time ( RFC 793) Rack Unit. System processor operating mode. Receive(r). Receive window buffer. Remote Transcoder. An RXCDR is used when the transcoding is performed at a site away from the BSC. This site would be at or near the MSC. This enables 4:1 multiplexing in which the transcoded data for four logical channels is combined onto one 64 kbit/s link, thus reducing the number of links required for interconnection to the BSCs. See also XCDR. Receive Function (of the RTF). Received signal level. An indication of received signal level based on the RSSI. RXLEV is one of the two criteria for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and power control). See also RXQUAL. The MS reports RXLEV values related to the apparent received RF signal strength. It is necessary for these levels to attain sufcient accuracy for the correct functioning of the system. Received signal level downlink. Received signal level uplink. Received signal quality. An indication of the received signal quality based on the BER. RXQUAL is one of the two criteria for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and power control). See also RXLEV. The MS measures the received signal quality, which is specied in terms of BER before channel decoding averaged over the reporting period of length of one SACCH multiframe. Received signal quality downlink. Received signal quality uplink. Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remote transcoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcoder site.
RTT RU Run level Rx RX RXCDR
RXF RXLEV
RXLEV-D RXLEV-U RXQUAL
RXQUAL-D RXQUAL-U RXU
S7- SYSGEN
S7 S/W SABM SABME SABP See SS7. SoftWare. Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message which establishes the signalling link over the air interface. SABM Extended. Service Area Broadcast Protocol ( 3GTS 25.419)
13-66
Version 1 Rev 0

SACCH Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used by the MS for conveying power control and timing advance information in the downlink direction, and RSSI and link quality reports in the uplink direction. Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4. Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Trafc channel. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Trafc channel Full rate. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Trafc channel Half rate. A brand of trunk test equipment. Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs of a layer are dened as gates through which services are offered to an adjacent higher layer. System Audits Process. SAP is on each GPROC in the BSS. It monitors the status of the BSS on a periodic (scheduled) and on-demand basis during normal mode. SAP detects faulty or degrading hardware and software (through the use of audit tests) and noties the Alarms handling software of the condition. Service Access Point Indicator (identier). The OSI term for the component of a network address which identies the individual application on a host which is sending or receiving a packet. Segmentation And Reassembly (ATM-sublayer) Surface Acoustic Wave. SAW devices basically consist of an input transducer to convert electrical signals to tiny acoustic waves, which then travel through the solid propagation medium to the output transducer where they are reconverted to electrical signals. SAW band pass lters are used for sorting signals by frequency. Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst). Serial Bus. An SBUS is a logical device made up of the communication path between the GPROCs and LANX cards in a cage. Service Centre (used for Short Message Service). Service Code. System Change Control Administration. Software module which allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC). Signalling Connection Control Part (part of SS7). Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (used as bearer for the FACH and PCH TrCHs / UMTS Physical Channel) Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM). Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel used to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs and identication of base stations. Status Control Interface. A slave to the Status Control Manager. Serial Communication Interface Processor.
SACCH/C4 SACCH/C8 SACCH/T SACCH/TF SACCH/TH SAGE SAP
SAP
SAPI
SAR SAW
SB SBUS
SC SC SCCA SCCP S-CCPCH SCEG SCH
SCI SCIP
13-67
Version 1 Rev 0

SCM Status Control Manager. Accepts messages from other processors within the switch requesting status displays in the form of one or more lights on a hardware panel. The SCM maps the status display requests into specic commands to the status control interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights. Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters dening a particular physical channel in a BS. Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity). Secondary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Serving Call Session Control Function ( SIP) Small Computer Systems Interface. A processor-independent standard for system-level interfacing between a computer and intelligent devices including hard disks, oppy disks, CD-ROM, printers, scanners, and many more. SCSI-1 can connect up to seven devices to a single SCSI adaptor (or host adaptor) on the computers bus. Stream Control Transmission Protocol ( RFC 2960) Slim Channel Unit. Slim Channel Unit for GSM900. Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS to BTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. A SDCCH is used by a single MS for call setup, authentication, location updating and SMS point to point. Specication Description Language. A method for visually depicting the functionality of call processing, operations and maintenance software. Sub-rate Data Multiplexor Space Division Multiple Access SDL Development Tool. A software tool to model and validate real-time, state-based product software designs. Service Data Unit. In layered systems, a set of data that is sent by a user of the services of a given layer, and is transmitted to a peer service user semantically unchanged. Special Drawing Rights. The SDR is the International Monetary Fund unit of account. It also serves as a basis for the unit of account for a number of other international organizations and as a basis for private nancial instruments. The SDR is based on the values of the euro, U.S. dollar, Japanese yen and pound sterling. Support Entity. See SEF. A cell which is not optimized in the network and has a co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary of the said cell. The secondary cell has a preferred band the same as that of its own frequency type. Support Entity Function. SEFs are functions not directly involved in the telecommunication process. They include fault localisation, protection switching, etc. (GSM Rec.12.00).
SCN SCP S-CPICH S-CSCF SCSI
SCTP SCU SCU900 SDCCH
SDL
SDM SDMA SDT SDU
SDR
SE Secondary Cell
SEF
13-68
Version 1 Rev 0

Session Layer See OSI RM. The Session Layer responds to service requests from the Presentation Layer and issues service requests to the Transport Layer. It provides the mechanism for managing the dialogue between end-user application processes. It provides for either duplex or half-duplex operation and establishes checkpointing, adjournment, termination, and restart procedures. Spreading Factor Synthesizer Frequency Hopping. The principle of SFH is that every mobile transmits its time slots according to a sequence of frequencies that it derives from an algorithm. The frequency hopping occurs between time slots and, therefore, a mobile station transmits (or receives) on a xed frequency during one time slot. It must then hop before the time slot on the next TDMA frame. Due to the time needed for monitoring other base stations the time allowed for hopping is approximately 1 ms, according to the receiver implementation. The receive and transmit frequencies are always duplex frequencies. System Frame Number Security Gateway (IPsec / RFC 2401) Serving GPRS Support Node. The SGSN provides the control, transmission, OAMP, and charging functions. It keeps track of the individual MS locations, and performs security functions and access control. The SGSN is connected to the BSS via a Frame Relay network. Signaling Gateway (SS7 IP) Secure Hash Algorithm Shared Channel Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel / TDD only) Screening Indicator. The supplementary service (SS) screening indicator is sent by the MS at the beginning of the radio connection to allow the network to assess the capabilities of the MS and hence determine either whether a particular network initiated SS operation may be invoked or which version of a network initiated SS operation should be invoked. The SS screening indicator is only relevant to network initiated SS operation and is valid for the duration of a radio connection. Service Interworking. Part of the IWF. Supplementary Information. System Information. Supplementary Information A. System Information Block
SF SFH
SFN SG SGSN
SGW SHA SHCCH SI
SI SI SI SIA SIB
13-69
Version 1 Rev 0

SID Silence Descriptor. The transmission of comfort noise information to the RX side is achieved by means of a SID frame. A SID frame is transmitted at the end of speech bursts and serves as an end of speech marker for the RX side. In order to update the comfort noise characteristics at the RX side, SID frames are transmitted at regular intervals also during speech pauses. This also serves the purpose of improving the measurement of the radio link quality by the radio subsystem (RSS). Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit that carry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF always contains a label. See SS7. Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which is inserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part of the MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN), other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 and A8. Single Inline Memory module. System Integrated Memory Module. A small plug-in circuit board providing additional RAM for a computer. Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a message signal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-service eld. A value in the SIF of an SS7 signalling message specifying the User Part type. Session Initiation Protocol ( RFC 3261) Signal to Interference Ratio BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site. Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTL levels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to external devices (RS232, RS422, and bre optics). Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondary key indicates an additional index and/or usage as a composite key. See Session Layer. Signalling Link. The signalling links between the various network elements are: Remote BTS to BSC - Radio Signalling Link (RSL), BSC to MSC - Message Transfer Link (MTL), OMC(R) to BSS - Operations and Maintenance Link (OML), Remote XCDR to BSC - XCDR signalling Link (XBL), CBC to BSC - Cell Broadcast Link (CBL). Signaling Link Code Subscriber Locator Function Serial Link. One of four communications paths between SCIP and peripheral equipment. The information on the link is sent serially in a bit-synchronous format.
SIF
Signalling System No.7 SIM
SIMM SIMM SIO
SIP SIR SITE SIX
SK
SL SL
SLC SLF SLNK
13-70
Version 1 Rev 0

SLR Send Loudness Rating. The SLR, in the mobile to land direction, and the Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) in the land to mobile direction, determine the audio signal levels for the customers speech. The loudness ratings are calculated from the send and receive sensitivity masks or frequency responses. Source Local Reference (SS7) Signaling Link Selection Signalling Link Test Acknowledge. Message sent from the MSC to the BSC in response to an SLTM. Signalling Link Test Message. During the process of bringing an MTL link into service, the BSC sends an SLTM message to the MSC. The MSC responds with an SLTA message. Switch Manager. The function of the SM is to connect a MS terrestrial trunk from the MSC (designated by the MSC), to the radio channel given to a MS by the cell resource manager in the BSS software. Summing Manager. Session Management System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO 9596). OSI terminology for a software Management Information Server that manages a network. System Management Application Service Element. Short Message Cell Broadcast. Short Message Entity. An entity that may send or receive Short Messages. The SME may be located in a xed network, an MS, or a SC. See also SMS. Special Mobile Group. To avoid confusion between the GSM system and the GSM committee with its wider responsibilities, the committee was renamed SMG in 1992. Motorola Software Maintenance Program. A Motorola program designed to ensure the highest quality of software with the highest level of support. Short Message Service. SMS is a globally accepted wireless service that enables the transmission of alphanumeric messages between mobile subscribers and external systems such as electronic mail, paging, and voice-mail systems. It transfers the short messages, up to 160 characters, between Smts and MSs via an SMS-SC. See also SMS-SC, SMS/PP and Smt. Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. SMSCB is a service in which short messages may be broadcast from a PLMN to MSs. SMSCB messages come from different sources (e.g. trafc reports, weather reports). Messages are not acknowledged by the MS. Reception of SMSCB messages by the MS is only possible in idle mode. The geographical area over which each message is transmitted is selected by the PLMN operator, by agreement with the provider of the information. SMS Gateway MSC (for Short Messages destined to Mobile Station)
SLR SLS SLTA SLTM
SM
SM SM SMAE
SMASE SMCB SME
SMG
SMP
SMS
SMSCB
SMS-G-MSC
13-71
Version 1 Rev 0

SMS-IW-MSC SMS-SC SMS Interworking MSC (for Short Messages coming from Mobile Station) Short Message Service - Service Centre. SMS-SC is an interworking unit between stationary networks and the GSM Network. It acts as a store and forward centre for short messages. See also SMS, SMS/PP and Smt. Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Two different point-to-point services have been dened: Mobile Originated (MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). A short message always originates or terminates in the GSM network. This means that short messages can never be sent between two users both located in stationary networks. See also SMS, SMS-SC and Smt. Short message terminal. See also SMS, SMS-SC and SMS/PP. There are different types of Smt interfaces, one being the Computer Access Interface which provides services for external computers communicating with SMS-SCs through the Computer Access Protocol. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ( RFC 2821) Subscriber Number. Sequence Number Downlink ( GTP) SeND. Subnetwork Dependent Convergence Protocol SeNDeR. Simple Network Management Protocol SNDCP N-PDU Number Flag Segmented N-PDU (SN-PDU is the payload of SNDCP) Signal to Noise Ratio Serial NumbeR. Sequence Number Uplink ( GTP) Suppress Outgoing Access (CUG SS). An arrangement which prevents a member of a CUG placing calls outside the CUG. Simple Object Access Protocol ( http://www.w3.org/TR/2000/NOTE-SOAP-20000508) A complete set of software and rmware objects including the database object. Service Provider. The organisation through which the subscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. This may be a network operator or possibly a separate body. Signalling Point. A signalling point is a node within a SS7 network. Special Product. SPare.
SMS/PP
Smt
SMTP SN SND SND SNDCP SNDR SNMP SNN SN-PDU SNR SNR SNU SOA SOAP Software Instance SP
SP SP SP
13-72
Version 1 Rev 0

SPARC Scalable Processor ArChitecture. a 32- and 64-bit microprocessor architecture from Sun Microsystems that is based on the Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC). SPARC has become a widely-used architecture for hardware used with UNIX-based operating systems. Signalling Point Code. Suppress Preferential CUG. Prohibits the use of the preferential CUG, on a per call basis. Security Parameter Index ( RFC 2401) Signalling Point Inaccessible. Single Path Preselector. Signal Quality Error. Structured Query Language. The standard language for relational database management systems as adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) and the International Standards Organization (ISO 9075-1989). Signaling Radio Bearer Service Request Distributor. Signed RESponse (authentication). The SRES is calculated by the MS, using the RAND, and sent to the SGSN to authenticate the MS. Serving RNC Smoothed RoundTrip Time ( RFC 793) Supplementary Service. A modication of, or a supplement to, a basic telecommunication service. System Simulator. ITU-TSS Common Channel Signalling System No. 7. Also known as C7, S7 or SS#7. The standard denes the procedures and protocol by which network elements in the PSTN exchange information over a digital signalling network to effect wireless (cellular) and wireline call setup, routing and control. SubSystem-Allowed. SSA is used for SCCP subsystem management. An SSA message is sent to concerned destinations to inform those destinations that a subsystem which was formerly prohibited is now allowed. (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.712 para 1.15). Site System Audits Processor. Supplementary Service Control string. When a subscriber selects a supplementary service control from the menu in a GSM network, the mobile station invokes the SSC by sending the network the appropriate functional signalling message. Service Specic Coordination Function Network Node Interface Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2140) Service Specic Coordination Function User Network Interface Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2130) Secondary Synchronization Channel (physical)
SPC SPC SPI SPI SPP SQE SQL
SRB SRD SRES
SRNC SRTT SS SS SS7
SSA
SSAP SSC
SSCF/NNI SSCF/UNI S-SCH
13-73
Version 1 Rev 0

SSCOP SSCOPMCE SSCS SSDT SSF SSM SSM SSN SSN SSN Service Specic Connection Oriented Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2110) Service Specic Connection Oriented Protocol in a Multi-link or Connectionless Environment ( ITU T Q.2111) Service Specic Convergence Sublayer Site Selection Diversity Transmission Subservice Field. The level 3 eld containing the network indicator and two spare bits. SCCP Switch Manager. Signalling State Machine. Start Sequence Number ( related to ARQ-Bitmap in GPRS / EGPRS) Send Sequence Number ( GSM MM and CC-Protocols) SubSystem Number. In SS7, each signalling point (SP) may contain a number of subsystems. Each subsystem has a unique ID, the SSN (e.g. 149 for SGSN and 6 for HLR). Service Switching Point. Intelligent Network Term for the Class 4/5 Switch. The SSP has an open interface to the IN for switching signalling, control and handoff. Subsystem-prohibited. SSP is used for SCCP subsystem management. An SSP message is sent to concerned destinations to inform SCCP Management at those destinations of the failure of a subsystem. Switching SubSystem. The SSC comprises the MSC and the LRs. Service Specic Segmentation And Reassembly ( ITU-T I.366.1) Slow start threshold Statistical ANalysis (processor). STATistics. Statistics. Signaling Transport Converter on MTP-3 and MTP-3b ( ITU-T Q.2150.1) / Signaling Transport Converter on SSCOP and SSCOPMCE ( ITU-T Q.2150.2) System Timing Controller. The STC provides the timing functions for the GPROC. Side Tone Masking rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on how a speaker will perceive his own voice when speaking. Space Time block coding based Transmission Diversity Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor. A link error rate monitor. Signalling Transfer Point. A node in the SS7 telephone network that routes messages between exchanges and between exchanges and databases that hold subscriber and routing information.
SSP
SSP
SSS SSSAR ssthresh STAN STAT stats STC
STC STMR STTD SUERM STP
13-74
Version 1 Rev 0

SU SUFI SunOS Superframe Super user SURF SVC Signal Unit. A group of bits forming a separately transferable entity used to convey information on a signalling link. Super Field (RLC-Protocol) Sun Microsystems UNIX Operating System. SunOS was renamed Solaris. 51 trafc/associated control multiframes or 26 broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s). User account that can access all les, regardless of protection settings, and control all user accounts. Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (Used in Horizonmacro). Switch Virtual Circuit. A temporary virtual circuit that is set up and used only as long as data is being transmitted. Once the communication between the two hosts is complete, the SVC disappears. See also PVC. SerVice Manager. The SVM provides overall management authority for all in-service service circuits. Software Version Number. The SVN allows the ME manufacturer to identify different software versions of a given type approved mobile. See also IMEI and IMEISV. Software. SoftWare Fault Management. Software faults are handled through a SWFM facility which routes those events to the OMC independently through the FCP. SYstem information Manager. The SYM builds and sends GPRS system information messages over the BCCH. synchronize/synchronization. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize its frame to that of the received signal. Synthesizer hopping is a method of frequency hopping in which the RCUs are re-tuned in real-time, from frequency to frequency. SYStem. SYStem GENeration. The Motorola procedure for loading a conguration database into a BTS.
SVM SVN
SW SWFM
SYM sync Synchronization burst
Synthesizer hopping
SYS SYSGEN
T -TxBPF
T T T Timer. Transparent. Type only.
13-75
Version 1 Rev 0

T1 Digital WAN carrier facility that transmits DS-1-formatted data at 1544 kbp/s through the telephone-switching network. companies. T1 lines are widely used for private networks as well as interconnections between an organizations PBX or LAN and the telco. Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits (See BIB). Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminal adaptation functions (see GSM 04.02). See Timing Advance. Type Approval Code. Part of the IMEISV. Total Access Communication System. European analogue cellular system. Terminal Adaptation Function.( 3GTS 27.001) Timing Advance Index Transmit Antenna Transceiver Interface. The TATI consists of RF combining equipments, either Hybrid or Cavity Combining. See CCB. Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface (physical layer). A 100 Mbps ATM transmission standard dened by the ATM Forum. Transport Block To Be Determined. Temporary Block Flow. MAC modes support the provision of TBFs allowing the point-to-point transfer of signalling and user data between the network and an MS. Technical Basis for Regulation. An ETSI document containing technical requirements and procedures. Transport Block Set TDM Bus. A TBUS is a logical device made up of the TDM backplane of a cage, the KSW devices managing the TDM highway of the cage, and local and remote KSWX devices (if they exist). Transaction Capabilities. TC refers to a protocol structure above the network layer interface (i.e., the SCCP service interface) up to the application layer including common application service elements but not the specic application service elements using them. TC is structured as a Component sub-layer above a Transaction sub-layer. Transaction Capabilities Application Part. The layer of the SS7 protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for certain services.( Q.771 Q.773) TATI Control Board. Trafc CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry either encoded speech or user data. A full rate TCH. See also Full Rate.
T43
TA TA TAC TACS TAF TAI TATI
TAXI
TB TBD TBF
TBR TBS TBUS
TC
TCAP
TCB TCH TCH/F
13-76
Version 1 Rev 0

TCH/F2.4 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F9.6 TCH/FD TCH/FS TCH/H TCH/H2.4 TCH/H4.8 TCH/HS TCI TCP A full rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s. A full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s. A full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s. Trafc Channel / Fullrate Downlink A full rate Speech TCH. A half rate TCH. See also Half Rate. A half rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s. A half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s. A half rate Speech TCH. Transceiver Control Interface. Transmission Control Protocol. TCP is one of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. Whereas the IP protocol deals only with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees delivery of data and also guarantees that packets will be delivered in the same order in which they were sent. See also IP and TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI Transport Layer and IP operates on the OSI Network Layer. See also IP and TCP. Target Channel Type Field Technical Commitee Technical Report. Transport Channel Trafc Volume Transceiver Control Unit. Time Division Duplex Twin Duplexed Filter. Used in M-Cellhorizon. Time Division Multiplexing. A type of multiplexing that combines data streams by assigning each stream a different time slot in a set. TDM repeatedly transmits a xed sequence of time slots over a single transmission channel. Within T-Carrier systems, such as T-1 and T-3, TDM combines PCM streams created for each conversation or data stream. Time Division Multiple Access. A technology for delivering digital wireless service using TDM. TDMA works by dividing a radio frequency into time slots and then allocating slots to multiple calls. In this way, a single frequency can support multiple, simultaneous data channels. TopCell Digital Unit. Part of the TopCell BTS hardware. A TDU is capable of supporting 6 TRUs for supporting up to 6 sectors. Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functions necessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user. Terminal endpoint identier. A number that identies a specic connection endpoint within a service access point. Terminal Equipment Identity.
TCP/IP
TCTF TC-TR TCTV TCU TDD TDF TDM
TDMA
TDU TE Tei TEI
13-77
Version 1 Rev 0

TEID TEMP TEST TF TF Tunnel Endpoint Identier ( GTP / 3GTS 29.060) TEMPorary. TEST control processor. Transport Format Transmission Function. The TF provides layered protocol software for handling payload information transfer and for providing signalling communications between the control function and external systems. TransFer Allowed. An SPC route management message used to notify adjacent signalling points of an accessible route. Transport Format Combination Transport Format Combination Identier Transport Format Combination Set Transport Format Indication (UMTS). Temporary Flow Identity ((E)GPRS) TransFer Prohibited. An SPC route management message used to notify adjacent signalling points of an inaccessible route. Transport Format Set Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a simple form of FTP. It uses UDP and provides no security features. It is often used by servers to boot diskless workstations, X-terminals, and routers. Transmission Gap start Distance ( 3GTS 25.215) Transmission Gap Length ( 3GTS 25.215) Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count ( 3GTS 25.215) Transmission Gap Starting Slot Number ( 3GTS 25.215) Topology Hiding Inter Network Gateway Transaction Identier. Tunnel Identier The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits are sent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots. See also ARFCN. A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS to advance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as to compensate for propagation delay. See Transport Layer. Temporary Logical Link Identier. Transport Layer Security ( RFC 2246 / RFC 3546 / formerly known as SSL or Secure Socket Layer) Type, Length and Value. An encoding element composed of three elds: a type identier, a length indicator, and content octets. Transparent Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC)
TFA TFC TFCI TFCS TFI TFP
TFS TFTP
TGD TGL TGPRC TGSN THIG TI TID Timeslot
Timing advance
TL TLLI TLS TLV
TM
13-78
Version 1 Rev 0

TM TM TMD TMI TMM Transmission Modules Trafc Manager. Transparent Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type) TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interface from IWF to modems for 16 circuits. Part of IWF. Trafc Metering and Measuring. TMM provides system tools to be used by trafc engineering and switch maintenance personnel to determine if the system is operating correctly. TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk groups, service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data. Telecommunications Management Network. The physical entities required to implement the Network Management functionality for the PLMN. Also, TMN was originated formally in 1988 under the ITU-TS as a strategic goal to create or identify standard interfaces that would allow a network to be managed consistently across all network element suppliers. The concept has led to a series of interrelated efforts at developing standard ways to dene and address network elements. TMN uses the OSI Management Standards as its framework. TMN applies to wireless communications and cable TV as well as to private and public wired networks. Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriber to process a call. May be changed between calls and even during a call, to preserve subscriber condentiality. Timeslot Number. Tunneling of Messages. Type Of Number. Transmit Power Command Payload of a G-PDU which can be user data, i.e. possibly segmented IP-frames, or GTP signaling information ( GTP) Temporary Queuing Identier Channels which carry users speech or data. See also TCH. Equivalent to an erlang. Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timing recovery and channel equalization in the receiver. See OSI RM. The Transport Layer responds to service requests from the Session Layer and issues service requests to the Network Layer. Its purpose is to provide transparent transfer of data between end users, thus relieving the upper layers from any concern with providing reliable and cost-effective data transfer. Transcoding Rate and Adaption Unit Timeslot Resource Shifter. The TRS determines which timeslots are active in a PRP board to perform a control of the GPRS trafc.
TMN
TMSI
TN TOM TON TPC T-PDU TQI Trafc channels Trafc unit Training sequence Transport Layer
TRAU TRS
13-79
Version 1 Rev 0

TRAU TrCH TrGW TRM TRU TRX Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRAU converts the encoded voice and rate adapted data into 64 kbps data for the PSTN. Transport Channel (UMTS) Transition Gateway (IPv4 IPv6) Terrestrial Resource Management. TopCell Radio unit. Transceiver(s). A network component which can serve full duplex communication on 8 full-rate trafc channels according to specication GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH) is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on one RF carrier. Technical Specication. TeleService. Any service provided by a telecommunication provider. TimeSlot (see Timeslot). Training Sequence 1. Training Sequence 2. TimeSlot Acquisition. TimeSlot Assignment. Transceiver Speech & Data Interface. Training Sequence Code. A training sequence is sent at the centre of a burst to help the receiver identify and synchronize to the burst. The training sequence is a set sequence of bits which is known by both the transmitter and receiver. There are eight different TSCs numbered 0 to 7. Nearby cells operating with the same RF carrier frequency use different TSCs to allow the receiver to identify the correct signal. TimeSlot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within a TDM stream. Transceiver Speech and Data Interface. Transceiver Station Manager. TRAU SyNc. Time Switched Transmit Diversity Timeslot SWitch. Tree and Tabular Combined Notation. TTCN is a programming language endorsed by ISO that is used to write test suites for telecommunications systems. Transistor to Transistor Logic. A common semiconductor technology for building discrete digital logic integrated circuits. Time To Live ( IP-Header / RFC 791) TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal). Trafc Unit.
TS TS TS TS1 TS2 TSA TSA TSDA TSC
TSI TSDI TSM TSN TSTD TSW TTCN
TTL TTL TTY TU
13-80
Version 1 Rev 0

TU3 Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 3 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU50, HT100, RA250 and EQ50. Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 50 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, HT100, RA250 and EQ50. Telephone User Part. TUP was an earlier implementation of SS7 and generally does not allow for data type applications. Type and Value. See Reciprocal neighbour. Transmit(ter). Transmit window buffer. Transmit Function. See RTF. Transmit PoWeR. Tx power level in the MS_TXPWR_REQUEST and MS_TXPWR_CONF parameters. Transmit Bandpass Filter. See BPF.
TU50
TUP TV Two-way neighbour Tx TX TXF TXPWR
TxBPF
U - UUS
UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MS to the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when a call is being cleared.(LAPD/LLC/RLP-Frame Type) User Agent User Agent Client UMTS Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number User Agent Server Universal Coded Character Set 2. A codeset containing all of the characters commonly used in computer applications. Unrestricted Digital Information. User Datagram Protocol. UDP is a connectionless protocol that, like TCP, runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network. It is used primarily for broadcasting messages over a network.( RFC 768) User Determined User Busy. User Equipment Uplink Frame Error. Ultra High Frequency. The UHF range of the radio spectrum is the band extending from 300 MHz to 3 GHz. Unnumbered Information (Frame) ( LAPD) / Unconrmed Information ( LLC) / Frame Type
UA UAC UARFCN UAS UCS2 UDI UDP
UDUB UE UFE UHF UI
13-81
Version 1 Rev 0

UIC Union International des Chemins de Fer. The UIC is the worldwide organisation for cooperation among railway companies. Its activities encompass all elds related to the development of rail transport. Universal Integrated Circuit Card ( 3GTS 22.101 / Bearer card of SIM / USIM) User ID. Unique number used by the system to identify the user. Upload (of software or database from an NE to a BSS). UpLink. UpLink Concatenator. The ULC concatenates RLC data blocks into LLC frames. Air interface. Unacknowledged Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC) Unacknowledged Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type) Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. The European implementation of the 3G wireless phone system. UMTS, which is part of IMT-2000, provides service in the 2GHz band and offers global roaming and personalized features. Designed as an evolutionary system for GSM network operators, multimedia data rates up to 2 Mbps are expected. A multiuser, multitasking operating system that is widely used as the master control program in workstations and especially servers. UNIX was developed by AT&T and freely distributed to government and academic institutions, causing it to be ported to a wider variety of machine families than any other operating system. As a result, UNIX became synonymous with open systems. Uniform PCM Interface (13 bit). The UPCMI is introduced for design purposes in order to separate the speech transcoder impairments from the basic audio impairments of the MS. Up to Date. Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTS receives). Uninterruptable Power Supply. A device that is inserted between a primary power source, such as a commercial utility, and the primary power input of equipment to be protected, e.g., a computer system, for the purpose of eliminating the effects of transient anomalies or temporary outages. Backup power is used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. User Part Unavailable. UTRAN Registration Area Uniform Resource Identier Uniform Resource Locators ( RFC 1738) USIM Application Toolkit Uplink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel TDD only
UICC UID UL UL ULC Um UM UMD UMTS
UNIX
UPCMI
UPD Uplink UPS
UPU URA URI URL USAT USCH
13-82
Version 1 Rev 0

Useful part of burst That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs from the full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of the GMSK signal. Uplink State Flag. Universal Subscriber Identity Module [3GTS 31.102] Unstructured Supplementary Service Data. The USSD mechanism allows the MS user and a PLMN operator dened application to communicate in a way which is transparent to the MS and to intermediate network entities. The mechanism allows development of PLMN specic supplementary services. UMTS Radio Access Network User-to-User Signalling supplementary service. The UUS supplementary service allows a mobile subscriber to send/receive a limited amount of information to/from another PLMN or ISDN subscriber over the signalling channel in association with a call to the other subscriber. Universal Wireless Convergence (Merge IS-136 with GSM)
USF USIM USSD
UTRAN UUS
UWC
V - VTX host
V VA Value only. Viterbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). An algorithm to compute the optimal (most likely) state sequence in a model given a sequence of observed outputs. Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence or absence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX. Videotex Access Point. Voice Broadcast Service. VBS allows the distribution of speech (or other signals which can be transmitted via the speech codec), generated by a service subscriber, into a predened geographical area to all or a group of service subscribers located in this area. See Virtual Circuit. Virtual Circuit Identier ( ATM) Voltage Controlled Oscillator. An oscillator whose clock frequency is determined by the magnitude of the voltage presented at its input. The frequency changes when the voltage changes. Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator. Visual Display Unit. A device used for the real-time temporary display of computer output data. Monitor. Voice Group Call Service. Virtual Home Environment ( 3GTS 22.121, 3GTS 23.127)
VAD VAP VBS
VC VCI VCO
VCXO VDU VGCS VHE
13-83
Version 1 Rev 0

Videotex The Videotex service is an interactive service, that by means of proper access points and standardized procedures, provides the access to data base information stored in host computers external to the PLMN, via public telecommunication networks. A connection between two devices, that functions as though it is a direct connection, even though it may physically be circuitous. The term is used most frequently to describe connections between two hosts in a packet-switching network. Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element which provides a temporary register for subscriber information for a visiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC. Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). The process of placing between 100,000 and one million electronic components on a single chip. Visited MSC. (Recommendation not to be used). Abbreviation for voice-coder. A device that usually consists of a speech analyzer, which converts analog speech waveforms into narrowband digital signals, and a speech synthesizer, which converts the digital signals into articial speech sounds. Voice Operated Transmission. An acoustoelectric transducer and a keying relay connected so that the keying relay is actuated when sound, or voice energy above a certain threshold is sensed by the transducer. A vox is used to eliminate the need for push-to-talk operation of a transmitter by using voice energy to turn on the transmitter Virtual Path Identier ( ATM) Visited PLMN. Videotex Service Centre. Send state variable. Vehicular Speaker Phone. Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. In a transmission line, the ratio of maximum to minimum voltage in a standing wave pattern. Note: The VSWR is a measure of impedance mismatch between the transmission line and its load. The higher the VSWR, the greater the mismatch. The minimum VSWR, i.e., that which corresponds to a perfect impedance match, is unity. The components dedicated to Videotex service.
Virtual Circuit
VLR
VLSI
VMSC vocoder
VOX
VPI VPLMN VSC V(SD) VSP VSWR
VTX host
W - WWW
WAN Wide Area Network. A physical or logical network that provides data communications to a larger number of independent users than are usually served by a LAN and is usually spread over a larger geographic area than that of a LAN. WANs may include physical networks, such as ISDN networks, X.25 networks, and T1 networks. Wireless Application Protocol Windows Internet Name Service
WAP WINS
13-84
Version 1 Rev 0

W-LAN WPA Wireless Local Area Network ( IEEE 802.11) Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Some supplementary services have the option of the subscriber using a password. If a password check is done with an incorrect password, the WPA is incremented by one. If a password check is passed, the WPA is set to zero. If the WPA exceeds the value three, the subscriber will have to register a new password with the service provider. Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnel execute input and output transactions for network management purposes. Work Station Function block. Window Size Number World Wide Web. An international, virtual-network-based information service composed of Internet host computers that provide on-line information in a specic hypertext format. WWW servers provide hypertext metalanguage (HTML) formatted documents using the hypertext transfer protocol, HTTP. Information on the WWW is accessed with a hypertext browser.
WS
WSF WSN WWW
X - X Window
X.25 X.25, adopted as a standard by the CCITT, is a commonly used protocol for public packet-switched networks (PSPDNS). The X.25 protocol allows computers on different public networks to communicate through an intermediary computer at the network layer level. The protocol corresponds closely to the data-link and physical-layer protocols dened in the OSI communication model. A communications link which conforms to X.25 specications and uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links). Transcoder to BSS Link. The carrier communications link between the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS. Transceiver Control Board. Part of the Transceiver. Full-rate Transcoder. The XCDR is the digital signal processing equipment required to perform GSM-dened speech encoding and decoding. In terms of data transmission, the speech transcoder interfaces the 64 kbit/s PCM in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the Air Interface. See also RXCDR. The circuit board required to perform speech transcoding at the BSS or (R)XCDR). Also known as the MSI (XCDR) board. Interchangeable with the GDP board.
X.25 link XBL XCB XCDR
XCDR board
13-85
Version 1 Rev 0

XFER XID xterm Transfer. eXchange IDentier. X terminal window. A terminal emulator program for the X Window System. A user can have many different invocations of xterm running at once on the same display, each of which provides independent input and output for the process running in it (normally a shell). A specication for device-independent windowing operations on bitmap display devices.
X Window
ZC
ZC Zone Code. Part of the RSZI. The ZC identies a regional subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely within a PLMN.
13-86
Version 1 Rev 0
13-87

3g Motorolla

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

3g Motorolla

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6 Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 2: Network Architecture

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

2-32 2-32 2-34 2-34 2-36 2-36

Chapter 3: Network Services

Chapter 4: W-CDMA Theory

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

Chapter 5: The Physical Layer

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

Chapter 7: Radio Resource Management Functions

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

Chapter 8: HSDPA Overview

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

Chapter 9: HSUPA Overview

Chapter 10: UMTS Terrestrial Interface Protocols

Chapter 11: UMTS Terrestrial Physical and Data Link Layer

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

Chapter 12: Annexe A

Chapter 13: Glossary

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

S7- SYSGEN. T -TxBPF. . . U - UUS . . . V - VTX host . W - WWW . . X - X Window. ZC . . . . . .

13-66 13-75 13-81 13-83 13-84 13-85 13-86

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

About This Manual

CP13: Introduction to UMTS USR6

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

This page intentionally left blank.

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

This page intentionally left blank.

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc.

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status

WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status

WCDMA Technology and Deployment Status

Base station capacity and hardware efficiency Data services offered

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule

HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule

HSPA Standardization and Deployment Schedule

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

Radio Capability Evolution with HSPA

2005-2006 Motorola, Inc. Pub-Date